PAC SecureNet User Guide - Eurotech Security Systems PLC
PAC SecureNet User Guide - Eurotech Security Systems PLC
PAC SecureNet User Guide - Eurotech Security Systems PLC
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
<strong>PAC</strong> <strong>SecureNet</strong><br />
<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 Nov 2008<br />
<strong>PAC</strong><br />
A Stanley <strong>Security</strong> Solutions Business<br />
1 Park Gate Close, Bredbury, Stockport, SK6 2SZ, England<br />
Tel: +44 (0) 161 406 3400. Fax: +44 (0) 161 430 8658<br />
www.pac.co.uk
Version Date Details<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 ii<br />
Issue Record<br />
2.00 Mar 04 Administration Software 2.0 helpfile<br />
2.10 Jul 04 Keyholder search updated and event archiving added. Magstripe<br />
specification moved to customisation. Encoder added<br />
2.20 Nov 04 Lift control added. CCTV added.<br />
2.21 Jan 05 Technical support telephone number updated. Bolt door overrides time<br />
profile.<br />
2.60 Jul 05 IP Address Configuration of 500, 512IP and 2200IP; 2200 local alarms<br />
added<br />
2.61 Nov 05 All facilities included in one document<br />
3.10 Aug 06 AEM, Multiple Org Units, Muster, Audit Trail, etc. added<br />
3.11 Dec 06 PIN change at door added, static address for IP, legacy PIN readers<br />
only for legacy controllers<br />
3.20 Feb 08 Tear–off tabs; ‘Public’ access groups; Visual notification; Event log<br />
changes; Keyboard controls for PTZ in CCTV. Organisation unit reports.<br />
Keyholder events highlighting.<br />
3.21 Jun 08 Master Override Input clarified; Area names recommendation; Report<br />
filtering note<br />
3.22 Nov 08 32 controllers on a direct channel. UI.exe now <strong>PAC</strong>UI.exe. Link to<br />
knowledge database added.
Version 3.22 Nov 2008<br />
Changes are periodically made to the product and these changes will be incorporated into new<br />
editions of this manual. Stanley <strong>Security</strong> Solutions shall not be liable for errors contained herein<br />
or for any consequential damages connected with the use of this material.<br />
Copyright and Protective Notices<br />
1. The copyright of this document and the associated drawings is the property of Stanley<br />
<strong>Security</strong> Solutions, and is issued on condition that it is not copied, reprinted or reproduced,<br />
nor its contents disclosed, either wholly or in part, without the consent in writing of, or in<br />
accordance with the conditions of a contract with Stanley <strong>Security</strong> Solutions.<br />
2. The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other<br />
protective rights of Stanley <strong>Security</strong> Solutions, or others.<br />
3. Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical, and must be specifically<br />
confirmed by Stanley <strong>Security</strong> Solutions before they become applicable to any tender, order<br />
or contract.<br />
Training and Technical Support ( only)<br />
Training courses covering the installation and use of all products are regularly held at <strong>PAC</strong><br />
Stockport. For further information on course availability, or to discuss your specific<br />
requirements, contact the Training Manager at the address below.<br />
It is strongly recommended that any persons installing or commissioning <strong>PAC</strong> products<br />
attend a suitable training course beforehand.<br />
Technical Support for all products is available during normal office hours. This service is<br />
provided primarily for the use of trained engineers.<br />
End users of <strong>PAC</strong> products should first of all contact their installation or maintenance<br />
company before contacting <strong>PAC</strong>.<br />
Further information is given in 17409 Technical Support and Training Information.<br />
Knowledge database available after registration: www.pactechinfo.co.uk.<br />
<strong>PAC</strong><br />
A Stanley <strong>Security</strong> Solutions Business<br />
1 Park Gate Close<br />
Bredbury<br />
Stockport<br />
SK6 2SZ<br />
England<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 iii
IMPORTANT:<br />
When installing the hardware the following should be noted:<br />
HEALTH AND SAFETY<br />
Installation must be wired in accordance with National Wiring Regulations (BS7671, IEE<br />
National Wiring Regulations in the UK). Failure to do so can result in injury or death by<br />
electric shock.<br />
It must also comply with any local Fire, Health and Safety regulations. A secured door<br />
that may be part of an escape route from an area must be fitted with:<br />
• A fail-safe lock (A) so that the door will be released if the power fails. Ideally a<br />
magnetic lock should be used as these are less likely to jam or seize.<br />
• A normally-closed break-glass or manual pull (B) in the lock supply wiring so that in<br />
an emergency the fail-safe lock can be immediately depowered.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 iv<br />
B<br />
The controller must be earthed.<br />
Isolate the controller power supply before working on the controller.<br />
Cabling<br />
The cabling used in the access control systems (e.g. reader cables) are not prone to electrical<br />
interference. However, you should avoid routing cable close to heavy load switching cables and<br />
equipment. If this is unavoidable, cross the cable at right angles every 3.3-6.6ft/1-2m to reduce<br />
the interference.<br />
ESD Precautions<br />
The 500 series of controllers contain static-sensitive devices; an earth grounding strap should<br />
be worn when maintaining a running system.<br />
RFID Devices<br />
As similar RFID technology is now widely used in a number of other industries, for example<br />
automotive immobilisers, it is possible that interaction between your access control ID and other<br />
devices may cause one or the other to function incorrectly. Should you suspect that you have<br />
experienced such a problem the solution is to separate your access control ID from other RFID<br />
devices.<br />
Lithium Batteries<br />
There is a danger of explosion if lithium batteries are incorrectly replaced or handled. Please<br />
read carefully the following guidelines. Failure to do so can result in injury.<br />
1. Take steps to ensure that the batteries are never short circuited.<br />
2. Always store the batteries separately in non-conducting materials.<br />
3. Do not place lithium batteries with normal waste collections; dispose of them correctly.<br />
For information on the disposal of used lithium batteries and your local disposal sites, call the<br />
Environment Agency Helpline (UK only) on 08459 333111.<br />
A
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 v<br />
Table of Contents<br />
1. Introduction to Help File....................................................................................................... 1<br />
1.1 Displaying Help Information .............................................................................................. 1<br />
1.2 Tab Area Facilities............................................................................................................. 1<br />
1.3 Toolbar Facilities ............................................................................................................... 1<br />
1.4 Browse Facilities ............................................................................................................... 2<br />
2. Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 3<br />
2.1 Administration Software Specifications............................................................................. 3<br />
2.1.1 System Limits........................................................................................................... 3<br />
2.1.2 Administration Features ........................................................................................... 4<br />
2.2 Hardware Specifications ................................................................................................... 5<br />
2.2.1 500 Specifications.................................................................................................... 5<br />
2.2.2 512 Specifications.................................................................................................... 6<br />
2.2.3 520/530 I/O Controllers............................................................................................ 7<br />
3. Hardware Installation............................................................................................................ 8<br />
3.1 500 Series ......................................................................................................................... 8<br />
3.2 1100/2100/2200 Series ..................................................................................................... 8<br />
4. Administration Software....................................................................................................... 9<br />
4.1.1 Introduction to the Administration Software ............................................................. 9<br />
4.1.2 Installation ................................................................................................................ 9<br />
4.1.3 Updates.................................................................................................................. 10<br />
4.2 Access Control Overview ................................................................................................ 11<br />
4.2.1 System Design....................................................................................................... 11<br />
4.2.1.1 Access Types................................................................................................. 11<br />
4.2.1.2 System Design............................................................................................... 11<br />
4.2.1.3 System Plan................................................................................................... 12<br />
4.2.1.4 Hardware Configuration using 500 Channel ................................................. 13<br />
4.2.1.5 Hardware Configuration using Offline Channel ............................................. 14<br />
4.2.2 Simple Example ..................................................................................................... 15<br />
4.2.2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 15<br />
4.2.2.2 Define the Areas ............................................................................................ 15<br />
4.2.3 Add the 500 TCP/IP channel ................................................................................. 16<br />
4.2.3.1 Add and Probe the Controller ........................................................................ 16<br />
4.2.3.2 Define the Holiday Profiles ............................................................................ 16<br />
4.2.3.3 Define the Time/Mode Profiles ...................................................................... 17<br />
4.2.3.4 Update the Doors........................................................................................... 18<br />
4.2.3.5 Define Access Groups ................................................................................... 19<br />
4.2.3.6 Add Keyholders.............................................................................................. 19<br />
4.2.3.7 Add Operators................................................................................................ 19<br />
4.2.3.8 Download Database to the Controller............................................................ 20<br />
4.3 Administration Software Tools ........................................................................................ 21<br />
4.3.1 Configure Device IP Addresses............................................................................. 21<br />
4.3.2 Help........................................................................................................................ 22<br />
4.3.3 Release Notes ....................................................................................................... 22<br />
4.3.4 Restore Database .................................................................................................. 22<br />
4.3.5 Service Manager.................................................................................................... 22<br />
4.3.6 Upgrade Database................................................................................................. 23<br />
4.3.7 Application Software .............................................................................................. 23<br />
4.4 Administration Software Overview .................................................................................. 24<br />
4.4.1 Login ...................................................................................................................... 24
4.4.2 Administration Software Window ........................................................................... 25<br />
4.4.3 Welcome Screen / System Summary .................................................................... 26<br />
4.4.4 Menus .................................................................................................................... 27<br />
4.4.5 Toolbar ...................................................................................................................32<br />
4.4.6 Explorer Bar ........................................................................................................... 33<br />
4.4.7 Status Bar .............................................................................................................. 34<br />
4.4.8 List View.................................................................................................................34<br />
4.4.9 Property Page ........................................................................................................ 35<br />
4.4.10 Logoff ...................................................................................................................36<br />
4.5 Organisation Options....................................................................................................... 37<br />
4.5.1 Customisation ........................................................................................................ 37<br />
4.5.2 System Settings ..................................................................................................... 37<br />
4.5.3 Card Format........................................................................................................... 38<br />
4.5.3.1 Proximity Reader ........................................................................................... 39<br />
4.5.3.2 Magnetic Stripe .............................................................................................. 39<br />
4.5.3.3 Wiegand (2601 format) .................................................................................. 41<br />
4.5.3.4 Adding or Editing a Card Format ................................................................... 42<br />
4.5.4 Event Archiving ...................................................................................................... 43<br />
4.5.5 Alarm Responses................................................................................................... 44<br />
4.5.6 System Access....................................................................................................... 44<br />
4.5.7 Organisational Unit Details .................................................................................... 44<br />
4.5.8 Access....................................................................................................................45<br />
4.5.9 Custom Labels ....................................................................................................... 45<br />
4.5.10 Categories............................................................................................................ 46<br />
4.5.11 Keyholder Extra Details ....................................................................................... 47<br />
4.5.12 Alarms .................................................................................................................. 47<br />
4.6 Organisational Units........................................................................................................49<br />
4.6.1 Organisational Units List........................................................................................ 49<br />
4.6.2 Organisational Unit Details .................................................................................... 49<br />
4.7 Keyholders ...................................................................................................................... 50<br />
4.7.1 Keyholder List View ............................................................................................... 50<br />
4.7.2 Keyholder Property Page....................................................................................... 50<br />
4.7.2.1 Keyholder Details........................................................................................... 50<br />
4.7.2.2 Keyholder Personal Details ........................................................................... 52<br />
4.7.2.3 Keyholder Keys.............................................................................................. 53<br />
4.7.2.4 Keyholder Access Groups ............................................................................. 54<br />
4.7.2.5 Keyholder Guest Access ............................................................................... 54<br />
4.7.2.6 Keyholder Personal Access........................................................................... 55<br />
4.7.2.7 Keyholder Notes ............................................................................................ 56<br />
4.7.2.8 Keyholder Extra Information .......................................................................... 56<br />
4.7.2.9 Keyholder Events........................................................................................... 56<br />
4.7.2.10 Keyholder Area Usage................................................................................. 57<br />
4.7.3 Add/Update/Delete a Keyholder ............................................................................ 58<br />
4.8 Guests ............................................................................................................................. 59<br />
4.9 Operators ........................................................................................................................ 60<br />
4.9.1 Operator List View ................................................................................................. 60<br />
4.9.2 Operator Property Page......................................................................................... 60<br />
4.9.2.1 Operator Details............................................................................................. 60<br />
4.9.2.2 Operator Privileges ........................................................................................ 61<br />
4.9.2.3 Operator Alarm Viewer .................................................................................. 62<br />
4.9.3 Add/Update/Delete an Operator ............................................................................ 63<br />
4.9.4 Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator ................................................................. 64<br />
4.10 Time & Mode Profiles.................................................................................................... 65<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 vi
4.10.1 Time & Mode Profile List View............................................................................. 65<br />
4.10.2 Time & Mode Profile Property Page .................................................................... 65<br />
4.10.2.1 Daily Time Profiles....................................................................................... 65<br />
4.10.2.2 Weekly Time Profiles ................................................................................... 66<br />
4.10.2.3 Mode Profiles ............................................................................................... 67<br />
4.10.2.4 Area Mode Profile Access Options.............................................................. 68<br />
4.10.2.5 Holiday Time Profile..................................................................................... 68<br />
4.10.3 Add/Update/Delete a Time/Mode Profile ............................................................. 70<br />
4.11 Holiday Profiles ............................................................................................................. 71<br />
4.11.1 Holiday Profile List View ...................................................................................... 71<br />
4.11.2 Holiday Profile Property Page.............................................................................. 71<br />
4.11.3 Add/Update/Delete a Holiday Profile ................................................................... 72<br />
4.12 Areas ............................................................................................................................. 73<br />
4.12.1 Area List View ...................................................................................................... 73<br />
4.12.2 Area Property Page ............................................................................................. 73<br />
4.12.2.1 Area Details ................................................................................................. 73<br />
4.12.2.2 Area Appearance......................................................................................... 74<br />
4.12.2.3 Area Alarm Management............................................................................. 74<br />
4.12.2.4 Area Alarm Definitions ................................................................................. 75<br />
4.12.2.5 Area Alarm Points........................................................................................ 75<br />
4.12.2.6 Area Outputs................................................................................................ 76<br />
4.12.2.7 Area Management ....................................................................................... 77<br />
4.12.2.8 Area <strong>Security</strong> Level...................................................................................... 78<br />
4.12.3 Add/Update/Delete an Area................................................................................. 78<br />
4.13 Access Groups..............................................................................................................79<br />
4.13.1 Access Group List View....................................................................................... 79<br />
4.13.2 Access Group Property Page .............................................................................. 79<br />
4.13.2.1 Access Group Details .................................................................................. 79<br />
4.13.2.2 Access Group Access.................................................................................. 79<br />
4.13.2.3 Access Group Advanced ............................................................................. 80<br />
4.13.3 Add/Update/Delete an Access Group.................................................................. 81<br />
4.14 Hardware....................................................................................................................... 82<br />
4.14.1 Hardware List View .............................................................................................. 82<br />
4.14.2 Channel Property Page........................................................................................ 85<br />
4.14.2.1 Channel Details............................................................................................ 85<br />
4.14.2.2 Channel Areas ............................................................................................. 86<br />
4.14.2.3 Channel 500................................................................................................. 86<br />
4.14.2.4 Channel Alarm Management....................................................................... 87<br />
4.14.2.5 Channel Settings.......................................................................................... 87<br />
4.14.2.6 Channel Dialup ............................................................................................ 88<br />
4.14.2.7 Channel Dialback......................................................................................... 89<br />
4.14.2.8 Channel Layout............................................................................................ 90<br />
4.14.2.9 Add/Update/Delete a Channel..................................................................... 90<br />
4.14.3 Controller Property Page ..................................................................................... 92<br />
4.14.3.1 Controller Details ......................................................................................... 92<br />
4.14.3.2 Controller Information .................................................................................. 93<br />
4.14.3.3 Controller 2100/2200 ................................................................................... 94<br />
4.14.3.4 Controller Doors........................................................................................... 96<br />
4.14.3.5 Controller Inputs........................................................................................... 96<br />
4.14.3.6 Controller Outputs........................................................................................ 99<br />
Manual ..................................................................................................................... 101<br />
Local Area Alarm ..................................................................................................... 101<br />
4.14.3.7 Controller Alarm Management................................................................... 102<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 vii
4.14.3.8 Add/Update/Delete a Controller................................................................. 102<br />
4.14.3.9 Probe/Configure/Unconfigure Controllers.................................................. 103<br />
4.14.3.10 Online Controller Tasks ........................................................................... 104<br />
4.14.4 Offline Channel and Controller Tasks................................................................ 105<br />
4.14.4.1 Download Database to the Controllers using the PC ................................ 105<br />
4.14.4.2 Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA.............................. 106<br />
4.14.4.3 Upload Database from PDA to a PC ......................................................... 106<br />
4.14.5 Lift Property Page .............................................................................................. 107<br />
4.14.5.1 Lift Details .................................................................................................. 107<br />
4.14.5.2 Lift Destinations ......................................................................................... 107<br />
4.14.5.3 Lift Access.................................................................................................. 108<br />
4.14.6 Add/Update/Delete a Lift Reader....................................................................... 109<br />
4.15 Doors........................................................................................................................... 110<br />
4.15.1 Door List View.................................................................................................... 110<br />
4.15.2 Door Property Page ........................................................................................... 110<br />
4.15.2.1 Door Details ............................................................................................... 110<br />
4.15.2.2 Door Access............................................................................................... 111<br />
4.15.2.3 Door Configuration..................................................................................... 112<br />
Controller.................................................................................................................. 115<br />
4.15.2.4 Door Auxiliary IO........................................................................................ 116<br />
4.15.2.5 Door Alarm Management........................................................................... 117<br />
4.15.2.6 Door <strong>Security</strong> Level ................................................................................... 118<br />
4.15.3 Add/Update/Delete a Door................................................................................. 118<br />
4.16 Video Source............................................................................................................... 119<br />
4.16.1 Video Source List View ...................................................................................... 119<br />
4.16.2 Video Source Property Page ............................................................................. 119<br />
4.16.2.1 Video Source Property Page ..................................................................... 119<br />
4.16.2.2 Add/Update/Delete a Video Source........................................................... 119<br />
4.16.3 Video Sources - Configure................................................................................. 120<br />
4.16.3.1 Configuring Video Sources........................................................................ 120<br />
4.16.3.2 Video Sources - General Tab .................................................................... 120<br />
Address.................................................................................................................... 120<br />
4.16.3.3 Video Sources - Presets Tab..................................................................... 121<br />
4.16.3.4 Presets Tab - General Tab ........................................................................ 121<br />
4.16.3.5 Presets Tab - View Tab ............................................................................. 122<br />
4.16.3.6 Presets Tab - Alarm Points........................................................................ 122<br />
4.17 Reports........................................................................................................................ 123<br />
4.17.1 Report Facilities ................................................................................................. 123<br />
4.17.2 Reports Provided ............................................................................................... 124<br />
4.17.3 Report Search Parameters ................................................................................ 126<br />
4.17.4 Export a Report.................................................................................................. 127<br />
4.17.5 Add a Report to Favourites................................................................................ 128<br />
4.17.6 Add a Custom Report ........................................................................................ 129<br />
5. Image Capture ................................................................................................................... 130<br />
5.1 Image Capture Introduction........................................................................................... 130<br />
5.2 Using the Image Capture Utility .................................................................................... 130<br />
5.3 Capture Source ............................................................................................................. 130<br />
5.4 Preview Window............................................................................................................ 131<br />
6. ID Card Designer ............................................................................................................... 132<br />
6.1 Card Designer Introduction ........................................................................................... 132<br />
6.1.1 Displaying the Card Designer .............................................................................. 132<br />
6.1.2 Interactive Map..................................................................................................... 132<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 viii
6.2 Card Designer Menus ................................................................................................... 132<br />
6.2.1 Design Menu........................................................................................................ 132<br />
6.2.2 Edit Menu ............................................................................................................. 132<br />
6.2.3 View Menu ........................................................................................................... 133<br />
6.2.4 Help Menu............................................................................................................ 133<br />
6.3 Toolbar, Browser and Status Bar .................................................................................. 133<br />
6.3.1 Card Designer Toolbar......................................................................................... 133<br />
6.3.2 Card Designer Browser........................................................................................ 134<br />
6.3.3 Card Designer Status Bar.................................................................................... 134<br />
6.4 Design Regions ............................................................................................................. 134<br />
6.4.1 Add Items Region ................................................................................................ 134<br />
6.4.1.1 Creating Designs ......................................................................................... 135<br />
6.4.1.2 ID-Card Design Overview ............................................................................ 135<br />
6.4.2 Card Face Region................................................................................................ 135<br />
6.4.2.1 Selecting Card Faces .................................................................................. 135<br />
6.4.2.2 Mouse Coordinates...................................................................................... 135<br />
6.4.2.3 Card Face Properties................................................................................... 135<br />
6.4.2.4 Rulers........................................................................................................... 135<br />
6.4.2.5 Viewing Card Face Properties..................................................................... 135<br />
6.4.2.6 Editing Card Face Properties....................................................................... 135<br />
6.4.3 Properties Region ................................................................................................ 136<br />
6.4.3.1 Editing Item Properties ................................................................................ 136<br />
6.4.3.2 Update / Exit ................................................................................................ 136<br />
6.4.4 Buttons Region..................................................................................................... 136<br />
6.4.4.1 Assign a Name to this Item.......................................................................... 136<br />
6.4.4.2 Update Button .............................................................................................. 136<br />
6.4.4.3 Exit Button.................................................................................................... 136<br />
6.5 Card Design Overview .................................................................................................. 137<br />
6.5.1 Drawing and Placing Items .................................................................................. 137<br />
6.5.1.1 Dragging and Dropping................................................................................ 137<br />
6.5.1.2 Selecting and Clicking ................................................................................. 137<br />
6.5.1.3 Fixed Shape Items....................................................................................... 137<br />
6.5.1.4 Variable Shape Items .................................................................................. 138<br />
6.5.1.5 Line .............................................................................................................. 138<br />
6.5.2 Editing Properties................................................................................................. 138<br />
6.5.3 Grouping and Ungrouping.................................................................................... 138<br />
6.5.4 Select Mode ......................................................................................................... 139<br />
6.5.5 Move, Resize and Delete..................................................................................... 139<br />
6.5.6 Printing Double-Sided ID Cards on a Single-Sided ID Card Printer.................... 140<br />
6.5.6.1 Printing from the ID Card Designer ............................................................. 140<br />
6.5.6.2 Batch Printing ID Cards from Keyholder Module......................................... 140<br />
6.6 Item Properties .............................................................................................................. 141<br />
6.6.1 Multiple Item Properties ....................................................................................... 141<br />
6.6.2 Group Item ........................................................................................................... 141<br />
6.6.3 Shape Item Properties ......................................................................................... 141<br />
6.6.4 Image Item / Photo Item / Signature Item Properties........................................... 142<br />
6.6.5 Line Item Properties............................................................................................. 142<br />
6.6.6 Text Item / Text Data Item Properties.................................................................. 142<br />
6.7 Individual Properties...................................................................................................... 143<br />
6.7.1 Name Property..................................................................................................... 143<br />
6.7.2 Units Properties ................................................................................................... 143<br />
6.7.3 Background Properties ........................................................................................ 143<br />
6.7.4 Snap Properties ................................................................................................... 143<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 ix
6.7.5 Holopatch / Magstripe / Smart Card Properties................................................... 143<br />
6.7.6 Orientation............................................................................................................ 144<br />
6.7.7 X, Y, Width and Height Properties ....................................................................... 144<br />
6.7.8 Aspect Lock Property........................................................................................... 145<br />
6.7.9 Anchor and Angle Properties............................................................................... 145<br />
6.7.9.1 Anchor.......................................................................................................... 145<br />
6.7.9.2 Angle............................................................................................................ 145<br />
6.7.10 Transparency Property ...................................................................................... 145<br />
6.7.11 Shape Properties ............................................................................................... 146<br />
6.7.12 Text Properties................................................................................................... 146<br />
6.7.12.1 Font............................................................................................................ 146<br />
6.7.12.2 Multi-line..................................................................................................... 146<br />
6.7.12.3 Colour ........................................................................................................ 146<br />
6.7.13 Line Properties................................................................................................... 146<br />
6.7.13.1 Line Width .................................................................................................. 146<br />
6.7.13.2 Colour ........................................................................................................ 146<br />
6.7.14 Image Property................................................................................................... 146<br />
6.7.15 Shadow Properties............................................................................................. 147<br />
6.7.16 Colour Properties ............................................................................................... 147<br />
6.7.17 Data Field Property ............................................................................................ 147<br />
6.8 Group Item Properties................................................................................................... 148<br />
6.8.1 Group Item Properties.......................................................................................... 148<br />
6.8.2 Creating a Group ................................................................................................. 148<br />
6.8.3 Ungrouping a Group ............................................................................................ 148<br />
6.8.4 Editing Group Properties...................................................................................... 148<br />
6.8.5 Resizing a Group ................................................................................................. 148<br />
6.9 Context Menus .............................................................................................................. 148<br />
6.9.1 Card Face ............................................................................................................ 148<br />
6.9.2 Ruler..................................................................................................................... 149<br />
6.9.3 Multiple Items ....................................................................................................... 149<br />
6.9.4 Group ................................................................................................................... 149<br />
6.9.5 Single Items ......................................................................................................... 149<br />
6.9.6 Image ................................................................................................................... 149<br />
6.9.7 Line ...................................................................................................................... 149<br />
6.10 Common Items ............................................................................................................ 150<br />
6.10.1 Align to Grid ....................................................................................................... 150<br />
6.10.2 Docking Items .................................................................................................... 150<br />
6.10.2.1 Docking Items ............................................................................................ 150<br />
6.10.2.2 Docking Text Data Items ........................................................................... 150<br />
6.10.2.3 Moving Docked Items ................................................................................ 150<br />
6.10.2.4 Undocking items ........................................................................................ 151<br />
6.10.2.5 Preventing Docking.................................................................................... 151<br />
6.10.3 Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face ....................................................... 151<br />
6.10.4 Zoom Function ................................................................................................... 151<br />
6.10.5 Measurement ..................................................................................................... 152<br />
7. Alarm Map Designer.......................................................................................................... 153<br />
7.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................... 153<br />
7.1.1 Starting Alarm Map Designer............................................................................... 153<br />
7.1.2 Alarm Designer Interactive Map .......................................................................... 153<br />
7.1.3 Alarm Map Designer Layout ................................................................................ 153<br />
7.1.4 Making a Map....................................................................................................... 153<br />
7.2 Alarm Map Designer Glossary ...................................................................................... 153<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 x
7.3 Alarm Map Designer Interactive Map............................................................................ 154<br />
7.4 Alarm Map Designer Menus.......................................................................................... 155<br />
7.4.1 Design Menu........................................................................................................ 155<br />
7.4.2 Edit Menu ............................................................................................................. 155<br />
7.4.3 View Menu ........................................................................................................... 155<br />
7.4.4 Help Menu............................................................................................................ 155<br />
7.5 Alarm Map Designer Toolbar ........................................................................................ 156<br />
7.6 Add Items Region.......................................................................................................... 156<br />
7.6.1 General Tab ......................................................................................................... 156<br />
7.6.2 Areas Tab............................................................................................................. 157<br />
7.6.3 Inputs Tab ............................................................................................................ 157<br />
7.6.4 Outputs Tab ......................................................................................................... 157<br />
7.6.5 CCTV Tab ............................................................................................................ 158<br />
7.6.6 Alarm Points Tab.................................................................................................. 158<br />
Controllers................................................................................................................ 158<br />
Doors........................................................................................................................ 158<br />
7.6.7 Further information on the Add Items Region...................................................... 158<br />
7.6.7.1 Changing Add Items Views.......................................................................... 158<br />
7.6.7.2 Drawing and Creating Maps ........................................................................ 159<br />
7.6.7.3 Map Design Overview.................................................................................. 159<br />
7.7 Design Editor Region .................................................................................................... 159<br />
7.7.1 Design Editor Region Introduction ....................................................................... 159<br />
7.7.1.1 Adding / Deleting Map Pages ...................................................................... 159<br />
7.7.1.2 Drawing and Placing Items .......................................................................... 159<br />
7.7.1.3 Editing Map Designs.................................................................................... 159<br />
7.7.1.4 Properties..................................................................................................... 159<br />
7.7.1.5 Map Making Hints ........................................................................................ 159<br />
7.7.2 Map Making and Editing ...................................................................................... 159<br />
7.7.2.1 Map Making Hints ........................................................................................ 159<br />
7.7.2.2 Adding/Deleting/Copying Pages.................................................................. 160<br />
7.7.2.3 Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor.......................................................... 160<br />
7.7.2.4 Editing Properties......................................................................................... 161<br />
7.7.2.5 Page Tabs.................................................................................................... 161<br />
7.7.2.6 Group Item ................................................................................................... 162<br />
7.7.2.7 Grouping and Ungrouping ........................................................................... 162<br />
7.7.2.8 Select Mode ................................................................................................. 163<br />
7.7.2.9 Move/Resize/Delete Items........................................................................... 163<br />
7.7.2.10 Drawing and Placing Items ........................................................................ 164<br />
7.7.3 Context Menus..................................................................................................... 165<br />
7.7.3.1 Multiple Items............................................................................................... 165<br />
7.7.3.2 Page............................................................................................................. 165<br />
7.7.3.3 Ruler ............................................................................................................ 165<br />
7.7.3.4 Group ........................................................................................................... 165<br />
7.7.3.5 Single Items ................................................................................................. 165<br />
7.7.3.6 Image ........................................................................................................... 166<br />
7.7.3.7 Line .............................................................................................................. 166<br />
7.8 Properties Region.......................................................................................................... 166<br />
7.8.1 Item Properties..................................................................................................... 166<br />
7.8.1.1 Multiple Item Properties ............................................................................... 166<br />
7.8.1.2 Group Item Properties ................................................................................. 166<br />
7.8.1.3 Shape Item Properties ................................................................................. 167<br />
7.8.1.4 Image Item Properties ................................................................................. 167<br />
7.8.1.5 Line Item Properties..................................................................................... 168<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xi
7.8.1.6 Text Item Properties..................................................................................... 168<br />
7.8.1.7 View Item Properties.................................................................................... 168<br />
7.8.1.8 Button Item Properties ................................................................................. 169<br />
7.8.1.9 Alarm Area Properties ................................................................................. 169<br />
7.8.1.10 Alarm Point/Output Properties ................................................................... 169<br />
7.8.1.11 Video Source Properties............................................................................ 170<br />
7.8.2 Individual Properties ............................................................................................ 170<br />
7.8.2.1 Name Property............................................................................................. 170<br />
7.8.2.2 Tool tip Property........................................................................................... 170<br />
7.8.2.3 Action and Set Action................................................................................... 170<br />
7.8.2.4 X, Y, Height and Width Properties............................................................... 170<br />
7.8.2.5 Resolution and Units Properties .................................................................. 171<br />
7.8.2.6 Background Properties ................................................................................ 171<br />
7.8.2.7 Aspect Lock Property................................................................................... 171<br />
7.8.2.8 Anchor and Angle Property.......................................................................... 171<br />
7.8.2.9 Display Mode ............................................................................................... 172<br />
7.8.2.10 Transparency Property .............................................................................. 172<br />
7.8.2.11 Text Property ............................................................................................. 172<br />
7.8.2.12 Font Property ............................................................................................. 172<br />
7.8.2.13 Multi-line Property...................................................................................... 172<br />
7.8.2.14 Colour Property.......................................................................................... 172<br />
7.8.2.15 Line Width Property ................................................................................... 173<br />
7.8.2.16 Image Property .......................................................................................... 173<br />
7.8.2.17 Shadow, Shadow X, Shadow Y and Shadow Density............................... 173<br />
7.8.2.18 Snap Grid, Snap Grid Size, Snap Grid Colour .......................................... 173<br />
7.9 Status Bar...................................................................................................................... 174<br />
8. Alarm Viewer...................................................................................................................... 175<br />
8.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................... 175<br />
8.2 Alarm Viewer Glossary.................................................................................................. 175<br />
8.3 Interactive Map.............................................................................................................. 176<br />
8.4 Alarm Viewer Menus ..................................................................................................... 177<br />
8.4.1 File Menu ............................................................................................................. 177<br />
8.4.2 View Menu ........................................................................................................... 177<br />
8.4.3 Visual Notification ................................................................................................ 178<br />
8.4.4 Active Alarms / Event Log / Alarm History Menu ................................................. 178<br />
8.4.5 Alarm Board Menu ............................................................................................... 178<br />
8.4.6 Areas Menu.......................................................................................................... 178<br />
8.4.7 Map Menu ............................................................................................................ 180<br />
8.4.8 CCTV Menu ......................................................................................................... 180<br />
8.4.9 Incident Report Details......................................................................................... 180<br />
8.4.10 Context Menu..................................................................................................... 181<br />
8.5 Alarm Viewer Toolbars.................................................................................................. 181<br />
8.5.1 Alarm Viewer Toolbar .......................................................................................... 181<br />
8.5.2 Active Alarm Toolbar............................................................................................ 181<br />
8.5.3 Event Log Viewer Toolbar.................................................................................... 182<br />
8.5.4 Alarm History Toolbar .......................................................................................... 182<br />
8.5.5 CCTV Region Toolbar.......................................................................................... 183<br />
8.6 Alarm/Event Region ...................................................................................................... 183<br />
8.6.1 Active Alarms ....................................................................................................... 183<br />
8.6.1.1 Alarm Information......................................................................................... 183<br />
8.6.1.2 Viewing Associated Active Alarm Information ............................................. 184<br />
8.6.2 Managing Alarms ................................................................................................. 184<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xii
8.6.3 Acknowledge Commands .................................................................................... 184<br />
8.6.3.1 Acknowledge................................................................................................ 184<br />
8.6.3.2 Acknowledge All........................................................................................... 185<br />
8.6.3.3 Acknowledge Selected Command............................................................... 185<br />
8.6.4 Silence Commands.............................................................................................. 185<br />
8.6.4.1 Silence All .................................................................................................... 185<br />
8.6.5 Event Log Viewer................................................................................................. 185<br />
8.6.5.1 Event Information List .................................................................................. 185<br />
8.6.5.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information ............................................... 186<br />
8.6.6 Alarm History........................................................................................................ 186<br />
8.6.6.1 Alarm History Column Headings.................................................................. 186<br />
8.6.6.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information ............................................... 186<br />
8.7 Areas Region................................................................................................................. 187<br />
8.7.1 Areas Board ......................................................................................................... 187<br />
8.7.1.1 Viewing Associated Alarm Area Information ............................................... 187<br />
8.7.1.2 Viewing Additional Alarm Area Information ................................................. 187<br />
8.7.2 Issuing Commands to Areas................................................................................ 187<br />
8.7.2.1 Toolbar......................................................................................................... 187<br />
8.7.2.2 Areas Menu.................................................................................................. 187<br />
8.7.2.3 Context Menu............................................................................................... 187<br />
8.7.2.4 Areas Commands ........................................................................................ 188<br />
8.8 Alarm Board Region...................................................................................................... 189<br />
8.8.1 Alarm Board ......................................................................................................... 189<br />
8.8.1.1 Alarm Viewer Icons...................................................................................... 189<br />
8.8.1.2 Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States .......................................................... 189<br />
8.8.1.3 Viewing Additional Alarm Point Information................................................. 190<br />
8.8.2 Issuing Commands to Alarm Points..................................................................... 191<br />
8.8.2.1 General commands ..................................................................................... 191<br />
8.8.2.2 Door only commands................................................................................... 191<br />
8.8.2.3 Toolbar......................................................................................................... 191<br />
8.8.2.4 Alarm Board Menu....................................................................................... 191<br />
8.8.2.5 Context Menu............................................................................................... 191<br />
8.8.2.6 Alarm Input Commands ............................................................................... 191<br />
8.9 Map Region ................................................................................................................... 192<br />
8.9.1 Multi-Page Maps .................................................................................................. 192<br />
8.9.2 Viewing Alarms .................................................................................................... 192<br />
8.9.3 Viewing the Map................................................................................................... 192<br />
8.9.4 Issuing Commands to Areas, Alarm Points and Outputs .................................... 192<br />
8.10 CCTV Region .............................................................................................................. 193<br />
8.10.1 Expanding Video Sources.................................................................................. 193<br />
8.10.2 Panning, Tilting and Enlarging........................................................................... 193<br />
8.10.3 CCTV Archive Tools .......................................................................................... 194<br />
8.11 If an Alarm Occurs....................................................................................................... 195<br />
8.11.1 When an alarm occurs....................................................................................... 195<br />
8.11.2 What to do if an alarm occurs.... ........................................................................ 195<br />
8.11.3 How to stop (clear) an alarm.............................................................................. 195<br />
8.11.4 What to do after an alarm... ............................................................................... 195<br />
9. Event Facilities .................................................................................................................. 196<br />
9.1 Event Log ...................................................................................................................... 196<br />
9.1.1.1 Highlighting Events ...................................................................................... 198<br />
9.2 Alarm Events and System Alarms................................................................................. 200<br />
9.3 Alarm Alerts................................................................................................................... 201<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xiii
9.4 Event Archive ................................................................................................................ 202<br />
9.5 Event Archive Restore................................................................................................... 204<br />
9.6 Event to Action .............................................................................................................. 205<br />
9.6.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 205<br />
9.6.2 Event to Action Details......................................................................................... 205<br />
9.6.3 Event to Action Configuration .............................................................................. 205<br />
9.6.4 Configure Send Email .......................................................................................... 207<br />
9.7 Muster and Evacuation.................................................................................................. 208<br />
9.7.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 208<br />
9.7.2 Specifying the Alarm Point for Muster ................................................................. 208<br />
9.7.3 Muster Details ...................................................................................................... 210<br />
9.7.4 Event to Action - 1................................................................................................ 210<br />
9.7.5 Muster Configuration............................................................................................ 211<br />
9.7.6 Event to Action Configuration - 2 ......................................................................... 213<br />
9.7.7 Muster Operation ................................................................................................. 213<br />
10. Other Facilities ................................................................................................................ 215<br />
10.1 Modems....................................................................................................................... 215<br />
10.2 Modem Initialization String .......................................................................................... 216<br />
10.3 Database Backup........................................................................................................ 216<br />
10.4 Import .......................................................................................................................... 217<br />
10.5 Upgrade License ......................................................................................................... 218<br />
10.6 Configure Peripherals ................................................................................................. 219<br />
10.7 Manage Controller Firmware....................................................................................... 220<br />
10.8 Change Password....................................................................................................... 221<br />
10.9 Search for a Keyholder ............................................................................................... 222<br />
10.10 Encode Keycode ....................................................................................................... 223<br />
10.11 Configure Organisations ........................................................................................... 226<br />
10.11.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 226<br />
10.11.2 Multiple Organisation Units Details.................................................................. 227<br />
10.11.2.1 License Upgrades.................................................................................... 227<br />
10.11.2.2 Log-in Screen........................................................................................... 227<br />
10.11.2.3 Tools Options........................................................................................... 227<br />
10.11.2.4 Edit, Add or Delete Org Units .................................................................. 227<br />
10.11.2.5 Guests...................................................................................................... 228<br />
10.11.2.6 Operators ................................................................................................. 228<br />
10.11.2.7 Reports .................................................................................................... 228<br />
10.11.2.8 Alarm Viewer............................................................................................ 228<br />
10.11.2.9 Database Back-Up, Archive and Restore................................................ 228<br />
10.11.3 Multiple Organisation Units Configuration ....................................................... 229<br />
10.11.3.1 <strong>User</strong> Interface .......................................................................................... 229<br />
10.11.3.2 Database Download ................................................................................ 229<br />
10.11.4 Multiple Organisation Units Configure Actions ................................................ 229<br />
10.11.4.1 Configuring Org Units .............................................................................. 229<br />
10.11.4.2 Login ........................................................................................................ 229<br />
10.11.4.3 Operator Property Page........................................................................... 229<br />
10.11.4.4 Event Log Viewer..................................................................................... 230<br />
10.11.4.5 Guests...................................................................................................... 230<br />
10.11.4.6 Hardware ................................................................................................. 230<br />
10.11.4.7 Alarm Viewer............................................................................................ 230<br />
10.11.4.8 Miscellaneous .......................................................................................... 230<br />
10.12 Audit Trail .................................................................................................................. 232<br />
11. Error Messages ............................................................................................................... 233<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xiv
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xv<br />
Glossary<br />
Access Controller<br />
An access controller determines when a door is unlocked depending on the key code received<br />
from a reader or Request to Exit switch. The type of controller determines how many doors it<br />
can control (e.g. the 512 can control 2 doors using up to 4 readers).<br />
Access Group<br />
An access group is a list of areas to which a keyholder is allowed access. The access may be<br />
restricted to certain times by use of a time profile.<br />
Airlock<br />
An airlock is an area controlled by two or more doors and if one door is open the other(s)<br />
cannot be opened even with a valid key. Closing all doors, allows a single door to be opened<br />
with a valid key.<br />
Alarm Category<br />
An alarm category is a group of alarms defined by a privileged user. Each alarm category has<br />
its own icon and alarm sound.<br />
Anti-Passback<br />
Anti-passback prevents a key being shared. Sharing occurs, for example, when one keyholder<br />
accesses an area and then either holds the door open or passes the key back so that others<br />
can gain entry. When anti-passback is applied to an area, a key that has been used to enter the<br />
area cannot be used to enter the area again until it has been used to exit the area. If passback<br />
is transgressed, it can be reset for the keyholder by an operator with the appropriate privilege;<br />
also a timed reset and/or tailgate reset can be specified for the area.<br />
Alarm Point<br />
An alarm point is an item that generates an alarm when in a specified state (e.g. a door that has<br />
been propped open can generate a 'door left open' alarm).<br />
Alarm<br />
An alarm is an event that requires attention (e.g. a door forced open alarm).<br />
Area<br />
An area has at least one door. The outside is counted as an area because it has a door for<br />
entering/leaving a building.<br />
Buddy Reader<br />
A buddy reader requires two keys to open the door (i.e. two keyholders are required before<br />
entry into an area is allowed).<br />
Bolted Door<br />
A bolted door on a 512 access controller prevents access to all keyholders except those with<br />
bolt door keyholder privilege.<br />
A bolted door on a 1100/2100/2200 series door controller prevents any time profile assigned to<br />
the door from unlocking the door.<br />
Channel<br />
A channel is connection between two items of hardware (see direct channel, door channel, PC<br />
channel, RS-485 channel, and TCP/IP channel).<br />
Controller<br />
See access controller, input controller and output controller.<br />
Diagnostic Code<br />
A 2-byte hexadecimal number that can be mapped to one or more diagnostic messages. 0<br />
indicates that no diagnostic conditions exist.
Door<br />
A door allows or prevents access in and out of an area. Doors may have a reader on each side<br />
to allow access to be controlled in both in and out directions. Other doors may have a reader on<br />
one side and a Request to Exit switch on the other so that a key is not required to leave the<br />
area.<br />
Direct Channel<br />
A direct channel is the connection between controllers and a PC via an RS-232 connection. The<br />
connection is usually via an administration kit.<br />
Dialup Channel<br />
A dialup channel is the connection between controllers and a PC via modems.<br />
Door Channel<br />
A door channel is the connection between a door and a controller. The 512 has two door<br />
channels because it can control two doors. Each door channel can have two readers (in and<br />
out) or one reader and a Request to Exit switch connected to it.<br />
Door Contact<br />
A door contact is a device, usually a magnetic switch, that may be installed on a door to monitor<br />
whether the door is open or closed.<br />
Event<br />
An event is a transaction (does not require attention) or alarm (requires attention) that occurs on<br />
the system. All events are logged by the system. The type of event determines how it is<br />
reported to the operator.<br />
Exit/Entry Out of Hours<br />
Exit/entry out of hours is a facility that prevents a person being trapped, e.g. a keyholder with<br />
limited time only (controlled by a time profile) enters an area with an in and out reader and stays<br />
too long. The keyholder can still exit but an event will be generated.<br />
Fail Full Secure<br />
Fail full secure is a communications failure mode that does not allow entry and exit into an area.<br />
Fail Safe<br />
Fail safe is a communications failure mode that only allows entry and exit into an area for<br />
certain keyholders. For 500 TCP/IP channels, priority keyholders and keyholders that have<br />
used their key are allowed to enter or exit the area. For other channels, priority keyholders and<br />
keyholders that have been downloaded to the controller are allowed to enter and exit the area.<br />
Fail Secure<br />
Fail secure is a communications failure mode that allows entry and exit into an area for priority<br />
keyholders only.<br />
Fail-Safe Lock<br />
A fail-safe lock (or 'power to lock') requires a permanent power supply to keep the door locked,<br />
i.e. in the event of power failure the door would become unlocked.<br />
Fail-Secure Lock<br />
A fail-secure lock (or 'power to unlock') requires power to unlock the door. These can be<br />
dangerous in the event of emergencies such as fires. Always consult Heath and Safety<br />
personnel before fitting a fail-secure lock.<br />
Full Arm Area<br />
A full arm area is an area where all alarm points in the area are armed and all keys (except<br />
those with a privileged access group) are denied access.<br />
Holiday Period<br />
A holiday period consists of a start and end date. A number of holiday periods are assigned to a<br />
holiday profile which can then be included in a time/mode profile to limit access during holiday<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xvi
periods.<br />
Holiday Profile<br />
A holiday profile can be included in a time/mode profile to limit access during holiday periods. A<br />
holiday profile consists of one or more holiday periods that can span multiple days.<br />
Input<br />
An input is a digital state that indicates the state of an electronic switch (e.g. a 2-state input<br />
would indicate closed or open).<br />
Input Controller<br />
An input controller provides end-of-line inputs that can be used to monitor certain conditions<br />
(e.g. a normally closed input could generate an alarm if it went open).<br />
Key<br />
A key is a token, fob or card that when presented to a reader will unlock the door. The door will<br />
only be unlocked if the key is valid (i.e. known to the system, allow access to the area and not<br />
be presented outside a permitted time profile).<br />
Keyholder<br />
A keyholder is a person who has a key. This could be a member of staff or a visitor. The key<br />
allocated to the keyholder will only be valid for specified areas and times (e.g. visitors can be<br />
prevented from entering an area at any time and all areas after a certain date).<br />
Mode Profile<br />
A mode profile can be applied to an area, door or reader to determine its mode (e.g. door locked or<br />
unlocked). A holiday profile can be assigned to a mode profile to limit access during holiday periods.<br />
Offline Controller<br />
An offline controller is not permanently connected to a PC but can be programmed and updated<br />
by a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) or laptop computer that is connected when required. This<br />
should not be confused with an Online Controller that has been put offline.<br />
Online Controller<br />
An online controller is permanently connected to a PC and is automatically updated when changes are<br />
made via the administration software.<br />
Omitted Alarm Point<br />
An omitted alarm point is an alarm point that is not armed when its associated area is armed<br />
and therefore allows the area to be armed even when the alarm point is in alarm (i.e. the area is<br />
said to be partially armed).<br />
Operator<br />
An operator is a keyholder who is allowed to make changes to the database determined by the<br />
operator privileges, e.g. a receptionist can add keyholders but not controllers.<br />
Output<br />
An output is a digital state that controls an output relay (e.g. an output would close or open an<br />
electronic switch depending on specified conditions being detected).<br />
Output Controller<br />
An output controller provides relay outputs that can be used to control certain conditions (e.g. a<br />
siren could be activated if an alarm condition is detected).<br />
Passive Infra Red<br />
A Passive Infra Red (PIR) detector is a motion detector that can be used to detect intruders or<br />
as a Request to Exit switch to automatically open a door when someone approaches it.<br />
PC Channel<br />
A PC channel is the connection between a controller and a PC.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xvii
PIN Reader<br />
A PIN reader is a special type of reader which requires a personal identification number to be<br />
entered in conjunction with a valid key.<br />
Priority Keyholders<br />
Priority keyholders are stored on the appropriate access controller and are therefore allowed to<br />
enter and exit an associated area even if there is a communications failure between the server<br />
and controllers (providing that the communications failure mode has not been set to Fail Full<br />
Secure).<br />
Reader<br />
A reader sends a key code to a controller when a key is presented to it. If the key is valid, an<br />
unlock door signal is sent to the door lock.<br />
Request to Exit Switch<br />
A Request to Exit switch is a switch (or button) that unlocks a door when pressed. A valid key is<br />
not required so anyone can leave the area.<br />
RS-485 Channel<br />
A RS-485 channel is the connection between a server and controllers (or between controllers<br />
on a direct channel).<br />
<strong>Security</strong> Level<br />
A security level (range 0 to 9) can be assigned to a key to determine which doors it can open or<br />
areas it can access. A door or area is also assigned a security level and the security level of the<br />
key must be equal or greater than the security level of the door or area to allow access.<br />
However, if the security level of the door or area is 0, no access is allowed at any time by any<br />
key.<br />
Tamper Event<br />
An alarm generated when a controller case is tampered with (e.g. broken in to).<br />
TCP/IP Channel<br />
A TCP/IP channel can be a 500 TCP/IP channel (i.e. the Ethernet connection between a PC<br />
and a server) or a Direct TCP/IP channel (i.e. the Ethernet connection between a PC and an<br />
access or door controller).<br />
Time Period<br />
A time period consists of a start time, end time, and one or more days. A number of time<br />
periods are assigned to a time profile which defines when a keyholder can access an area.<br />
Time Profile<br />
A time profile can be applied to a door, keyholder or access group to only allow access during<br />
certain times (e.g. only during office hours). A time profile consists of one or more time periods<br />
that can span multiple days. A holiday profile can be assigned to a time profile to limit access<br />
during holiday periods.<br />
Transaction<br />
A transaction is an event that does not require attention (e.g. a valid keyholder opening a door).<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 xviii
1. Introduction to Help File<br />
1.1 Displaying Help Information<br />
To display Administration Software help information:<br />
• Select Help > Contents.<br />
To display context-sensitive help information:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 1<br />
Introduction to Help File<br />
• Select an area on the Administration Software window and press F1 on the keyboard.<br />
To display the 500 series help information:<br />
• Select Start > Programs > Administration Software Tools > 500 Series Manual<br />
1.2 Tab Area Facilities<br />
To navigate the help information:<br />
• Select the Contents tab and an item in the contents list.<br />
or<br />
• Select the Index tab, enter a keyword, and select an item in the index list.<br />
or<br />
• Select the Search tab, enter a keyword, and select an item in the search list.<br />
or<br />
• Select the Favorites tab and double click an item in the favourites list.<br />
or<br />
• Select an in-text link (indicated by blue text).<br />
To add items to the favourites list:<br />
• Navigate to the required help information, select the Favorites tab, and select Add.<br />
To remove items from the favourites list:<br />
• Select the Favorites tab, select the item in the favourites list, and select Remove.<br />
To display glossary definitions:<br />
• Select the Glossary tab and select an item in the glossary list.<br />
or<br />
• Select an in-text glossary item (indicated by red text); to close the definition, select the<br />
glossary item again.<br />
1.3 Toolbar Facilities<br />
To hide/show the tab area:<br />
• Select the Hide icon and the tab area is closed and the icon changes to Show; to redisplay<br />
the tab area select the Show icon.<br />
To move backwards and forwards in displayed order:<br />
• Select the Back or Forward icon
To display the home page:<br />
• Select the Home icon.<br />
To print a topic:<br />
• Select the Print icon and if no subtopics are displayed in the Contents tab, the Print<br />
window (that allows a printer to be selected) is displayed.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 2<br />
Introduction to Help File<br />
• Select the Print icon and If subtopics are displayed in the Contents tab, the Print Topics<br />
window (that gives the option to display all the subtopics) is displayed before the Print<br />
window.<br />
1.4 Browse Facilities<br />
To move backwards and forwards in table-of-contents order:<br />
• Select the Previous or Next icon.<br />
To display the home page of a main section:<br />
• Select the section name in the drop-down menu.<br />
To display a certain item:<br />
• Locate the item in the Browse area using the left and right arrows and select the item.<br />
See Tab Area Facilities and Toolbar Facilities.
2. Specifications<br />
2.1 Administration Software Specifications<br />
2.1.1 System Limits<br />
� indicates included<br />
υ indicates optional via license<br />
System Limits<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 3<br />
Features <strong>SecureNet</strong> <strong>SecureNet</strong><br />
SE<br />
Specifications<br />
<strong>SecureNet</strong><br />
Pro<br />
Doors 20 100 1000<br />
Keyholders 1000 10,000 75,000<br />
Operators 10 10 50<br />
Time/Mode Profiles (4000 periods across all profiles) 20 100 200<br />
Holiday Profiles (20 periods each) 2 10 10<br />
Access Groups (132 areas each) 20 2000 5000<br />
Areas 1000 1000 1000<br />
Organisational Unit 1 1 1<br />
500 TCP/IP Channels υ 100 100<br />
512 TCP/IP Channels unlimited unlimited unlimited<br />
Direct Channels 2 2 10<br />
Dialup Channels 2 2 10<br />
Offline Channels unlimited unlimited unlimited<br />
Controllers on a RS-485 channel on 500 channel 24<br />
(500 licence<br />
required)<br />
24 24<br />
Controllers on direct channel 32 32 32<br />
If using GSM modems 12 12 12<br />
Event Storage depends on<br />
disc space<br />
depends on<br />
disc space<br />
depends on<br />
disc space<br />
Alarm Workstations 1 1 2<br />
Client PCs υ 2 5<br />
System Limits Upgrades Maximum Limits<br />
5000 Keyholders 75,000 75,000 75,000<br />
50 Doors 1000 1000 1000<br />
10 Doors 1000 1000 1000<br />
500 Access Groups 5000 5000 5000<br />
2 x 500 Channels 100 N/A N/A<br />
50 Dialup Channels 250 250 250<br />
10 Dialup Channels 250 250 250<br />
2 Dialup Channels 250 250 250
10 x 1100/2100/2200 Controllers 250 250 250<br />
10 Operators 100 100 100<br />
1 Organisational Unit 25 25 25<br />
1 Alarm Workstation 8 8 8<br />
Client PCs 15 15 15<br />
2.1.2 Administration Features<br />
� indicates included<br />
υ indicates optional via licence (<strong>SecureNet</strong> also requires a 500 TCP/IP channel licence, except<br />
1100/2100/2200)<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 4<br />
Features <strong>SecureNet</strong> <strong>SecureNet</strong><br />
SE<br />
Specifications<br />
<strong>SecureNet</strong><br />
Pro<br />
Keyholder Pictures � � �<br />
Start and End Dates for Keyholders � � �<br />
Block Change of Keyholders � � �<br />
Photo Identification � � �<br />
Card Designer � � �<br />
Area Administration � � �<br />
Remote Lock Activation � � �<br />
Door Mode Profiles � � �<br />
Reader Mode Profiles � � �<br />
Online Event Log � � �<br />
Online Context Sensitive Help � � �<br />
Backup and Restore � � �<br />
Firmware Updates from PC � � �<br />
Export to PDF, ODBC, Excel, etc � � �<br />
Automatic Daylight Saving Changeover � � �<br />
Alarm Management υ � �<br />
Event Archiving and Restore υ � �<br />
Audit Trail υ � �<br />
CCTV υ � �<br />
DVR υ υ �<br />
Area Management (with mode profiles) υ υ �<br />
Event to Action υ υ �<br />
Muster and Evacuation υ υ �<br />
Lift Control υ υ �<br />
Remote Event to Action υ υ υ<br />
Card Formats υ υ υ<br />
1100/2100/2200 Support υ υ υ
2.2 Hardware Specifications<br />
2.2.1 500 Specifications<br />
System Limits<br />
Maximum number of controllers on each RS-485 channel: 24<br />
Maximum distance between the server and controller on<br />
a network:<br />
1500ft/500m alarm cable or<br />
3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable<br />
Number of RS-485 channels: 2<br />
Number of RS-232 channels: 1<br />
Maximum number of doors served:<br />
128<br />
Maximum number of keyholders served: 75,000<br />
Maximum number of events in memory buffer: 10,000<br />
Maximum number of access groups served: 5000<br />
Maximum number of time profiles served: 200<br />
Maximum number of system holidays served:<br />
Power<br />
20<br />
Power supply: 10.5 to 14V dc (use an isolated PSU with backup battery)<br />
Lithium battery: Non-replaceable:<br />
(for real-time<br />
clock)<br />
Environment<br />
Life expectancy 20 years @ 25°C/75°Fwhen unit not powered<br />
Temperature: -10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F<br />
Humidity: 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)<br />
Facilities<br />
One-Touch installation testing.<br />
High speed network communications.<br />
Built in TCP/IP & Ethernet support.<br />
Plug-n-play network management.<br />
Global anti-passback across all controllers connected to the 500 access and alarm server<br />
Alarm integration.<br />
Encrypted Communications.<br />
PSTN connectivity via external modem.<br />
Alarm dial-back.<br />
Downloadable firmware into FLASH Memory.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 5<br />
Specifications
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 6<br />
Specifications<br />
2.2.2 512 Specifications<br />
System Limits<br />
Maximum number of doors per controller: 2<br />
Maximum number of /Key readers per controller: 4<br />
Maximum number of Wiegand or Magstripe readers per<br />
controller:<br />
2<br />
Maximum distance between the first controller and last<br />
controller on a network:<br />
1500ft/500m alarm cable or<br />
3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable<br />
Maximum distance between controllers:<br />
1500ft/500m alarm cable or<br />
3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable<br />
Maximum distance between controller and reader: see below<br />
Maximum number of keys: 10,000 see Note 1<br />
Maximum number of events in memory buffer: 4000<br />
Maximum number of access groups:<br />
Notes<br />
5000<br />
1. The maximum number of keys is reduced if any keyholders have more than one access<br />
group/personal access assigned.<br />
2. Other system limits (e.g. number of controllers per system) depend on the<br />
administration software being used.<br />
Controller to Reader Distances<br />
The following table gives the recommended maximum distance between a reader and controller<br />
assuming 24AWG/0.22mm 2 unshielded cable is used and allows for 11V battery power.<br />
Note<br />
The figures below are for readers powered from the controller. The cable distances can<br />
be doubled by locally powering the readers or using a 24V power supply.<br />
Type of Reader<br />
Maximum Recommended<br />
Distance from Controller<br />
Feet Metres<br />
Low Profile, Panel Mount and Vandal Resistant 230 70<br />
Standard Plus, Slimline and Standard Plus Vandal Resistant 825 250<br />
Key Medium Range, Slimline and Vandal Resistant 825 250<br />
DualTech Reader 230 70<br />
PIN Reader 66 20<br />
Wiegand and Magstripe Readers Depends on the type of<br />
reader, see manufacturer's<br />
documentation<br />
Power<br />
Power supply: 10.5 to 14V dc (it is recommended to use an isolated PSU with backup<br />
battery)<br />
Lithium battery: Type CR2450:<br />
Environment<br />
Life expectancy 3 years @ 25°C/75°F when unit not powered<br />
Life expectancy 10 years @ 25°C/75°F when unit powered<br />
Temperature: -10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F<br />
Humidity: 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Facilities<br />
One-Touch installation testing.<br />
High speed network communications.<br />
Plug-n-play network management.<br />
Downloadable firmware into FLASH Memory.<br />
2.2.3 520/530 I/O Controllers<br />
System Limits<br />
520 530<br />
Maximum number of inputs: 20 2<br />
Maximum number of low power outputs: 2 10<br />
Maximum number of high power outputs: 0 2<br />
Number of RS-485 channels:<br />
Power<br />
1 1<br />
Power supply:<br />
Environment<br />
10.5 to 14V dc (it is recommended to use an isolated PSU with backup<br />
battery)<br />
Temperature: -10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F<br />
Humidity: 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)<br />
Facilities<br />
One-Touch installation testing.<br />
High speed network communications.<br />
Downloadable firmware into FLASH Memory.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 7<br />
Specifications
3. Hardware Installation<br />
3.1 500 Series<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 8<br />
Hardware Installation<br />
500 series controllers can be administered by the Administration Software via a 500 TCP/IP<br />
channel.<br />
512 access controllers can also be connected on a direct channel or dialup channel. To connect<br />
to a network, see the Controller IP Configuration section.<br />
512 IP access controllers can be administered by the Administration Software but must be<br />
connected on a Direct TCP/IP channel.<br />
The hardware installation is described in the help files supplied with the software and in the<br />
quick start guides supplied with the controllers.<br />
3.2 1100/2100/2200 Series<br />
If the license allows, 1100/2100/2200 series door controllers can be administered by the<br />
administration software but must be connected on a direct channel or dialup channel. To<br />
connect to a network, see the Controller IP Configuration section.<br />
2200IP door controllers can be administered by the Administration Software but must be<br />
connected on a Direct TCP/IP channel.<br />
The hardware installation is described in the documentation supplied with the controllers.
4. Administration Software<br />
4.1.1 Introduction to the Administration Software<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 9<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Administration Software is a PC-based administrative software package for access control<br />
systems.<br />
To obtain information on the following tasks:<br />
• Select the appropriate icon. The tasks are listed in the recommended order for creating an<br />
access control system but editing can be performed in any order, see the Simple Example<br />
section.<br />
Logon (from Windows desktop)<br />
Customise company name, module names, categories, keyholder information, and<br />
access options.<br />
Customise the list view and alter its appearance.<br />
Add/update/delete areas (only in Access by Areas mode, see Access Type section).<br />
Start/stop the Administration Software engines (engines should be running).<br />
Add/update/delete a channels<br />
Add/update/delete a controllers.<br />
Probe/configure/unconfigure controllers.<br />
Add/update/delete a holiday profiles.<br />
Add/update/delete a time profiles.<br />
Add/update/delete a doors.<br />
Add/update/delete an access group (only in Access by Access Group mode, see<br />
Access Type section).<br />
Add/update/delete a keyholders.<br />
Add/update/delete an operators.<br />
Configure video sources (a license is required for this facility).<br />
Download database to the controllers.<br />
Logoff.<br />
4.1.2 Installation<br />
The Administration Software is provided on CD. When the CD is placed in the CD drive of the<br />
PC the following options are available.<br />
The Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine (MSDE) must be installed on your PC before<br />
Administration Software. If it is not, the opportunity to install it is displayed before the<br />
Administration Software options are displayed.<br />
1. Start the Administration Software installation program. If selected, the following<br />
programs actions will be performed:<br />
• DotNet Framework V1.1 installed<br />
• Crystal Reports 11 installed<br />
• Microsoft Message Queuing configured<br />
• Microsoft Web Service Extensions installed<br />
• SQL Express 2005 Database installed
• Administration Software checking for existing database<br />
2. Install the Administration Software Client only.<br />
3. View the release notes.<br />
4. Display help files.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 10<br />
Administration Software<br />
Make a note of any existing license keys. If the Administration Software is upgraded and<br />
re-installed, the license keys must be re-entered.<br />
Notes<br />
1. Installation can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator and should be<br />
performed by the local administrator.<br />
2. The options can also be displayed by running Setup.exe provided on the CD.<br />
3. Before installing, ensure that File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks is enabled.<br />
4. The software is installed with access controlled by areas and access groups.<br />
5. The software is installed in demonstration mode which allows the database to be<br />
specified but the controllers cannot be configured until a valid license key has been<br />
specified.<br />
6. If upgrading administration software, new license keys will be required.<br />
To ensure File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks is enabled:<br />
1. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel and the Control Panel window is displayed.<br />
2. Select Network Connections and the Network Connections window is displayed.<br />
3. Right click on the connection and select Properties.<br />
4. Ensure that the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks checkbox is selected.<br />
5. Select OK.<br />
6. It may be necessary to start the 'Server' service.<br />
To start the 'Server' service:<br />
1. Select Start > Run and the Run window is displayed.<br />
2. Enter cmd and select OK.<br />
3. Enter net start and a list of services that have started is displayed.<br />
4. If 'Server' has not started, enter net start server.<br />
4.1.3 Updates<br />
The existing software can be updated by upgrading the license agreement (see the Upgrade<br />
License section) or updating the software (see the Installation section).<br />
There is an option when updating the software to retain the existing database. Alternatively, a<br />
database that has been saved using the Database Backup facility can be restored (see the<br />
Restore Database section) or a for Windows or Vision database can be imported (see the<br />
Import section).
4.2 Access Control Overview<br />
4.2.1 System Design<br />
4.2.1.1 Access Types<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 11<br />
Administration Software<br />
The administration software may provide the following access types options:<br />
Areas and access groups Each keyholder is assigned to access groups that allow access to certain<br />
areas. For example, used in systems where there is more than one door<br />
into most areas and a large number of areas that require grouping<br />
according to who has access.<br />
Areas and security levels Each keyholder and area are assigned a security level which determines<br />
which areas each keyholder can access. For example, used in systems<br />
where there is more than one door into most areas and a small number<br />
of areas.<br />
Doors and access groups Keyholders are assigned to access groups that allow access to certain<br />
doors. For example, used in systems where there is only one door into<br />
each area and a large number of areas that require grouping according<br />
to who has access.<br />
Doors and security levels Each keyholder and door are assigned a security level which determines<br />
which doors each keyholder can open. For example, used in systems<br />
where there is only one door into each area and a small number of<br />
areas.<br />
The access type required is specified at installation but can be changed using customisation.<br />
It is recommended to take a backup of the system before changing access type because<br />
information could be lost (e.g. access groups and areas).<br />
4.2.1.2 System Design<br />
When designing an access control system, it is necessary to plan the requirements of the<br />
system. This includes deciding how many areas, doors, keyholders, etc. are needed with<br />
consideration given to possible modification and expansion.<br />
To help you plan your access control system, an example and glossary is given below and<br />
advice given in the following sections. You should aim to have a similar map of your site before<br />
you specify, install or commission your system. A simple example to get you started is given in<br />
the Simple Example section.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 12<br />
Administration Software<br />
Access Controller<br />
An access controller determines when a door is unlocked depending on the key code received<br />
from a reader or Request to Exit switch. The type of door controller determines how many<br />
doors it can control (e.g. the 512 can control 2 doors using up to 4 readers). The example<br />
requires seven 512 controllers.<br />
Area<br />
An area has at least one door. The example has 9 areas (the outside is counted as an area).<br />
Door<br />
A door allows or prevents access in and out of an area. The example has 13 doors. Several<br />
doors have a reader on each side to allow access to be controlled in both in and out directions.<br />
Other doors have a Request to Exit switch that allows anyone to leave the area.<br />
Door Channel<br />
A door channel is the connection between a door and a controller. The 512 has two door<br />
channels because it can control two doors. Each door channel can have two readers (in and<br />
out) or one reader and a Request to Exit switch connected to it. The door channels are<br />
specified as described in the Door Configuration section.<br />
Key<br />
A key is a token, fob or card that when presented to a reader will unlock the door. The key must<br />
be valid (i.e. known to the system, allow access to the area and not presented outside a<br />
permitted time profile).<br />
Keyholder<br />
A keyholder is a person who has a key. This could be a member of staff or a visitor. The key<br />
allocated to the keyholder will only be valid for specified areas and times (e.g. visitors can be<br />
prevented from entering the Development area at any time and all areas after a certain date).<br />
Reader<br />
A reader sends a key code to a controller when a key is presented to it. If the key is valid, an<br />
unlock door signal is sent to the door lock.<br />
Request to Exit Switch<br />
A Request to Exit switch is a switch (or button) that unlocks a door when pressed. A valid key<br />
is not required so anyone can leave an area.<br />
Time Profile<br />
A time profile can be applied to a door, keyholder or access group to only allow access during<br />
certain times (e.g. only during office hours).<br />
4.2.1.3 System Plan<br />
The example given in the System Design section requires the following information to plan the<br />
access control system. The example uses seven 512 access controllers (see Hardware<br />
Configuration using 500 Channel section and Hardware Configuration using Offline<br />
Channel section). Each access controller can control two doors.<br />
Doors<br />
Door Controller Door Channel Reader/RTE<br />
Outside/Reception 1 1 In reader<br />
Out reader<br />
Reception/Accounts 1 2 In reader<br />
Request to Exit<br />
Reception/Technical Support 2 1 In reader<br />
Request to Exit<br />
Reception/Development 2 2 In reader<br />
Request to Exit<br />
Reception/Corridor 3 1 In reader<br />
Request to Exit
Reception/Sales 3 2 In reader<br />
Request to Exit<br />
Accounts/Technical Support 4 1 In reader<br />
Out reader<br />
Technical<br />
Support/Development<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 13<br />
4 2 In reader<br />
Out reader<br />
Development/Stores 5 1 In reader<br />
Out reader<br />
Stores/Corridor 5 2 In reader<br />
Request to Exit<br />
Canteen/Corridor 6 1 In reader<br />
Request to Exit<br />
Corridor/Outside 6 2 In reader<br />
Out reader<br />
Corridor/Sales 7 1 In reader<br />
Request to Exit<br />
Spare 7 2 Not used<br />
Administration Software<br />
The example uses the following access information:<br />
Holiday Profiles<br />
Shutdown Periods<br />
Time Profiles<br />
No Access, Access at all times, Long Day, Office hours, Evening, and Night Shift.<br />
Access Groups<br />
Accountants, Canteen Staff, Cleaners, Development Team, Sales Team, <strong>Security</strong>, Stores, and<br />
Technical Support.<br />
4.2.1.4 Hardware Configuration using 500 Channel<br />
The example shows how the controllers described in the System Plan section can be<br />
connected:
4.2.1.5 Hardware Configuration using Offline Channel<br />
The example shows how the controllers described in the System Plan section can be<br />
connected if using an offline channel.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 14<br />
Administration Software
4.2.2 Simple Example<br />
4.2.2.1 Introduction<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 15<br />
Administration Software<br />
This example demonstrates how a simple access control system can be configured and<br />
administrated using Administration Software. It is recommended that the context-sensitive help<br />
(accessed by pressing F1) is used throughout the example to discover more information (e.g.<br />
how to customise the views and the use of right click).<br />
Note<br />
Although this is a simple example, access is defined by areas and access groups (see<br />
the Access Types section) to demonstrate how a more complex system would be<br />
defined. It can be used as a starting point and then modified for an actual system.<br />
Perform the following tasks in the following order:<br />
Define the areas<br />
Add the 500 TCP/IP channel<br />
Add/probe the controller<br />
Define the holiday profiles<br />
Define the time profiles<br />
Update the doors<br />
Define access groups<br />
Add Keyholders<br />
Add Operators<br />
The system can then be edited in any order to configure your own system.<br />
4.2.2.2 Define the Areas<br />
This example has 3 areas (outside, reception and sales). Outside is automatically created.<br />
1. Select Area in Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select New in Property Page.<br />
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Reception).<br />
4. Enter the Description (i.e. Access to/from Outside and Sales).<br />
Note<br />
Door access to areas is automatically entered when the doors have been defined.<br />
5. Select Add on the Property Page.<br />
Repeat for the sales area.<br />
Now define the 500 TCP/IP channel.
4.2.3 Add the 500 TCP/IP channel<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 16<br />
Administration Software<br />
For this example, only one 500 server is required.<br />
For this example, only one 500 server is required. The 500 is connected to the TCP/IP channel.<br />
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select New and Create New 500 on the Property Page.<br />
3. Enter the Name (e.g. 500 TCP/IP channel).<br />
4. Select Protocol Type (e.g. TCP/IP via permanent connection).<br />
5. Select the computer name (e.g. PCNAME).<br />
6. Enter the 500 URL (e.g. http://192.168.31.14) or select the 500 Probe button.<br />
7. Select the Areas tab and select all the areas.<br />
8. Select Add on the Property Page.<br />
9. Wait for the communications to be established.<br />
Now add and probe the controller.<br />
4.2.3.1 Add and Probe the Controller<br />
For this example, only one 512 is required. The reception door has an in and out reader and the<br />
sales door has an in reader and a Request to Exit switch.<br />
To add the 512 controller:<br />
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select New and Create New Controller on the Property Page.<br />
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Controller 1).<br />
4. Enter the Description (i.e. Reception and Sales).<br />
5. Select Type (i.e. 512).<br />
6. Select 500 (i.e. 500 TCP/IP channel).<br />
7. Select Add on the Property Page.<br />
To probe the 512 controller:<br />
1. Select Hardware > Probe Channels or the icon. The physical connections are probed<br />
and 512 controllers are connected, the serial number of 512 is displayed.<br />
2. Drag the controller from the list on the right on to the serial number on the left.<br />
3. Select the option to download to the controller and OK.<br />
Now define the holiday profiles.<br />
4.2.3.2 Define the Holiday Profiles<br />
1. Select Holiday in the Explore bar.<br />
2. Select New on the Property Page.<br />
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Shutdown Periods).<br />
4. Enter the Description (i.e. Bank Holidays and Works Shutdown).<br />
5. Add a holiday:<br />
• Select Add Holiday on the Property Page.<br />
• Enter the name of the holiday (e.g. Christmas).<br />
• Select the start date and time from the drop-down calendar.<br />
• Select the end date and time from the drop-down calendar.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 17<br />
Administration Software<br />
6. Repeat Step 5 for each shutdown period.<br />
7. Select Add on the Property Page.<br />
Repeat if another holiday profile is required.<br />
Now define the time profiles.<br />
4.2.3.3 Define the Time/Mode Profiles<br />
Note<br />
If 1100/2100/2200 controllers are being used, the time profiles must be defined after the<br />
controllers and the time profile property page is different from the time profile property page<br />
displayed for 512 only systems. 1100/2100/2200 controllers use daily time profiles and 512<br />
controllers use weekly time profiles but if any 1100/2100/2200 controllers are used, both<br />
types of controller use daily time profiles.<br />
To add time/mode profiles:<br />
1. Select Time & Mode Profile in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select New and Create New Time Profile, Create New Door Profile or Create New<br />
Reader Profile on the Property Page.<br />
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Office Hours).<br />
4. Enter the Description (i.e. 09:00 to 17:00 Weekdays).<br />
5. If specifying a mode profile, select the Mode.<br />
6. Specify the active period for each day:<br />
• Click on a day to create a new time period and drag the created time bar.<br />
• The period start and end can be fine tuned by using the From and To increment boxes<br />
(e.g. Monday 09:00 to Monday 17:00).<br />
• The time period can be copied to another day by pressing and holding the Ctrl key,<br />
selecting a time period and dragging it to another day while continuing to hold the Ctrl<br />
key.<br />
• The time period can also be copied by right clicking on a time period, selecting Copy,<br />
right clicking on another day and selecting Paste.<br />
• Repeat for each day.<br />
7. Specify the active periods for a holiday:<br />
• Select the Holiday tab.<br />
• Select the holiday profile (e.g. Bank Holidays)<br />
• Click on the holiday bar to create a new time period and drag the created time bar.<br />
• Fine-tune the time using the From and To increment boxes (e.g. 09:00 to 17:00).<br />
To add daily time profiles:<br />
1. Select Time Profile in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select New on the Property Page.<br />
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Office Hours).<br />
4. Enter the Description (i.e. 09:00 to 17:00 Weekdays).<br />
5. Specify the active times for each day:<br />
• Select the Period 1 check box.<br />
• Specify the Start Time.<br />
• Specify the End Time.<br />
• Select the day check boxes for each day the time period applies to.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 18<br />
Administration Software<br />
• Repeat for other time periods (e.g. weekends may be different to week days).<br />
6. Specify whether the time period applies during a holiday period (if the No Holiday Period<br />
radio button is selected, the time profile applies during holidays).<br />
7. Select Add on the Property Page.<br />
Repeat if other time profiles are required.<br />
Now update the doors.<br />
4.2.3.4 Update the Doors<br />
This example has 2 doors: the reception door has an in and out reader and the sales door has<br />
an in reader and a Request to Exit switch.<br />
Reception door:<br />
1. Select Doors in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select the reception door (e.g. Controller 1 Door 1).<br />
3. Edit the Name (i.e. Reception door).<br />
4. Enter the Description (i.e. Outside/Reception).<br />
5. Select the Configuration tab and ensure the settings are correct.<br />
6. Select the Access tab.<br />
7. Select Reader Type.<br />
8. Define SIG A for reception door:<br />
• Select the area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Outside).<br />
• Select Reader connected radio button.<br />
9. Define SIG B for reception door:<br />
• Select the area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Reception).<br />
• Select Reader connected radio button.<br />
10. Select area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Reception).<br />
11. Select Update on the Property Page.<br />
Sales door:<br />
1. Select the sales door (e.g. Controller 1 Door 2).<br />
1. Edit the Name (i.e. Sales door).<br />
2. Enter the Description (i.e. Sales/Reception).<br />
3. Select the Configuration tab and ensure the settings are correct (e.g. reader).<br />
4. Select the Access tab.<br />
5. Define SIG A for reception door:<br />
• Select the area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Sales).<br />
• Select Reader connected radio button.<br />
6. Define SIG B for reception door:<br />
• Select the No reader connected radio button (Request to Exit switch is used to exit<br />
Sales).<br />
7. Select Update on the Property Page.<br />
Now define the access groups.
4.2.3.5 Define Access Groups<br />
1. Select Access Group in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select New on the Property Page.<br />
3. Enter the Name (i.e. Sales Team).<br />
4. Enter the Description (i.e. Sales Personnel).<br />
5. Select the Access Groups tab.<br />
6. Select Profile 1 check box.<br />
7. Select a time profile from the drop-down menu (i.e. Office Hours).<br />
8. Select the check boxes next to each area that can be accessed by this group.<br />
9. Select Add on the Property Page.<br />
Repeat if other access groups are required.<br />
Now add keyholders.<br />
4.2.3.6 Add Keyholders<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 19<br />
Administration Software<br />
1. Select Keyholder in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select New on the Property Page.<br />
3. Enter the details and photo.<br />
4. Select Details tab and fill in the details. In most cases, the End Date check box should not<br />
be selected, because the end date is not known.<br />
5. Select the Notes tab and enter appropriate text (e.g. any disability that might require longer<br />
door open time).<br />
6. Select the Keys tab and present a key to the administration reader.<br />
7. If required, select the Set PIN button and specify a PIN to be used with OneProx PIN<br />
Readers.<br />
8. Select the Extra Information tab and enter the details (only available if extra fields have<br />
been specified, see Customisation section).<br />
9. Select the Personal Access tab and define areas the keyholder can access:<br />
• Select the Profile 1 check box.<br />
• Select the time profile from the drop-down list. Selecting 'No Time Profile' will allow<br />
access to the selected areas at all times.<br />
• Specify the areas the time profile applies to by selecting/deselecting the area check<br />
boxes.<br />
• If required, repeat for Profile 2.<br />
10. Select the Access Groups tab and select the access group(s) that keyholder belongs to.<br />
11. Select Add on the Property Page.<br />
12. Select the Events tab, present the key to the readers and check that the events are<br />
reported and access is allowed/disallowed depending on keys access rights.<br />
Repeat for other keyholders.<br />
Now add operators.<br />
4.2.3.7 Add Operators<br />
1. Select Operator in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select New on the Property Page.<br />
3. Enter the Login Name (e.g. Supervisor).
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 20<br />
Administration Software<br />
4. Select Set Password and specify a password for the operator.<br />
5. Select the keyholder who is to have operator privileges. A new keyholder can be specified<br />
by selecting Create New.<br />
6. Specify other fields as required.<br />
7. Select the Privileges tab and select the operator template that determines which facilities<br />
the keyholder can access (see Operator Privileges section).<br />
8. Select Add on the Property Page.<br />
Repeat for any other operators.<br />
Now download database to the controller.<br />
4.2.3.8 Download Database to the Controller<br />
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select a controller.<br />
3. Select the Tasks button.<br />
4. Select Download controller database.<br />
5. Select OK to confirm.<br />
The simple example is now configured and can be used as a basis for an actual system.
4.3 Administration Software Tools<br />
4.3.1 Configure Device IP Addresses<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 21<br />
Administration Software<br />
A static IP address (allocated by the Network Administrator) must be used for the 500, 512IP<br />
and 2200IP.<br />
To configure a static IP address:<br />
1. Select Start > Programs> <strong>PAC</strong><br />
<strong>SecureNet</strong> Tools > Configure Device IP<br />
Addresses (via the Windows Start<br />
Menu) and the IP Device Address<br />
Configuration Utility window is<br />
displayed.<br />
2. Select a 500, 512IP, or 2200IP tab.<br />
3. Select a device.<br />
4. Select Entry > Modify and the set IP<br />
Parameters window is displayed.<br />
Note<br />
If the 500 selected is locked, it must<br />
be unlocked by powering it up with the<br />
One-Touch button pressed.<br />
5. Obtain the IP address automatically or<br />
enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask and<br />
Default Gateway.<br />
6. Select OK.<br />
MAC Address 1 The MAC address of the device (the unique identifier for the TCP/IP<br />
port).<br />
1 512IP and 2200IP only<br />
Serial Number 2 The serial number of the device.<br />
2 500 and 512IP only<br />
Auto IP An indication of whether the IP address has been automatically<br />
allocated (True) or not (False).<br />
Locked 3 An indication of whether the IP address has been locked and cannot<br />
be reset (True) or not (False).<br />
3 500 only<br />
IP Address The IP address of the device.<br />
Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the network.<br />
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway.<br />
Device Type 4 The device type.<br />
To refresh the window:<br />
• Select File > Refresh<br />
To exit the window:<br />
• Select File > Exit or .<br />
4 2200IP only
4.3.2 Help<br />
To display the administration software help file:<br />
• Select Start > Programs > <strong>PAC</strong> <strong>SecureNet</strong> Tools > Help<br />
For context-sensitive help:<br />
• Select an area on an administration software window and press F1 on the keyboard.<br />
4.3.3 Release Notes<br />
To display the release notes for the administration software:<br />
• Select Start > Programs > <strong>PAC</strong> <strong>SecureNet</strong> Tools > Release Notes<br />
4.3.4 Restore Database<br />
Note<br />
Restore can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator.<br />
To restore a database:<br />
1. Ensure that all users are logged off.<br />
2. Select Start > Programs > <strong>PAC</strong><br />
<strong>SecureNet</strong> Tools > Restore Database<br />
and the Restore window is displayed.<br />
3. Select a file using the browse facility.<br />
4. Select the Restore button.<br />
4.3.5 Service Manager<br />
Note<br />
Starting and stopping an engine can only be performed by an Operating System<br />
Administrator.<br />
To start/stop an Engine:<br />
1. Select Start > Programs> <strong>PAC</strong><br />
<strong>SecureNet</strong> Tools > Service Manager or<br />
double click the icon in the Windows<br />
taskbar or Select which engines are to be<br />
started/stopped.<br />
2. Select which engines are to be<br />
started/stopped.<br />
3. Select the Start or Stop button.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 22<br />
Administration Software<br />
Client Engine<br />
A client engine can be installed on a client PC to allow administration and monitoring from the<br />
client PC. The client engine can be installed when installing the Administration Software on the<br />
client PC or by selecting Tools > Configure Client Engine on the client PC.<br />
The client engine can be unconfigured if no channels are defined by selecting Tools ><br />
Unconfigure Client Engine on the client PC.
4.3.6 Upgrade Database<br />
Note<br />
Restore can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator.<br />
To upgrade a database:<br />
1. Ensure that all users are logged off.<br />
2. Select Start > Programs > <strong>PAC</strong><br />
<strong>SecureNet</strong> Tools > Upgrade Database<br />
and the Upgrade window is displayed.<br />
3. Select a file using the browse facility.<br />
4. Select the Upgrade button.<br />
4.3.7 Application Software<br />
To logon to the administration software:<br />
• Select Start > Programs > <strong>PAC</strong> <strong>SecureNet</strong>.<br />
or<br />
• Select the icon.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 23<br />
Administration Software
4.4 Administration Software Overview<br />
4.4.1 Login<br />
To login to the Access Control Administration Software:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 24<br />
Administration Software<br />
1. Double click the Administration Software icon on the Windows desktop and the Log<br />
on/Exit window is displayed.<br />
2. Select or enter an operator name and password. The operator privileges determine the<br />
facilities that can be accessed (see Operator Privileges section).<br />
3. If the system has multiple organisational units, select the Organisation.<br />
4. If a key can be used (or is required) to log on, select the Key login checkbox and present a<br />
valid key to the administration reader.<br />
5. The Options button can be used by users with Operating System Administrator privileges<br />
to specify the server the client PC is connected to. The server should be inside the<br />
organisation firewall.<br />
When using 10BaseT cabling, a hub must be used to network PCs together. Do not<br />
simply plug a CAT5 crossover cable between two PC network cards as this will prove<br />
unreliable.<br />
5. Select Log on and the Administration Software window is displayed.<br />
Note<br />
When logging on for the first time after installation, the Login Name must be Installer.<br />
Then select Log on and a password can be specified.<br />
The following will be hidden in the help file and only accessed by Help on the error<br />
message.<br />
Only one instance of the Administration Software can be running at any one time so if an<br />
activation of the Administration Software is attempted while another is already running an error<br />
message is displayed.<br />
The Windows Task Manager can be used to end the task or the current task can be logged<br />
out before attempting a re-activation.<br />
To use the Windows Task Manager:<br />
1. Press Crtl+Shift+Esc.<br />
2. Select the Administration Software program and End Task (to close the program) or<br />
Switch to (to locate the program).<br />
If a system alarm (or selected alarms not assigned to an area) are detected at login, a System<br />
Alarms window is displayed.
4.4.2 Administration Software Window<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 25<br />
Administration Software<br />
After login, the Administration Software Window has a Welcome Screen, Menus, Toolbar,<br />
Explorer Bar, and Status Bar.<br />
The Welcome screen is replaced by the List View and Property Page when a module is<br />
selected in the Explorer bar. The Welcome screen can be redisplayed by selecting the<br />
organisational unit and System Summary tab. The organisational unit name can be edited<br />
using the Customisation facilities and appears above the Explorer bar.<br />
The window can be maximised, minimised and resized and the List View, Explore Bar and<br />
Property Page can be resized by dragging the edges.
4.4.3 Welcome Screen / System Summary<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 26<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Welcome screen is displayed after the first login and when the System Summary tab is<br />
selected. The Welcome screen displays information on the selected organisational unit (e.g.<br />
number of keyholders and maximum limits of the system). If the operator privileges allow, it also<br />
has a Set Organisation Options link that allows the modules to be customised (see the<br />
Customisation section).<br />
To display the welcome screen/system summary:<br />
1. If necessary, select the organisational<br />
unit.<br />
2. Select the System Summary tab.<br />
To display the list view and property page:<br />
1. If necessary, select the organisational<br />
unit.<br />
2. Select a module in the Explorer bar.<br />
Only the modules allowed by the user’s<br />
privileges for the selected organisational unit<br />
will be displayed.<br />
A module can be redisplayed by selecting the<br />
appropriate tab or closed by selecting .<br />
Further information on screen areas is given in the Administration Software Window section.
4.4.4 Menus<br />
Normal Menu:<br />
Keyholder Menu<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 27<br />
Administration Software<br />
Hardware Menu:<br />
The menu items that can be accessed depend on the operator privileges. The list below details<br />
all options available to an Installer.<br />
File<br />
Logoff Displays the Log on/Exit window.<br />
Import Displays the File Import window.<br />
Activate Alarm Enables/Disables the Alarm Alert popups.<br />
Alerts<br />
Preview ID Card Displays a previously-created photo ID card for the selected<br />
keyholder(s) which can then be printed (Keyholder List View<br />
only).<br />
Print ID Card Prints a previously-created photo ID card for the selected<br />
keyholder (Keyholder List View only).<br />
Exit Exits immediately.<br />
Edit<br />
Update or Add Saves a new record or updates an existing record.<br />
Current Record<br />
Create a New Creates a new record.<br />
Record<br />
Delete Current Deletes the selected record.<br />
Record<br />
Make Copy Record Copies the selected record. To paste the record, select Update<br />
or Add Record.<br />
Discard Changes to Discards any changes since the last Update or Add operation.<br />
Current Record<br />
These facilities are the same as those offered by the buttons on the Property Page.<br />
View<br />
Explorer Bar Toggles the display of the Explorer bar.<br />
Toolbar Displays toolbar submenu:<br />
Standard Buttons Toggles the display of the toolbar.<br />
Show Text Toggles the display of icon names.<br />
Large Icons Toggles the display of large icons.<br />
Windows Displays Windows submenu:<br />
Restore Panes – displays all tabs and restores undocked<br />
windows back to their default position.<br />
Show all tear offs – enables tips to be displayed when<br />
attempting to use the tear off facility.<br />
Don’t show tear off tips – disables the tear off tips.<br />
Enable/Disable Tearoff – toggles the tear off facility. If disabled,<br />
any undocked windows can be moved but not docked.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 28<br />
Administration Software<br />
Tech Support Mode – toggles between default windows settings<br />
and customised windows settings.<br />
A list of windows that can be brought to the front when selected.<br />
Large Icons Displays the list with associated large icons (List View only).<br />
Small Icons Displays the list with associated small icons (List View only).<br />
Details Displays the list with extra information in columns (List View<br />
only).<br />
Thumbnails Displays the list with associated photos (Keyholder List View<br />
only).<br />
Tree View Displays the list with parent and subordinate areas (Area List<br />
View only).<br />
Choose Columns Specifies the columns to be displayed in the list view.<br />
Back Selects the previously selected module.<br />
Forward Selects the next module if Back has been used.<br />
Keyholder Detail<br />
Report<br />
Displays the keyholder detail report for the selected keyholder<br />
(Keyholder List View only).<br />
Event Report Displays the keyholder event search parameters for selecting an<br />
event report for the selected keyholder (Keyholder List View<br />
only).<br />
Show Details Displays information on the selected record in a separate window,<br />
e.g. time profile in access groups.<br />
Navigate to Displays information on the selected record in a the<br />
Administration Software window, e.g. time profile in access<br />
groups.<br />
Refresh Updates the current display.<br />
Keyholders (only on Keyholder module)<br />
Anti-Passback Forgives an anti-passback violation by the selected keyholder.<br />
Forgive<br />
Encode Keycode Displays the Encode Keycode window (see the Encode<br />
Keycode section).<br />
Search Bar Displays the Search bar (see the Search for a Keyholder<br />
section).<br />
Hardware (only on Hardware module)<br />
Options when a 500 TCP/IP channel is selected:<br />
Reset Password Displays a warning message to consult the hardware<br />
documentation (see the Manage Controller Firmware section).<br />
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically<br />
connected controllers.<br />
Download direct<br />
channels<br />
Download offline<br />
channels<br />
Download Channel<br />
Database<br />
Synchronise all<br />
channel clocks<br />
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected<br />
direct/dialup channels.<br />
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline<br />
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers<br />
using the PDA section).<br />
Downloads the database of all controllers on the selected 500<br />
channel.<br />
Synchronises all clocks on the system with the clock on the PC.
Firmware<br />
Download<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 29<br />
Administration Software<br />
Displays the Manage Firmware window (see the Manage<br />
Controller Firmware section).<br />
Only download firmware to one server or controller<br />
at a time.<br />
Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).<br />
Options when a direct channel is selected:<br />
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically<br />
connected controllers.<br />
Download direct<br />
channels<br />
Download offline<br />
channels<br />
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected<br />
direct/dialup channels.<br />
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline<br />
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers<br />
using the PDA section).<br />
Initialise CNC 1 Initialises the CNC if the selected channel is a 1100/2100/2200 -<br />
RS232 - SWB - CNC channel.<br />
Abort Channel<br />
Download 2<br />
Download Channel<br />
Database<br />
Synchronise all<br />
channel clocks<br />
1 1100/2100/2200 - RS232 - SWB - CNC channel only<br />
Aborts a channel download.<br />
2 1100/2100/2200 channel only<br />
Downloads the database to all controllers on the selected<br />
channel.<br />
Synchronises all clocks on the system with the clock on the PC.<br />
Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).<br />
Options when a dialup channel is selected:<br />
Dial Now Displays the Dialup Connection window to dialup a modem<br />
(see the Modems section).<br />
Show Call Progress Display the Dialup Connection window to show the dialup<br />
progress (see the Modems section).<br />
Hang Up Display the Dialup Connection window to hang up a dialup<br />
connection (see the Modems section).<br />
Reset Password 1 Displays a warning message to consult the hardware<br />
documentation (see the Modems section).<br />
1<br />
512 only<br />
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically<br />
connected controllers.<br />
Download direct<br />
channels<br />
Download offline<br />
channels<br />
Abort Channel<br />
Download 2<br />
Download Channel<br />
Database<br />
Synchronise all<br />
controller clocks<br />
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected<br />
direct/dialup channels.<br />
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline<br />
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers<br />
using the PDA section).<br />
Aborts a channel download.<br />
2 1100/2100/2200 channel only<br />
Downloads the database to all controllers on the selected<br />
channel.<br />
Synchronises all clocks on the channel to the clock on the PC.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 30<br />
Administration Software<br />
Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).<br />
Options when an offline channel is selected:<br />
Reset Password Displays a warning message to consult the hardware<br />
documentation (see the Reset Password section).<br />
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically<br />
connected controllers.<br />
Download direct Downloads the database to all controllers on selected<br />
channels<br />
direct/dialup channels.<br />
Download offline Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline<br />
channels<br />
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers<br />
using the PDA section).<br />
Options when an online controller is selected:<br />
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically<br />
connected controllers.<br />
Download direct Downloads the database to all controllers on selected<br />
channels<br />
direct/dialup channels.<br />
Download offline Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline<br />
channels<br />
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers<br />
using the PDA section).<br />
Configure<br />
controller 1<br />
Displays the Configure Controller window (see the<br />
Probe/Configure/Unconfigure a Controller section).<br />
Unconfigure<br />
controller 2<br />
1 Unconfigured controller only<br />
Unconfigures the selected controller from its channel.<br />
2 Configured controller only<br />
Download<br />
Downloads the database to the selected controller.<br />
controller database<br />
Reset Diagnostic Resets the diagnostic code.<br />
Code<br />
Firmware download Displays the Manage Firmware window (see the Manage<br />
Controller Firmware section).<br />
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a<br />
time.<br />
Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).<br />
Options when an offline controller is selected:<br />
Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically<br />
connected controllers.<br />
Download direct<br />
channels<br />
Download offline<br />
channels<br />
Connect to<br />
Controller<br />
Disconnect from<br />
controller<br />
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected<br />
direct/dialup channels.<br />
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline<br />
channels (see the Download Database to the Controllers<br />
using the PDA section).<br />
Connects the controller.<br />
Disconnects the controller.<br />
Identify Controller Displays the Identify/Configure Controller window (see the<br />
Download Database to the Controllers using the PC section).
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 31<br />
Administration Software<br />
Tools<br />
Event Log Displays the Event Log window (see the Event Log section).<br />
System Alarms Displays the System Alarms window (see the System Alarms<br />
section).<br />
Alarm Viewer Displays the Alarm Viewer window (see the Alarm Viewer<br />
section).<br />
Card Designer Displays the ID Card Designer window (see the ID Card<br />
Designer section).<br />
Audit Trail Displays the Audit Trail window (see the Audit Trail section).<br />
Alarm Map<br />
Displays the Alarm Map Designer window (see the Alarm Map<br />
Designer<br />
Designer section).<br />
Event to Action Displays the Event to Action Configuration window (see the<br />
Configuration Event to Action section)<br />
Configure<br />
Displays the Configure Organisations window (see the<br />
Organisations Configure Organisations section).<br />
Manage OEM<br />
Interface 3<br />
Displays the OEM Interface Configuration window. Further<br />
information is given in documentation supplied with the OEM<br />
product.<br />
3<br />
only if license allows.<br />
Database Backup Displays the Backup window (see the Backups section).<br />
Event Archiving Displays the Event Archiving window (see the Event Archive<br />
section)<br />
Advanced<br />
Displays the Advanced Keyholder Window (Keyholder List<br />
Keyholder Search View only, see the Search for a Keyholder section).<br />
Key Seek Displays the Find Keyholder by Key window (see the Search<br />
for a Keyholder section).<br />
Upgrade License Displays the License Keys window (see Upgrade License<br />
section).<br />
Configure<br />
Displays the Configure Peripherals window (see Configure<br />
Peripherals<br />
Peripherals section).<br />
Manage Controller Displays the Manage Firmware window (see the Manage<br />
Firmware<br />
Controller Firmware section).<br />
Change Password Changes the current user's password (see the Change<br />
Password section).<br />
Options Displays the Organisation Options window (see the<br />
Customisation section).<br />
Reports<br />
Favourites A Manage Favourites option that displays the Favourite<br />
Reports Manager window (see the Add a Report to<br />
Favourites section) and a list of favourite reports that are<br />
displayed when selected.<br />
Custom Report Displays the Custom Report Manager window (see the Add a<br />
Manager<br />
Custom Report section.<br />
Custom Reports A list of custom reports that are displayed when selected.<br />
Saved Reports A list of saved reports that are displayed when selected.<br />
Refresh reports Updates the list of reports in the Explorer bar and Reports<br />
explorer and menu menu.
Help<br />
4.4.5 Toolbar<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 32<br />
Administration Software<br />
Contents Displays this Help file.<br />
About ... Displays information about the version and build of the<br />
Administration Software currently running. The Installer tab<br />
displays information entered at software installation and the<br />
System Info button access standard Windows facilities.<br />
To alter the appearance of the icons:<br />
• Right click on the toolbar and the following facilities are then available:<br />
• Toggle the button name by selecting Show Text.<br />
• Toggle the button size by selecting Large Icons (this also affects the Navigator tab<br />
in the Explorer bar).<br />
To display the full name of the icon:<br />
• Move the cursor over the button but do not select it.<br />
The icons provide following facilities:<br />
Go Back selects the previously selected module. Selecting the down arrow on the<br />
left of the icon, gives a list of modules for reselection.<br />
Go Forward selects the next module if the Go Back icon has been used. Selecting<br />
the down arrow on the left of the icon, gives a list of modules for reselection.<br />
View/Hide Explorer Bar toggles the Explorer bar display.<br />
Update or Add a Current Record confirms any changes made to the current<br />
record.<br />
Create a New Record creates a new record.<br />
Delete Current Record deletes the selected record.<br />
Discard Changes to Current Record discards any changes since the last Update<br />
or Add operation.<br />
Displays the Find Keyholder by Key window (see the Search for a Keyholder<br />
section).<br />
Displays the Search bar in Keyholder module.<br />
Search Criteria to Refine List View displays the Search bar (Keyholder module<br />
only, see the Search for a Keyholder section).<br />
List View Modes selects how the List View displays its contents. Selecting the<br />
down arrow gives the following options:<br />
Large Icons Displays the list with associated large icons.<br />
Small Icons Displays the list with associated small icons.<br />
List Displays the list only.<br />
Details Displays the list with extra information in columns.<br />
Thumbnails Displays the list with associated photos (Keyholder module only).<br />
Tree View Displays a tree view of the areas (Area module only).<br />
View Event Log displays the Event Log window.
4.4.6 Explorer Bar<br />
Alarms displays the Alarm Viewer window.<br />
Database Backup displays the Backup window.<br />
Anti Passback Forgive forgives an anti-passback violation by the selected<br />
keyholder (Keyholder module only).<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 33<br />
Administration Software<br />
Probe Controller Connections collects information from physical connections<br />
(Hardware module only).<br />
Bring up Modem Configuration Dialog displays the Modems window (Hardware<br />
module only.<br />
Refresh updates the current display.<br />
The Explorer bar has three tabs:<br />
The Navigator tab displays a modules list. Selecting a module, displays<br />
appropriate information in the List View and Property Page.<br />
The Shortcuts tab displays a tools list. Selecting a tool (Event Log, Database<br />
Backup, Alarm Viewer, Alarm Map Designer, Event to Action Configuration,<br />
ID Card Designer, Event Archiving or Audit Trail) activates the appropriate tool.<br />
The Reports tab displays a report folders list . Selecting a report folder, displays a<br />
list of reports in that folder. Selecting a report displays the report and provides<br />
Print facilities.
4.4.7 Status Bar<br />
The Status bar displays the following:<br />
• Messages.<br />
• The currently logged on operator.<br />
• A count of the number of records in the module.<br />
• The maximum number of records allowed in the module (if appropriate).<br />
4.4.8 List View<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 34<br />
Administration Software<br />
The List View displays all of the records that are associated with the module selected in the<br />
Explorer bar. Selecting a record in the List View will cause the properties associated with that<br />
record to be displayed in the Property Page.<br />
The List View can be resized by dragging any of the edges.<br />
To customise the list view using the Custom Settings window:<br />
1. Select View > Choose Columns (via the<br />
Menus) and the Custom Settings<br />
window is displayed.<br />
2. Select the check box next to the columns<br />
to be displayed.<br />
3. Enter the column widths.<br />
4. Select from a drop-down list the column to<br />
be used to sort the list.<br />
5. Select the Ascending or Descending<br />
radio button to specify how the list will be<br />
sorted.<br />
6. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to cancel.<br />
To customise the list view from the list view:<br />
• To select which columns to display, right click on the column heading and select which<br />
columns to display from the drop-down menu.<br />
• To alter the column widths, drag the border in the column heading.<br />
• To toggle the list view order, select the column heading and the triangle will toggle for<br />
ascending or descending order.<br />
To alter the list view:<br />
1. Right click a record, or select the View menu, or the arrow next to the icon.<br />
2. Select a view from the drop-down menu:<br />
Large Icons Displays the list with associated large icons.<br />
Small Icons Displays the list with associated small icons.<br />
Details Displays the list with extra information in columns.<br />
Thumbnails 1 Displays the list with associated photos (Keyholder module only).<br />
Tree View Displays a tree view of the areas (Area module only).<br />
To create a record:<br />
1. Right click on a record and select New from the drop-down menu, or Edit > Create a New<br />
Record, or the icon.<br />
2. Edit the new record.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 35<br />
Administration Software<br />
3. Select the Update or Add button, or Edit > Update or Add Current Record, or the<br />
icon.<br />
To copy a record:<br />
1. Right click on a record and select Copy from the drop-down menu, or select a record and<br />
Edit > Make a Copy of Current Record.<br />
2. Edit the new record.<br />
3. Select the Update or Add button, or Edit > Update or Add Current Record, or the<br />
icon.<br />
To delete a record:<br />
• Right click on a record and select Delete from the drop-down menu, or select a record and<br />
the Delete button, or Edit > Delete Current Record, or the icon.<br />
To display a report:<br />
• Right click on a record and select Report from the drop-down menu, or select a record and<br />
View > Report List Selection.<br />
To find a record:<br />
1. Select a column.<br />
2. Enter the first character(s) of the record (e.g. Entering S in the Name column will find the<br />
first record with a name starting with S).<br />
To refresh the display:<br />
• Right click on a record and select Refresh from the drop-down menu, or select a record<br />
and View > Refresh, or the icon, or the F5 key.<br />
4.4.9 Property Page<br />
The Property Page displays information associated with the record selected in the List View.<br />
Each module displays different information. The information is displayed on tabbed areas and<br />
some modules have more than one tab to accommodate all the relevant information.<br />
The Property Page can be resized by dragging any of the edges. When there is insufficient<br />
room to display the fields required, scroll bars are displayed to allow access to these fields.<br />
Each Property Page has four buttons:<br />
Update/Add Update is displayed if data is edited. When selected, any changes are saved.<br />
Add is displayed if a new record is being added. When selected, the new record<br />
is saved.<br />
New Allows a new record to be created.<br />
Delete Allows the selected record to be deleted.<br />
Cancel Discards any changes made to the current record providing Update or Add<br />
have not been selected.<br />
Note<br />
The buttons affect the whole Property Page not just the currently displayed tab.
4.4.10 Logoff<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 36<br />
Administration Software<br />
To logoff from the Administration Software:<br />
1. Select File > Logoff or press Ctrl-Q and the Log on/Exit window is displayed.<br />
2. You can log on again (see the Logon section) or exit the window by selecting Exit.<br />
Note<br />
The system will logoff automatically after 10 minutes if not used. This auto-logout time<br />
can be modified for each operator (see the Operator Details section).
4.5 Organisation Options<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 37<br />
Administration Software<br />
4.5.1 Customisation<br />
Note<br />
The options available for customisation depend on the license(s). To apply license(s),<br />
see the Upgrade License section.<br />
To customise the system and organisational unit:<br />
1. Display the Organisation Options window by selecting Set Organisation Options on the<br />
Welcome Screen or Tools > Options on the Menus.<br />
2. To customise the system settings, select System Settings.<br />
3. To customise the system card formats, select Card Format.<br />
4. To customise the system event archiving options, select Event Archiving.<br />
5. To customise the alarm response messages, select Alarm Responses.<br />
6. To customise the system access options, select System Access.<br />
7. To customise the organisational unit details, select Organisational Unit Details.<br />
8. To customise the organisational unit access options, select Access.<br />
9. To customise the organisational unit module names, select Custom Labels.<br />
10. To customise the organisational unit categories, select Categories.<br />
11. To customise the organisational unit keyholder extra information, select Keyholder Extra<br />
Details.<br />
12. To customise the organisational unit alarms, select Alarms.<br />
13. Select Apply (window remains open) or OK (closes window).<br />
Note<br />
OK and Apply save the changes on all the tabs.<br />
4.5.2 System Settings<br />
To customise the system settings:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. Select System Settings.<br />
3. The following facilities are then available:<br />
• Specify a Reminder Interval for<br />
database backups.<br />
• Specify PIN Length.<br />
• Select/deselect <strong>User</strong> Definable PIN.<br />
• Select/deselect Allow PIN Change at<br />
Door. To change the PIN at the door,<br />
click here.<br />
• Specify a Communication<br />
Protection Password for<br />
1100/2100/2200 Series Door<br />
Controller dialup channels. The<br />
password is an 8-digit key code that<br />
can be entered manually or via the<br />
administration desktop reader.<br />
4. Select another option or close the window.
To enter an area controlled by a legacy Stanley PIN reader<br />
Present a valid key and enter its PIN code.<br />
To enter an area controlled by a OneProx reader<br />
Present a valid key and enter its PIN code followed by #.<br />
To change the PIN at the door:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 38<br />
Administration Software<br />
This does not apply to the legacy Stanley PIN Reader. The legacy Stanley PIN Reader is<br />
the only reader that can be used with 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.<br />
1. Create a reader mode profile for PIN only or PIN and Token access.<br />
2. Select the Door Access tab and apply the reader mode profile to the PIN reader.<br />
3. If PIN and Token mode, present a valid key to the PIN reader.<br />
4. Press * and enter the current PIN followed by #.<br />
5. Enter the new PIN followed by #.<br />
6. Repeat Step 5 to confirm the new PIN.<br />
Example<br />
* 1234 # 4321 # 4321 #<br />
4.5.3 Card Format<br />
To customise the system card formats:<br />
5. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
6. Select Card Format.<br />
7. The following facilities are then available:<br />
• Add a new card format<br />
• Edit a card format.<br />
• Delete a card format.<br />
• Move a card format up or down<br />
(determines validation order).<br />
8. Select another option or close the window.<br />
To add or edit a proximity reader card format, click here.<br />
To add or edit a Magstripe card format, click here.<br />
To add or edit a Wiegand (2601) card format, click here.
4.5.3.1 Proximity Reader<br />
To add or edit a proximity reader card format:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. To add, select Card Format and the Add<br />
button.<br />
3. To edit, select Card Format > Proximity<br />
Reader and Edit button or Proximity<br />
Reader.<br />
4. Enter the name and description of the<br />
format<br />
5. Select the type of format (i.e. Proximity<br />
Reader).<br />
6. Select the display mode.<br />
7. Select another option or confirm the<br />
changes.<br />
4.5.3.2 Magnetic Stripe<br />
To add or edit a Magnetic Stripe reader card format:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. To add, select Card Format and the Add<br />
button.<br />
3. To edit, select Card Format > Mag Stripe<br />
and Edit button or Mag Stripe.<br />
4. Enter the name and description of the<br />
format.<br />
5. Select the type of format (i.e. Magnetic<br />
Stripe).<br />
6. Select/deselect LRC Checking (i.e. is<br />
longitudinal redundancy checking used?).<br />
7. Select the display mode.<br />
8. Select another option or confirm the<br />
changes.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 39<br />
Administration Software
9. Select the Layout tab.<br />
10. Select token Start (the position of the first<br />
character from the card's data that forms<br />
part of the keycode) and Length (the<br />
number of characters). For further<br />
information, see the manufacturer's<br />
documentation. For examples, click here.<br />
If the length is changed after adding<br />
keys, the keys will become invalid.<br />
11. Select/deselect Facility Code. If selected,<br />
specify the facility code start and length. If<br />
Facility Code is specified then an access<br />
group can be selected to determine what<br />
access should be granted for all cards<br />
using the specified facility code.<br />
12. Select/deselect Issue Code. If selected,<br />
specify the issue code start and length.<br />
13. Select/deselect the Issue Code Look<br />
Ahead. If selected, specify the Offset (the<br />
value added to the issue code when the<br />
New Issue button on the Keyholder Keys<br />
page is selected) and Range (determines<br />
the maximum issue code allowed, e.g.<br />
offset 1 range 3 then 1,2,3 and 4 are valid<br />
issue codes).<br />
14. The token length is automatically<br />
calculated (start+facility code length+issue<br />
code length) but can be increased.<br />
The bars at the bottom indicates the following:<br />
16. Select another option or close the window.<br />
Examples of start and length<br />
Start: 1<br />
Length: 9<br />
Data: 123456789<br />
=> Keycode is: 123456789<br />
..<br />
Start: 1<br />
Length: 9<br />
Data: 123456789012345690123456789<br />
=> Keycode is: 123456789<br />
Data after the 9 th digit is ignored as this is not part of the token format data<br />
Start: 3<br />
Length: 9<br />
Data: 123456789012345690123456789<br />
=> Keycode is: 345678901<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 40<br />
Administration Software
Keycode starts from the 3rd digit and is 9 digits long<br />
Start: 7<br />
Length: 4<br />
Data: 123456789012345690123456789<br />
=> Keycode is: 7890<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 41<br />
Administration Software<br />
Start: 5<br />
Length: 4<br />
Data: 115000213<br />
=> Keycode is: 21<br />
The keycode data has some leading zeros, which means the keycode is 0021. As the keycode<br />
is numerical the leading 0’s add nothing to the keycode, making the keycode value 21.<br />
When encoding to cards, keycodes are padded with leading zeros to the full keycode<br />
length.<br />
Start: 5<br />
Length: 5<br />
Keycode: 385<br />
=> Data will be written as: 000000385<br />
4 zeros to get to the start position, and 2 more leading zeros pad out the keycode to make it the<br />
full 5 digits in length.<br />
When encoding to cards, keycodes get padded with zeros to make them work.<br />
Start: 5<br />
Length: 5<br />
Keycode: 385<br />
=> Data will be written as: 000000385<br />
4 zeros move the start along, and 2 more zeros pad out the keycode to make it 5 digits in<br />
length.<br />
4.5.3.3 Wiegand (2601 format)<br />
Note<br />
If using 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, the standard Wiegand card format used<br />
with the door controllers must be used for all controllers on the system.<br />
To add or edit a Wiegand reader card format:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. To add, select Card Format and the Add<br />
button.<br />
3. To edit, select Card Format > Wiegand<br />
(2601) and Edit button or Wiegand<br />
(2601).<br />
4. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
5. Enter the name and description of the<br />
format<br />
6. Select the type of format (i.e. Wiegand<br />
(2601)).<br />
7. Select Custom Wiegand, Universal<br />
Wiegand, or Corporate HID.<br />
8. Select the display mode.<br />
If Custom Wiegand is selected, the layout can be specified:
1. Select the Layout tab. Note: If Wiegand<br />
Universal is selected this tab is not<br />
displayed.<br />
2. Select token Start (the position of the first<br />
character from the card's data that forms<br />
part of the keycode) and Length (the<br />
number of characters). For further<br />
information, see the manufacturer's<br />
documentation. For examples, click here.<br />
If the length is changed after adding<br />
keys, the keys will become invalid.<br />
3. Select/deselect Facility Code. If selected,<br />
specify the facility code start and length. If<br />
Facility Code is specified then an access<br />
group can be selected to determine what<br />
access should be granted for all cards<br />
using the specified facility code.<br />
4. Select/deselect Issue Code. If selected,<br />
specify the issue code start and length.<br />
5. The token length is automatically<br />
calculated (start+facility code length+issue<br />
code length) but can be increased.<br />
6. Select/deselect Number Even Parity. If<br />
selected, specify the number of bits to use<br />
in the even parity check.<br />
7. Select/deselect Number Odd Parity. If<br />
selected, specify the number of bits to use<br />
in the odd parity check.<br />
The bar at the bottom indicates the following:<br />
8. Select another option or close the window.<br />
4.5.3.4 Adding or Editing a Card Format<br />
To add or edit a card format:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. To add, select Card Format and the Add button.<br />
3. To edit, select Card Format > card type and Edit button.<br />
4. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
For details of a proximity reader card format, click here.<br />
For details of a Magstripe card format, click here.<br />
For details of a Wiegand (2601) card format, click here.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 42<br />
Administration Software
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 43<br />
Administration Software<br />
4.5.4 Event Archiving<br />
Note<br />
This window defines when and where events are archived but is only displayed if the user<br />
has Installer or Supervisor privileges.<br />
To customise the system archive configuration:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. Select Event Archiving.<br />
3. Specify the Maximum log size (event<br />
count) used by manual archive only.<br />
4. If archiving is not required, select the<br />
Discard All Events (Do not archive)<br />
check box.<br />
5. If archiving is required, enter the Default<br />
archive location or use the browse<br />
facility. The archive file is automatically<br />
named Edate.csv.<br />
6. Specify the Keep Archives For (i.e. the<br />
time in years to keep archive files).<br />
7. Select the Enable automatic archiving<br />
check box.<br />
8. If regular archives are required, specify<br />
the Archive events older than in days<br />
and the Minimum no. of events to<br />
archive. For example, if 7 days are<br />
specified, events occurring less than 7<br />
days ago are not automatically archived<br />
and remain in the event log until they are 7<br />
days old.<br />
Note<br />
If events are to be discarded on archive,<br />
ensure that Archive events older than is<br />
set to at least 120 days.<br />
9. Select another option or close the window.<br />
Only one archive can be performed each day and automatic archiving is not possible<br />
until at least Archive events older than (e.g. 7) days of events are available.<br />
Automatic archives are then performed 18:00 only if the minimum number of events to<br />
archive are available and a manual archive has not been performed that day.
4.5.5 Alarm Responses<br />
To customise the alarm responses:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. Select Alarm Responses.<br />
3. To add an alarm response text, select the<br />
Add button and enter the new alarm<br />
response text.<br />
4. To delete an alarm response text, select<br />
the text and the Delete button.<br />
5. Select another option or close the window.<br />
4.5.6 System Access<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 44<br />
Administration Software<br />
It is recommended to take a backup of the database before changing the access type<br />
because information could be lost (e.g. access groups and areas).<br />
To customise the system access:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. Select System Access.<br />
3. Select the Access defined by option.<br />
4. Select the Access based on option.<br />
5. Select another option or close the window.<br />
4.5.7 Organisational Unit Details<br />
To customise the organisational unit details:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. If necessary, select the organisational<br />
unit.<br />
3. Enter the organisational unit name.<br />
4. Enter the organisational unit description.<br />
5. Select the start of the week.<br />
6. Select the time zone.<br />
7. Select the default card format.<br />
8. If licensed for Event to Action:<br />
• Enter the E-mail address that will send<br />
the message generated by the Event<br />
to Action facility.<br />
• Enter the name of the SMTP server<br />
that uses Simple Mail Transfer<br />
Protocol to send the Email.<br />
9. Select another option or confirm the<br />
changes.
4.5.8 Access<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 45<br />
Administration Software<br />
To customise the organisational unit access options:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. Select Access.<br />
3. Select/deselect Enable Anti-Passback<br />
Reset Time. If selected, specify Anti-<br />
Passback Reset Time of Day.<br />
4. Select/deselect Enable Denied Access<br />
Counting. If selected, specify the number<br />
of Attempts allowed and the Lockdown<br />
Time in minutes if the number of failed<br />
attempts is exceeded.<br />
5. Select the another option or close the<br />
window.<br />
4.5.9 Custom Labels<br />
Note<br />
Changing the module names will affect the names in the Explorer bar (e.g. Keyholders<br />
could be changed to Personnel). Also some of the tab labels may be changed (e.g.<br />
Category could be changed to Department).<br />
To customise the organisational unit module names:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. Select Custom Labels.<br />
3. Enter the new names for the available<br />
customised labels.<br />
4. Select another option or confirm the<br />
changes.
4.5.10 Categories<br />
To customise the organisational unit categories:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. Select Categories (or relevant<br />
customised label).<br />
3. The following facilities are then available:<br />
• Add a new category by selecting Add<br />
and entering a new name and<br />
description.<br />
• Edit a category by editing the name<br />
and description.<br />
• Delete a category by selecting the<br />
category and Delete.<br />
• Design an ID card for the selected<br />
category by selecting the button<br />
(see the ID Card Designer section).<br />
4. If areas are assigned to a 500 channel:<br />
• Limit the number of times a keyholder<br />
in the selected category is allowed to<br />
enter the area by selecting an area,<br />
selecting the checkbox and<br />
incrementing the limit.<br />
• Reset the area usage for all<br />
keyholders in this category by<br />
selecting the button.<br />
• If the Priority Keyholders check box<br />
is selected, keyholders in this<br />
category are always downloaded to<br />
the 512 controllers. Otherwise,<br />
keyholders are downloaded on<br />
demand.<br />
5. Select another option or confirm the<br />
changes.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 46<br />
Administration Software
4.5.11 Keyholder Extra Details<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 47<br />
Administration Software<br />
Note<br />
The fields are displayed in the Keyholder Property Page when the Extra Information<br />
tab is selected (see the Keyholder Extra Information section) but only the first 5 fields<br />
can be displayed in the Keyholder List View (see the Keyholder List View section).<br />
To customise the organisational unit keyholder information:<br />
1. If necessary, display the Organisation<br />
Options window as described in the<br />
Customisation section.<br />
2. Select Keyholder Extra Details (or<br />
relevant customised label).<br />
3. Select the number of fields required.<br />
4. Enter a description of the information to be<br />
included in the column.<br />
5. Enter the size of the column. Alternatively,<br />
use the increment/decrement buttons to<br />
set the required size.<br />
6. Select another option or confirm the<br />
changes.<br />
4.5.12 Alarms<br />
To customise the organisational unit alarms:<br />
1. If necessary, display the<br />
Organisation Options window as<br />
described in the Customisation<br />
section.<br />
2. Select Alarms.<br />
3. The following facilities are then<br />
available:<br />
• Specify the duration of the alarm<br />
sound.<br />
• Test the alarm sound ( starts<br />
the alarm sound and<br />
the alarm sound).<br />
stops<br />
• Change the alarm sound (select<br />
the Change button and select a<br />
.wav file).<br />
• Reset the alarm sound (select the<br />
Reset button).<br />
4. Select another option or confirm the<br />
changes.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 48<br />
Administration Software<br />
If alarm management has been licensed, the alarm points that are not assigned to an area for<br />
monitoring by the Alarm Viewer can be specified for monitoring via the System Alarms<br />
window:<br />
1. Select Alarms > Detail.<br />
2. Select the Show alarm dialog for<br />
unmanaged alarms checkbox.<br />
3. Select which events are alarms and<br />
will be displayed in the System<br />
Alarms window.<br />
4. Select another option or confirm the<br />
changes.<br />
If alarm vi has not been licensed, the events to be classed as alarms can be specified and thus<br />
monitoring via the System Alarms window:<br />
1. Select Alarms > Detail.<br />
2. Select which events are alarms and<br />
will be displayed in the System<br />
Alarms window.<br />
3. Select another option or confirm the<br />
changes.
4.6 Organisational Units<br />
4.6.1 Organisational Units List<br />
Note<br />
This facility is only available if licensed for more than one organisational unit.<br />
To display the organisational unit list:<br />
• Select Tools > Configure<br />
Organisations and the<br />
Configure Organisations<br />
window is displayed.<br />
Further information is given in the Configure Organisations section.<br />
4.6.2 Organisational Unit Details<br />
Note<br />
This facility is only available if licensed for more than one organisational unit<br />
To add/edit/delete an organisational unit:<br />
1. Select Tools > Configure<br />
Organisations and the<br />
Configure Organisations<br />
window is displayed.<br />
2. Perform one of the following:<br />
• To add, select the Add New<br />
button and enter the<br />
organisation’s details.<br />
• To edit, select the<br />
organisation and Edit button<br />
and enter the new details.<br />
• To delete, select the<br />
organisation and Delete<br />
button.<br />
3. Select the OK or Apply button.<br />
Further information is given in the Configure Organisations section.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 49<br />
Administration Software
4.7 Keyholders<br />
4.7.1 Keyholder List View<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 50<br />
Administration Software<br />
On initial viewing, the Keyholder List View displays information on keyholders in columns and<br />
is in alphabetical order.<br />
General facilities are described in the List View section.<br />
Note<br />
The first 5 extra information fields can be displayed in the keyholder list view using the<br />
Customisation facilities. All the extra information fields are displayed in the Keyholder<br />
Property Page (see the Keyholder Extra Information section).<br />
To display information on a keyholder:<br />
• Select a keyholder in the Keyholder List View and the appropriate information will be<br />
displayed in the Keyholder Property Page.<br />
To search for a keyholder:<br />
• Click here.<br />
Other facilities are described in List View section.<br />
4.7.2 Keyholder Property Page<br />
4.7.2.1 Keyholder Details<br />
The Keyholder Property Page is used to define keyholders (e.g. personal details and access<br />
group). The identification information is displayed on initial selection.<br />
Note<br />
Some labels and table names may have been changed by customisation.<br />
To display details information:<br />
1. Select the Keyholder module.<br />
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Title The title of the keyholder (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Last Name The last name of the keyholder (specified by data entry).<br />
First Name The first name of the keyholder (specified by data entry).<br />
Initials The initials of the keyholder (specified by data entry).<br />
Start Date The date and time the keyholder started employment or visiting (entered by<br />
data entry and drop-down calendar). Enabled/disabled by selecting its<br />
check box. If enabled, access is not allowed until the specified date and<br />
time but events (e.g. an attempt to enter) are reported.<br />
End Date The date and time the keyholder ended employment or visiting (entered by<br />
data entry and drop-down calendar). Enabled/disabled by selecting its<br />
check box. If enabled, access is no longer allowed after the specified date<br />
and time but events (e.g. an attempt to enter) are still reported.<br />
Category The category of the keyholder (selected from a drop-down list). The<br />
Customisation facilities can be used to create/edit categories.<br />
The category determines the format of the ID card (see the Photo ID
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 51<br />
Administration Software<br />
Module helpfile).<br />
Photo A photo of the keyholder.<br />
The photo can be captured from an image file, Twain device or Video<br />
device using the Capture button (see the Image Capture helpfile).<br />
A previously-captured photo can be cleared by selecting the Clear button.<br />
A previously-created photo ID card for the keyholder can be printed by<br />
selecting the Print ID Card button. For further information, see the<br />
Keyholder List View section.<br />
<strong>Security</strong> Level 1 The security level of the keyholder (selected by increments 0 to 9, 0<br />
preventing access to all areas).<br />
Requires Extra<br />
Door Time<br />
1 Access by <strong>Security</strong> Level mode only<br />
An indication of whether the keyholder requires extra time to get through<br />
the door (specified by check box).<br />
To forgive an anti-passback violation by this keyholder:<br />
1. Select the Tasks button<br />
2. Select Anti-Passback Forgive<br />
To display a photo ID card print preview:<br />
1. Select a keyholder (or keyholders) and File > Preview ID Card in the menus, or right click<br />
on a keyholder (or keyholders) and select the Preview ID Card option and the Print<br />
window is displayed.<br />
2. Select a printer and the OK button and the Print Preview window is displayed. To print the<br />
card(s), select the icon.<br />
To print photo ID card(s):<br />
1. Select a keyholder and the Print ID Card button on the Details tab, or select a keyholder<br />
and File > Print ID Card in the menus, or right click on a keyholder and select the Print ID<br />
Card option. If more than one keyholder is selected, the Print ID Card button cannot be<br />
selected.<br />
2. Select a printer and the OK button. If one keyholder is selected, followed by the Print ID<br />
Card button, the Print Preview window is displayed. To print the card, select the icon.<br />
If using a single-sided card printer, the front is printed first and a message asking if the back is<br />
to be printed is displayed. After the front is printed, turn the card over, load it to the printer and<br />
select Yes; if the back is not required, select No.<br />
For information on batch printing, click here.<br />
To encode a magnetic stripe card using a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:<br />
• Select a keyholder and Keyholders > Encode Keycode in the menus or right click on<br />
a keyholder and select Encode Keycode and the Encode Keycode window is<br />
displayed (see the Encode Keycode section).<br />
To print and encode a magnetic stripe card using an Eltron P420 Card Printer:<br />
• Click here (link to TB114 info)<br />
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete keyholders:<br />
Click here.
4.7.2.2 Keyholder Personal Details<br />
To display personal details information:<br />
1. Select the Keyholder module.<br />
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Personal Details tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 52<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Employee Number The employee (staff) number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).<br />
Date of Birth The date of birth of the keyholder (specified by data entry or drop-down<br />
calendar).<br />
Home Tel. The home telephone number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).<br />
Work Tel. The work telephone number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).<br />
Mobile Tel. The mobile telephone number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).<br />
e-Mail The e-Mail address of the keyholder (specified by data entry).<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete keyholders:<br />
Click here.
4.7.2.3 Keyholder Keys<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 53<br />
Administration Software<br />
If an administration reader is to be used to add key codes, an administration reader must be<br />
connected and configured (see Configure Peripherals section).<br />
If the Search bar is displayed in the list view, the Key Code check box must be deselected (see<br />
the Keyholder List View section).<br />
If adding magnetic stripe cards, ensure that the position and length are specified first (see<br />
the Magnetic Stripe section).<br />
If a 1100/2100/2200 master controller has been configured on the administration kit<br />
channel, keys cannot be added if the master controller is not connected or communicating. If<br />
this occurs, deselect the Online checkbox on the master controller Details tab.<br />
To display keys information:<br />
1. Select the Keyholder module.<br />
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Keys tab.<br />
4. The following facilities are then available:<br />
• Specify the PIN number to be used with<br />
OneProx readers that support userdefined<br />
PINs by clicking the Set PIN<br />
button. The PIN number can be cleared<br />
by selecting next to the Set PIN<br />
button.<br />
The PIN number to be used with the<br />
legacy Stanley PIN reader cannot be<br />
changed and is only displayed when the<br />
PIN field is selected.<br />
• Enable/disable a key by<br />
selecting/deselecting a check box. If the<br />
key is disabled, the key will not open<br />
any door.<br />
• Add a new key by presenting the key to<br />
the administration reader or by selecting<br />
Add New and entering the key code.<br />
The PIN number is calculated from the<br />
keycode but is only displayed when the<br />
PIN field is selected. The card format<br />
can be selected from a drop-down list.<br />
• If Magnetic Stripe keys are being used<br />
and Issue Code Look Ahead has been<br />
specified, a New Issue button is<br />
displayed for when a new issue code is<br />
required.<br />
• Delete a key by selecting next to<br />
the key.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete keyholders:<br />
Click here.
4.7.2.4 Keyholder Access Groups<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 54<br />
Administration Software<br />
This tab is only displayed in Access by Access Groups mode (see Access Type section).<br />
Notes<br />
1. Before access groups can be allocated to a keyholder, the access groups (see Access<br />
Group Details section) must be defined first.<br />
2. If using 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, only one access group per keyholder<br />
can be assigned.<br />
To display access group information:<br />
1. Select the Keyholder module.<br />
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Access Group tab.<br />
To allocate access groups to the keyholder:<br />
• Select the appropriate check box(es).<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete keyholders:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.7.2.5 Keyholder Guest Access<br />
This tab is only displayed in Access by Access Groups mode (see Access Type section) and<br />
when multiple organisational units are licensed.<br />
Notes<br />
1. Before guest access groups can be allocated to a keyholder, the access groups (see<br />
Access Group Details section) must be defined in the other organisational unit.<br />
2. If using 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, only one access group per keyholder<br />
can be assigned.<br />
To display guest access information:<br />
1. Select the Keyholder module.<br />
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Guest Access tab.<br />
To allocate guest access groups to the keyholder:<br />
1. Select the organisational unit and a list of available access groups in that organisational unit<br />
is displayed.<br />
2. Select the appropriate check box(es).<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete keyholders:<br />
Click here.
4.7.2.6 Keyholder Personal Access<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 55<br />
Administration Software<br />
This tab is only displayed in Access by Access Groups mode (see Access Type section).<br />
To display personal access information:<br />
1. Select the Keyholder module.<br />
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Personal Access tab.<br />
Note<br />
The number of time profiles that can be<br />
allocated to a personal access group is<br />
2 (i.e. 2 columns).<br />
To allocate access:<br />
1. Select the Profile 1 check box.<br />
2. Select the time profile from the drop-down list. Selecting 'None' will allow access to the<br />
selected areas at all times.<br />
3. Specify the areas the time profile applies to by selecting/deselecting the area check boxes.<br />
4. If access to areas in other organisational units is to be granted, select the More button and<br />
the Additional Areas window is displayed. Select the organisational unit and specify the<br />
areas by selecting/deselecting the area check boxes.<br />
If required, repeat for Profile 2.<br />
Note<br />
A keyholder's time profile can be used in conjunction with a PIN reader to limit access but<br />
a valid key and PIN is always required to gain access during that time profile.<br />
Time profiles do not apply to the legacy Stanley PIN Reader. The legacy Stanley<br />
PIN Reader is the only reader that can be used with 1100/2100/2200 Series Door<br />
Controllers.<br />
To display the time profile:<br />
1. Right click on the column heading.<br />
2. The following facilities are then available:<br />
• Display the time profile by selecting Show Details.<br />
• Go to the Time Profile Property Page by selecting Navigate To.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete keyholders:<br />
Click here.
4.7.2.7 Keyholder Notes<br />
To display notes information:<br />
1. Select the Keyholder module.<br />
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Notes tab.<br />
Notes can then be typed in.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete keyholders:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.7.2.8 Keyholder Extra Information<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 56<br />
Administration Software<br />
This tab is only displayed if extra information fields have been defined using the Customisation<br />
facilities.<br />
To display extra information:<br />
1. Select the Keyholder module.<br />
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Extra Information tab.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete keyholders:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.7.2.9 Keyholder Events<br />
To display recent events information for this keyholder:<br />
1. Select the Keyholder module.<br />
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Events tab.<br />
The latest 10 events associated with the<br />
keyholder are then displayed.<br />
To update the display:<br />
• Select the Refresh button.<br />
To select which columns to display:<br />
1. Right click on the column heading.<br />
2. Select which columns to display from the drop-down menu.<br />
To toggle the event order:<br />
• Select the column heading and the triangle will toggle for ascending or descending order.
To display information on the keyholder that generated the event:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 57<br />
Administration Software<br />
• Right click on the event and select Show Details for keyholder or Navigate to keyholder<br />
from the drop-down menu.<br />
To display controller time:<br />
• Select the Controller Time radio button.<br />
To display system time:<br />
• Deselect the Controller Time radio button.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete keyholders:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.7.2.10 Keyholder Area Usage<br />
This tab is only displayed in Access by Areas mode (see Access Type section) and requires a<br />
500 TCP/IP channel to operate.<br />
To display area usage information:<br />
1. Select the Keyholder module.<br />
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Area Usage tab.<br />
The following is then displayed:<br />
Name The name of the area.<br />
Default The default number of entries this keyholder is allowed to make<br />
into this area (specified by category customisation).<br />
Note<br />
The keyholder must have the same category as that set up in<br />
customisation. If the keyholder has no category or the category<br />
default has not been specified, this field is blank.<br />
Remaining The remaining number of entries this keyholder is allowed to<br />
make into this area (specified by data entry or increments and<br />
automatically updated when display is refreshed).<br />
To allow entry into the area if the limit has been reached:<br />
• Select the Reset button.<br />
• Select the Update button and the 'remaining' value is reset to the 'default' value.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete keyholders:<br />
Click here.
4.7.3 Add/Update/Delete a Keyholder<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 58<br />
Administration Software<br />
Note<br />
1. If an administration reader is to be used to add key codes (see Keyholder Keys<br />
section), an administration reader must be connected and configured (see Configure<br />
Peripherals section).<br />
2. If the Search bar is displayed in the list view, the Key Code check box must be<br />
deselected.<br />
• Select the Keyholder module.<br />
To add a keyholder:<br />
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.<br />
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and<br />
press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Add.<br />
To update a keyholder:<br />
1. Select a keyholder (the Search icon can be used to find the keyholder).<br />
2. Select each tab in turn and enter/update appropriate information (select a property page<br />
field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or select Cancel to discard changes.<br />
To delete a keyholder:<br />
1. Select a keyholder (the Search facility can be used to find the keyholder).<br />
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.<br />
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the keyholder.
4.8 Guests<br />
This module is only displayed if multiple organisational units have been defined, see the<br />
Configure Organisations section.<br />
The Guests Page is used to allow a keyholder from a different organisational unit to enter<br />
areas in this organisational unit.<br />
To display guest details:<br />
1. Select the Guests module.<br />
2. Select the Search for a Keyholders in<br />
other Organisations checkbox.<br />
3. Enter the Last Name of the guest.<br />
4. Select the Organisation the guest<br />
belongs to.<br />
5. Select the Search button and a list of<br />
keyholders that match the search criteria<br />
is displayed.<br />
6. Select the keyholder who is to be a<br />
allowed access and (if necessary) select<br />
the Details tab.<br />
To specify access to a guests:<br />
• Select the Access tab and select the<br />
access group required by the guest to<br />
enter areas (possibly restricted by time<br />
profile) in this organisational unit.<br />
To display read-only details of the guest’s<br />
personal access:<br />
• Select the Personal Access tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 59<br />
Administration Software
4.9 Operators<br />
4.9.1 Operator List View<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 60<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Operator List View displays a list of Administration Software users. An operator must also<br />
be a keyholder. The operator privileges determine which functions the user can access.<br />
Functions that cannot be accessed are greyed out.<br />
See List View section.<br />
4.9.2 Operator Property Page<br />
4.9.2.1 Operator Details<br />
The Operator Property Page is used to define Administration Software users (e.g. the<br />
functions they are allowed to access). The details information is displayed on initial selection.<br />
To display details information:<br />
1. Select the Operator module.<br />
2. Select a user in the List View.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Login Name The type of user (specified by data entry). Specify a<br />
password for the user by selecting Set Password.<br />
Keyholder Name The keyholder who is also an operator (specified by<br />
searching for an existing keyholder or selecting Create New<br />
and creating a new keyholder). A keyholder can only be<br />
assigned one set of operator privileges per organisational<br />
unit.<br />
Expiry Date The date the operator privileges will be removed from the<br />
keyholder (specified by data entry and drop-down calendar).<br />
Auto-Logout Delay (mins) If selected, the operator will be logged out automatically if<br />
the system is not used for the specified time (range 1 to 120<br />
minutes, specified by checkbox and data entry or<br />
increments).<br />
Note<br />
If this value is changed, the updated value takes affect after<br />
the next login.<br />
Key Login Allowed An indication of whether a key can be used to login<br />
(specified by check box).<br />
Key Login Required An indication of whether a key must be used to login<br />
(specified by check box).<br />
Password Expired An indication of whether the password has expired and a<br />
new password must be specified (specified by check box).<br />
Account Disabled An indication of whether the user is prevented from logging<br />
in (specified by check box).<br />
Last Login The date of the last login (automatically entered).
To set a password:<br />
1. Select the Set Password button and the<br />
Set Password window is displayed.<br />
2. Enter the new password (at least 6<br />
characters) and confirm password.<br />
3. Select OK.<br />
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete operators:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.9.2.2 Operator Privileges<br />
To display privileges information:<br />
1. Select the Operator module.<br />
2. Select a user in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Privileges tab.<br />
To allocate privileges:<br />
1. If multiple organisational units exist, select<br />
the Organisation.<br />
2. Select a Privilege Template from the<br />
drop-down list:<br />
Installer - All facilities<br />
Supervisor - All facilities except write<br />
hardware facilities.<br />
<strong>Security</strong> Manager - Read access to all<br />
facilities except Operators, Event<br />
Archiving and Audit Trail; plus write<br />
access to keyholders, access groups,<br />
areas, time/mode profiles, holiday<br />
profiles.<br />
Manager - Read access to all facilities<br />
except Operators; plus write access to<br />
keyholders and add access to event<br />
archiving.<br />
Hardware Manager – Write access to<br />
hardware module and read access to<br />
alarm and event facilities.<br />
Operator - Write access to all facilities<br />
except Hardware, Alarm Map Designer,<br />
Card Designer, Event to Action and Audit<br />
Trail.<br />
Monitor - Event log facilities only and<br />
read only access to time profiles, holiday<br />
profiles, areas, channels, controllers and<br />
doors.<br />
Guard - Alarm Viewer and no autologout.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 61<br />
Note<br />
Administration Software<br />
If specifying an installer or supervisor,<br />
system customisation is only allowed if<br />
installer/supervisor privileges are given<br />
to all organisational units.
Guest Administrator – Write access to<br />
guest facilities.<br />
Guest - Read access only. No access to<br />
Database Backup, Alarm Viewer, Alarm<br />
Map Designer, Event to Action, Card<br />
Designer, Event Archiving, and Audit<br />
Trail.<br />
No privilege – Cannot access the<br />
organisational unit.<br />
3. Select/deselect the System Administrator<br />
checkbox to enable/disable the ability to<br />
perform administration tasks.<br />
4. Repeat for each organisational unit (No<br />
privilege is the default).<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete operators:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.9.2.3 Operator Alarm Viewer<br />
To display alarm viewer information:<br />
1. Select the Operator module.<br />
2. Select a user in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Alarm Viewer tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 62<br />
Administration Software<br />
Note<br />
A guest administrator must be given a<br />
privilege that allows logon to a different<br />
organisational unit. For example,<br />
Manager in Org 1 and Guest<br />
Administrator in Org 2 will allow logon to<br />
Org 1 only; when logged on to Org 1, the<br />
Guest Administrator privileges will allow<br />
access rights to be assigned to guests<br />
from Org 2.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Note<br />
Any changes take affect after the next login.<br />
Pop up window An indication whether an alarm pop-up window is displayed when an<br />
when alarms are alarm is generated (specified by check box).<br />
activated<br />
Use flashing icons An indication whether the alarm icon flashes when an alarm is<br />
generated (specified by check box).<br />
Disable alarm An indication whether the alarm sound is disabled for this operator<br />
sounds<br />
(specified by check box).<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete operators:<br />
Click here.
4.9.3 Add/Update/Delete an Operator<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 63<br />
Administration Software<br />
• Select the Operator module.<br />
To add an operator:<br />
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.<br />
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and<br />
press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Add.<br />
To update an operator:<br />
1. Select an operator.<br />
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.<br />
To delete an operator:<br />
1. Select an operator.<br />
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.<br />
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the operator.
4.9.4 Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator<br />
When specifying a keyholder as an operator there are three methods of searching for the<br />
keyholder.<br />
Auto-Selection<br />
1. Start to type in the keyholder name and the system guesses the rest of the name.<br />
2. Accept the name or carry on typing.<br />
Dropdown Button<br />
• Select the icon to choose from a drop-down list.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 64<br />
Administration Software<br />
• The last option in the list is ... which displays the Advanced Keyholder Selection window.<br />
Advanced Search Button<br />
1. Select the icon and the Advanced<br />
Keyholder Selection window is<br />
displayed.<br />
2. Enter search criteria (e.g. last name).<br />
3. If searching for a key code, select the Key<br />
Code check box and card format. Then<br />
present the key to the administration<br />
reader or enter the key code.<br />
4. Select the Search button and all<br />
keyholders matching the search are listed.<br />
5. Select the required keyholder and the<br />
Select button.<br />
To perform a new search:<br />
1. Select the Reset button.<br />
2. Enter new search criteria.<br />
3. Select the Search button.<br />
To close the window:<br />
• Select the Close button.
4.10 Time & Mode Profiles<br />
4.10.1 Time & Mode Profile List View<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 65<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Time & Mode Profile List View displays a list of time and mode profiles. A time profile can<br />
be applied to a keyholder or door. A mode profile can be applied to an area, door or reader. For<br />
further information on the modes that can be applied, click area, door or reader.<br />
When a time profile is applied to a keyholder (or access group) it determines when a keyholder<br />
has access through a door. When a mode profile is applied to an area, door or reader, it<br />
determines the mode (e.g. area armed or disarmed, door open or closed). For further<br />
information on the modes that can be applied, click area, door or reader.<br />
A time profile simply specifies a series of active time periods, each of which can span any<br />
period with a week or a holiday. In addition to this a mode (door or reader) profile specifies a set<br />
of properties to be applied during each time period.<br />
A time/mode profile consists of one or more time periods that can span multiple days. A holiday<br />
profile can be assigned to a time/mode profile to limit access during holiday periods.<br />
See List View section.<br />
4.10.2 Time & Mode Profile Property Page<br />
4.10.2.1 Daily Time Profiles<br />
The Daily Time Profile Property Page is displayed on systems that include at least one<br />
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controller.<br />
Up to four different time profiles can be specified (e.g. profile 1 for morning access, profile 2 for<br />
evening access, profile 3 for Saturday access, profile 4 for Sunday access).<br />
Note<br />
This type of profile is not applicable to mode profiles.<br />
To display daily time profile information:<br />
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.<br />
2. Select a time profile in the List View.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the time profile (specified by data entry, e.g. At all Times,<br />
Office Hours, Early Morning, Evening Night, etc.).<br />
Description A description of the time profile (specified by data entry).<br />
Start Time The start time of the time profile (specified by data entry or increments).<br />
The Profile check box must be selected.<br />
End Time The end time of the time profile (specified by data entry or increments).<br />
Sunday to Saturday The days of the week the time profile applies to (specified by check<br />
boxes).<br />
No Holiday Profile An indication of whether a holiday profile is not used (selected by radio<br />
button). If selected, the time profile applies through any holidays.<br />
Use Holiday Profile An indication of whether the holiday profile is used. Only one holiday<br />
profile can be specified for 1100/2100/2200 systems. If selected, no
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 66<br />
Administration Software<br />
access is granted during the holiday periods defined by the holiday<br />
profile.<br />
To add/update/delete time profiles:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.10.2.2 Weekly Time Profiles<br />
The Weekly Time Profile Property Page is displayed on systems that do not use<br />
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.<br />
To display time profile information:<br />
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.<br />
2. Select a time profile in the List View.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Week tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the time profile (specified by data entry, e.g. At all Times,<br />
Office Hours, Early Morning, Evening Night, etc.).<br />
Description A description of the time profile (specified by data entry).<br />
Sunday to Saturday A graphical representation of the start and end times of access for each<br />
day of the week (specified by selecting an area in the bar and dragging<br />
(start of week may<br />
with the mouse button pressed down). A bar represents the start and<br />
have been changed<br />
end times for access and may cover more than one day and occur more<br />
by customisation)<br />
than once in a day (e.g. allowed access in the morning and evening but<br />
not during the day). The start and end times can be changed by<br />
selecting and dragging the left or right edge. The boxes at the bottom of<br />
the display show the day and time of the start and end of the selected<br />
time period and can be used to alter the specification or fine tune it.<br />
Notes<br />
1. The arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move between bars.<br />
2. Shift + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to resize the bars.<br />
3. Ctrl + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move the bars.<br />
To insert a bar:<br />
• Right click on a day and select New from the drop-down menu, press the Insert key on the<br />
keyboard or click inside the day at the required start point and, keeping the left mouse<br />
button pressed, drag the cursor to the required end time then release the mouse button.<br />
To cut/copy/paste a bar:<br />
1. Right click on a bar and select Cut or Copy from the drop-down menu.<br />
2. Right click on a day and select Paste from the drop-down menu.<br />
or<br />
• Press the Ctrl key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding the Ctrl key<br />
to copy the bar to a new day.<br />
• Press the Shift key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding the Shift<br />
key to move the bar to a new day.
To delete a bar:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 67<br />
Administration Software<br />
• Right click on a bar and select Delete from the drop-down menu, press the Delete key on<br />
the keyboard or select Edit > Delete Current Record on the main menu.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete time profiles:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.10.2.3 Mode Profiles<br />
To display a mode profile information:<br />
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module..<br />
2. Select a mode profile in the List View.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Week tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the mode profile (specified by data entry).<br />
Description A description of the mode profile (specified by data entry).<br />
Sunday to Saturday A graphical representation of the start and end times of the mode<br />
(determined by the Mode field) for each day of the week (specified by<br />
(start of week may<br />
selecting an area in the bar and dragging with the mouse button<br />
have been changed<br />
pressed down). A bar represents the start and end times for the mode<br />
by customisation)<br />
and may cover more than one day and occur more than once in a day<br />
(e.g. allowed access in the morning and evening but not during the day).<br />
The start and end times can be changed by selecting and dragging the<br />
left or right edge. The boxes at the bottom of the display show the day<br />
and time of the start and end of the selected time period and can be<br />
used to alter the specification or fine tune it.<br />
Access Options The options that are to be applied to the specified times during the time<br />
period. These options depend on the type of mode profile:<br />
Area Mode Profile<br />
Door Mode Profile<br />
Reader Mode Profile<br />
Notes<br />
1. The arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move between bars.<br />
2. Shift + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to resize the bars.<br />
3. Ctrl + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move the bars.<br />
To insert a bar:<br />
• Right click on a day and select New from the drop-down menu or press the Insert key on<br />
the keyboard.<br />
To cut/copy/paste a bar:<br />
1. Right click on a bar and select Cut or Copy from the drop-down menu.<br />
2. Right click on a day and select Paste from the drop-down menu.<br />
or<br />
• Press the Ctrl key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding the
Ctrl key to copy the bar to a new day.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 68<br />
Administration Software<br />
• Press the Shift key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding the<br />
Shift key to move the bar to a new day.<br />
To delete a bar:<br />
• Right click on a bar and select Delete from the drop-down menu, press the Delete key on<br />
the keyboard or select Edit > Delete Current Record on the main menu.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete mode profiles:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.10.2.4 Area Mode Profile Access Options<br />
Mode The area access mode (armed or disarmed) that is applied to the<br />
specified time periods (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Airlock Airlock can be applied to the area for the specified time periods<br />
(selected by checkbox).<br />
Anti-passback Anti-passback can be applied to the area for the specified time periods<br />
(selected by checkbox).<br />
4.10.2.4.1 Door Mode Profile Access Options<br />
Mode The door mode (open, first open, bolted or anti-passback) that is<br />
applied to the specified times (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
4.10.2.4.2 Reader Mode Profile Access Options<br />
Mode The reader access mode (PIN, token, PIN or token, or PIN and token)<br />
that is applied to the specified times (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Mode profiles do not apply to the legacy Stanley PIN Reader. The<br />
legacy Stanley PIN Reader is the only reader that can be used with<br />
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.<br />
Two Key Access If this checkbox is selected, two valid keys are required for access..<br />
4.10.2.5 Holiday Time Profile<br />
The Holiday Time Profile Property Page is displayed on systems that do not use<br />
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers. Holiday profiles can be assigned to a time/mode<br />
profile to allow/restrict access during holiday periods.<br />
Notes<br />
1. If a holiday profile is to be assigned to the time/mode profile, the holiday profile (see<br />
Holiday Profile Property Page section) must be defined first.<br />
2. If the start and end times for the holiday period (specified below) overlap the time profile,<br />
the holiday period overrides the time period . For example, if a time period allows<br />
access up to 20:00 but the holiday profile prevents access after 18:00, access will be<br />
prevented after 18:00 during the holiday period.
To display holiday time profile information:<br />
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.<br />
2. Select a time/mode profile in the List<br />
View.<br />
3. Select the Holiday tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 69<br />
or<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Holiday Profiles A list of holiday profiles that can be assigned to the time/mode profile<br />
(selected by check box).<br />
Holiday Profile The name of the selected holiday profile (automatically entered).<br />
Start and End Times A graphical representation of the start and end times of mode for<br />
each day of the holiday period(s) (specified by selecting an area in<br />
the bar and dragging with the mouse button pressed down). A bar<br />
represents the start and end times for access (e.g. allowed access in<br />
the morning and evening but not during the day). The start and end<br />
times can be changed by selecting and dragging the left or right<br />
edge. The boxes at the bottom of the display show the day and time<br />
of the start and end of the selected holiday period and can be used<br />
to alter the specification or fine tune it.<br />
Access Options 1 The access that is applied to the specified times during the holiday<br />
period. The access options depend on the type of mode profile:<br />
Area Mode Profile<br />
Door Mode Profile<br />
Reader Mode Profile<br />
1 mode profiles only
4.10.3 Add/Update/Delete a Time/Mode Profile<br />
• Select the Time & Mode Profile module.<br />
To add a time/mode profile:<br />
1. Select one of the following:<br />
New > Create New Simple Time Profile<br />
New > Create New Area Time Profile<br />
New > Create New Door Mode Profile<br />
New > Create New Reader Mode Profile<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 70<br />
Administration Software<br />
Select the icon (defaults to a new time profile) or the option arrow to select Create<br />
New Time Profile, Create New Door Mode Profile or Create New Reader Mode Profile.<br />
Select Edit > Create a New Record and select Create New Time Profile, Create New<br />
Door Mode Profile or Create New Reader Mode Profile.<br />
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and<br />
press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Add.<br />
To update a time/mode profile:<br />
1. Select a time/mode profile.<br />
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S or select the icon to save changes or Cancel to discard<br />
changes.<br />
To delete a time/mode profile:<br />
1. Select a time/mode profile.<br />
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D or select the icon.<br />
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the time/mode profile.
4.11 Holiday Profiles<br />
4.11.1 Holiday Profile List View<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 71<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Holiday Profile List View displays a list of holiday profiles but only one holiday profile is<br />
allowed if the system is using 1100/2100/2200 controllers. A holiday profile can be applied to a<br />
time profile and takes precedence over the time profile (e.g. if a keyholder has a time profile that<br />
allows access at any time, access is still prevented at times specified by the holiday profile).<br />
A holiday profile consists of one or more holiday periods that can span multiple days.<br />
See List View section.<br />
4.11.2 Holiday Profile Property Page<br />
The Holiday Profiles Property Page is used to define holiday profiles (e.g. start and end<br />
dates). A holiday profile can be applied to a time profile and will override it (prevent it from<br />
functioning) if the time profile occurs on any of the dates defined in the holiday profile.<br />
To display holiday profile information:<br />
1. Select the Holiday Profile module.<br />
2. Select a holiday profile in the List View.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
[ 1<br />
512 only systems]<br />
Name The name of the holiday profile (e.g. Standard, Personal).<br />
Description A description of the holiday profile (specified by data entry).<br />
Holiday Period Name The name of the holiday period (specified by data entry, e.g. Easter,<br />
Christmas, etc.).<br />
Start Date The start date of the holiday period (specified by data entry or dropdown<br />
calendar).<br />
Start Time 1 The start time of the holiday period (specified by data entry or by<br />
increments).<br />
End Date The end date of the holiday period (specified by data entry or dropdown<br />
calendar).<br />
End Time 1 The end time of the holiday period (specified by data entry or by<br />
increments).<br />
To create a holiday period:<br />
• Select Add Holiday and specify the holiday period name and dates as described in the<br />
above table. The holiday period must be in the future not the current date.<br />
To delete a holiday period:<br />
1. Select a holiday period from the Holiday Period Name list.<br />
2. Select Delete Holiday.<br />
To advance the holiday profile 1 year:<br />
1. Select Add+1yr and all the holiday periods are advanced 1 year.
2. Edit any dates that have changed from the previous year (e.g. Easter).<br />
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete holiday profiles:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.11.3 Add/Update/Delete a Holiday Profile<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 72<br />
Administration Software<br />
• Select the Holiday Profile module.<br />
To add a holiday profile:<br />
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.<br />
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Add.<br />
To update a holiday profile:<br />
1. Select a holiday profile.<br />
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.<br />
To delete a holiday profile:<br />
1. Select a holiday profile.<br />
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.<br />
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the holiday profile.
4.12 Areas<br />
4.12.1 Area List View<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 73<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Area List View and Property Page are only displayed in Access by Areas mode (see<br />
Access Type section).<br />
The Area List View displays a list of areas. An area is defined by the doors that allow entry into<br />
it and exit out of it.<br />
See List View section.<br />
To move an area to a different part of the tree:<br />
1. Ensure View > Tree View is selected.<br />
2. Drag and drop the area in to the new position.<br />
4.12.2 Area Property Page<br />
4.12.2.1 Area Details<br />
The Area Property Page is used to define or edit areas.<br />
To display area information:<br />
1. Select the Area module.<br />
2. Select an area in the List View.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the area (specified by data entry, e.g. Reception,<br />
Development, etc.)<br />
Areas names that contain only numbers are not recommended.<br />
Description A description of the area (specified by data entry).<br />
Parent Area The parent area this area belongs to in the hierarchical list of areas<br />
(selected from drop-down list).<br />
This area can be<br />
used in personal<br />
access in other<br />
Organisations 1<br />
An indication of whether the area can be accessed by keyholders from<br />
other organisational units (specified by checkbox).<br />
1<br />
Only if licensed for multiple organisational units.<br />
Door Access A list of associated doors (specified as described in the Access section<br />
of the Door module). A list of associated readers can be displayed by<br />
selecting next to a door.<br />
Comms Failure The lock action in the area if the communications should fail. The options<br />
Mode<br />
are fail safe, fail secure or fail full fail secure (selected by radio button).<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete areas:<br />
Click here.
4.12.2.2 Area Appearance<br />
To display appearance information:<br />
1. Select the Area module.<br />
2. Select an area in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Appearance tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 74<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Area Icons Small and large icons to be used in the area (selected using the<br />
Browse buttons to locate a graphic file). Default icons can be<br />
used by selecting the Use default icons check box.<br />
Area Colour The colour to be used on the alarm display board to identify which<br />
area an alarm is associated with (selected using the Choose<br />
button.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete areas:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.12.2.3 Area Alarm Management<br />
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the Channel<br />
Areas) or 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).<br />
To display alarm management information:<br />
1. Select the Area module.<br />
2. Select an area in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Alarm Management tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Arm Area Time Profile The time profile used to arm and disarm the area (selected from a<br />
drop-down list).<br />
Alarm Priority (1 to 99) The priority assigned to alarm (specified by data entry or<br />
increments). 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest priority.<br />
Sounder resets when<br />
area acknowledged<br />
Sounder resets when<br />
area reset<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete areas:<br />
Click here.<br />
If the check box is selected, the sounder for this area is reset<br />
when the area alarm is acknowledged.<br />
If the check box is selected, the sounder for this area is reset<br />
when the area alarm is reset.
4.12.2.4 Area Alarm Definitions<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 75<br />
Administration Software<br />
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the Channel<br />
Areas) or 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).<br />
To display alarm definition information:<br />
1. Select the Area module.<br />
2. Select an area in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Alarm Definitions tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Event Description A list of event descriptions associated with each alarm.<br />
Always an Alarm An indication of whether the event is always an alarm (specified<br />
by radio button).<br />
Only when Armed An indication of whether the event is only an alarm when the area<br />
is armed (specified by radio button).<br />
To select all Always An Alarm radio buttons:<br />
• Select the Always On button.<br />
To select all Only When Armed radio buttons:<br />
• Select the When Armed button.<br />
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete areas:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.12.2.5 Area Alarm Points<br />
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the Channel<br />
Areas) or 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).<br />
To display alarm points information:<br />
1. Select the Area module.<br />
2. Select an area in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Alarm Points tab.<br />
The following are then displayed:<br />
Alarm Points A name and description of alarm points assigned to the area<br />
(automatically entered).<br />
To assign alarm points to an area, see following sections:<br />
• Door Alarm Management
• Channel Alarm Management<br />
• Controller Alarm Management<br />
• Controller Inputs<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete areas:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.12.2.6 Area Outputs<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 76<br />
Administration Software<br />
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the Channel<br />
Areas) or 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).<br />
To display outputs information:<br />
1. Select the Area module.<br />
2. Select an area in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Outputs tab.<br />
The following are then displayed:<br />
Area Sounders The names and description of outputs that activate sounders<br />
assigned to the area (automatically entered).<br />
Alarm Sensors Resets The names and description of outputs that reset inputs assigned<br />
to the area (automatically entered).<br />
To assign outputs to an area, see following section:<br />
• Controller Outputs<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete areas:<br />
Click here.
4.12.2.7 Area Management<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 77<br />
Administration Software<br />
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the Channel<br />
Areas section).<br />
To specify anti-passback parameters:<br />
1. Select the Area module.<br />
2. Select an area in the List View.<br />
3. Select an Area Management tab.<br />
Note<br />
An anti-passback area mode profile<br />
must be specified in the Alarm<br />
Management tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Timed Forgive (mins) The timeout period when anti-passback violations are cancelled<br />
(specified by checkbox and by data entry or increments).<br />
Disallow anti-passback<br />
forgive<br />
An indication of whether an operator cannot override an antipassback<br />
violation in the area (specified by check box).<br />
Tailgate reset An indication of whether an anti-passback violation in an area is<br />
reset by presentation of the key into a different area, providing the<br />
key is valid for that area and is not within the violated area<br />
(specified by check box).<br />
To specify the area as an airlock:<br />
1. Select the Area module.<br />
2. Select an area in the List View.<br />
3. Select an Area Management tab.<br />
Note<br />
An airlock area mode profile must be<br />
specified in the Alarm Management<br />
tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Door The doors that determine the airlock (at least two must be<br />
selected by checkbox)<br />
No Entry The output that will be activated if entry through the door is<br />
prohibited (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Normal The output that will be activated while in normal condition, i.e.<br />
both doors locked and no key being presented (selected from a<br />
drop-down list).<br />
Enter The output that will be activated if entry through the door is<br />
allowed (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Note<br />
The outputs should be latched outputs with no maximum activation time or event-to<br />
action to turn them off. To specify outputs, see the Controller Outputs section.
4.12.2.8 Area <strong>Security</strong> Level<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 78<br />
Administration Software<br />
This tab is only displayed in Access by Areas and <strong>Security</strong> Level mode (see Access Type<br />
section).<br />
To display access information:<br />
4. Select the Area module.<br />
5. Select an area in the List View.<br />
6. Select the <strong>Security</strong> Level tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Default <strong>Security</strong> Level The security level required to access the area outside the time<br />
profile (specified by data entry or by increments).<br />
Timed <strong>Security</strong> Level The security level required to access the area during the time<br />
profile (specified by data entry or by increments).<br />
Time Profile The time profile allocated to the area (selected from a drop-down<br />
list).<br />
Note<br />
A security level of 0 prevents access to the area at any time by any key.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete areas:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.12.3 Add/Update/Delete an Area<br />
• Select the Area module.<br />
To add an area:<br />
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.<br />
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Add.<br />
To update an area:<br />
1. Select an area.<br />
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.<br />
To delete an area:<br />
1. Select an area.<br />
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.<br />
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the area.
4.13 Access Groups<br />
4.13.1 Access Group List View<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 79<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Access Group List View and Property Page are only displayed in Access by Access<br />
Groups mode (see Access Type section).<br />
The Access Group List View displays a list of access groups. An access group is a group of<br />
areas and may have a specific time profile associated with each group.<br />
They are applied to a keyholder (see the Keyholder Access Groups section) to restrict the<br />
movement of the keyholder to the areas contained in the access group at the times specified by<br />
the associated time profiles (see the Keyholder Personal Access section).<br />
See List View section.<br />
4.13.2 Access Group Property Page<br />
4.13.2.1 Access Group Details<br />
The Access Group Property Page is used to define access groups (e.g. the areas associated<br />
with each access group).<br />
To display access group information:<br />
1. Select the Access Group module.<br />
2. Select an access group in the List View.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
Note<br />
The number of access groups that can<br />
be defined depends on the software<br />
license and the hardware connected.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the access group name (e.g. Development Team, Night<br />
Guard, Visitor, etc.).<br />
Description A description of the access group (specified by data entry).<br />
This access group is<br />
available to other<br />
Organisations 1<br />
An indication of whether the access group can be used by keyholders<br />
from other organisational units (specified by checkbox).<br />
1<br />
Only if licensed for multiple organisational units.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete access group:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.13.2.2 Access Group Access<br />
To display time profiles information:<br />
1. Select the Access Group module.<br />
2. Select an access group in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Access tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 80<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
The Profile check box must be selected.<br />
Time Profile The time profile to apply to the selected areas. The time profile is<br />
selected from a drop-down list and the associated areas selected<br />
by check box.<br />
Areas A list of areas associated with the access group. The areas<br />
associated with the time profile are selected by check box.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete access group:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.13.2.3 Access Group Advanced<br />
To display advanced information:<br />
1. Select the Access Group module.<br />
2. Select an area in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Advanced tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Ignore bolted doors If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access<br />
group opens a door any locked/bolted door conditions are<br />
ignored.<br />
Ignore anti-passback If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access<br />
group opens a door any anti-passback conditions are ignored.<br />
Ignore dead bolted doors If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access<br />
group opens a door any deadbolt override/door bolted conditions<br />
are ignored.<br />
Ignore ‘Two Key Access’<br />
mode<br />
If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access<br />
group opens a door any two key access requirements are<br />
ignored.<br />
Disarm privilege If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access<br />
group opens a door the area is disarmed.<br />
Ignore airlocks If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access<br />
group opens a door any airlocks are ignored.<br />
The following conditions will only apply when access is not controlled by airlock, anti-passback,<br />
area usage limits, or two-key access:<br />
Allow passage mode If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access<br />
group presents the key twice within the Lock Release Time (LRT)<br />
the door is unlocked and remains unlocked until the key is<br />
presented twice again. This time must be > 3s.<br />
Passage mode can only be cancelled by presenting the key<br />
twice therefore a door opened using the passage mode facility<br />
will not be closed by a time or mode profile's end time.<br />
Allow first token unlock If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access<br />
group opens a door the door remains unlocked.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 81<br />
Administration Software<br />
To add/update/delete access group:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.13.3 Add/Update/Delete an Access Group<br />
The appropriate areas and time profiles must be created first.<br />
• Select the Access Group module.<br />
To add an access group:<br />
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.<br />
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Add.<br />
To update an access group<br />
1. Select an access group.<br />
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.<br />
To delete an access group:<br />
1. Select an access group.<br />
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.<br />
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the access group.
4.14 Hardware<br />
4.14.1 Hardware List View<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 82<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Hardware List View displays a list of channels and controllers. The Connected<br />
Controllers list can be expanded to display connected controllers, doors and lifts. The<br />
configuration can be set up before the actual hardware is in place (logical controllers). 500<br />
series controller connections can be 'probed' to locate the physical controllers.<br />
Click here for more information on logical and physical controllers<br />
To improve the configuration and installation process of an Administration Software system<br />
there is the concept of logical and physical controllers in the system.<br />
A logical controller enables the configuration of an Administration Software system without the<br />
need for any physical hardware and enables the areas, access groups, etc. to be configured<br />
offsite without having hardware present.<br />
A physical controller handles the physical connection between the communications engine and<br />
the controller hardware and these are created during the probe from the Hardware module.<br />
Once the physical controllers have been located, the logical controller configurations can be<br />
dropped onto the physical controllers to link the required configuration to the physical controller.<br />
Likewise should a physical controller need replacing due a hardware failure then the<br />
configuration can be simply moved to the new controller.<br />
If there is more than one channel defined:<br />
1. When a probe is requested, the Select<br />
Channels window is displayed.<br />
2. Select the channels to be probed. All<br />
channels can be selected using the Select<br />
All button. All channels can be deselected<br />
by selecting the Clear All button.<br />
3. Select the OK button to start the probe or<br />
the Cancel window to cancel the request.<br />
An example of how controllers can be<br />
physically connected is given in the Hardware<br />
Configuration section.<br />
As well as a tree view of channels and controllers, the following controller information can be<br />
displayed using the normal list view facilities to manipulate the columns (see the List View<br />
section).<br />
Name The name of the controller.<br />
Description The description of the controller.<br />
Type The type of controller (e.g. 512).<br />
#Doors The number of doors allowed for this type of controller.<br />
Base Door# The number of the first door on the controller based on its order on the<br />
channel.<br />
Loaded An indication that the controller has a valid database.<br />
Online An indication of whether controller is online (True) or offline (False).<br />
Comms OK An indication that the PC is communicating with the controller (True)<br />
or not (False).<br />
Loading An indication that the controller is being loaded with the database.<br />
Firmware Version The current firmware in the controller.
Serial Number The serial number of the controller.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 83<br />
Administration Software<br />
In addition to the normal list view facilities (see the List View section), the following facilities are<br />
also available:<br />
To contract an expanded tree view:<br />
• Select the icon.<br />
To copy or delete a channel:<br />
• Right click the channel in the tree view and select Copy or Delete.<br />
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:<br />
• Click here.<br />
To access 500 TCP/IP channel facilities:<br />
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.<br />
2. The following facilities are then available:<br />
• Reset the server password by selecting Reset Password. The password must also be<br />
reset at the 500 (see the Manage Controller Firmware section).<br />
• Download the channel database to all controllers on the channel by selecting<br />
Download channel database.<br />
• Synchronise all controller clocks on the channel by selecting Synchronise all<br />
controller clocks.<br />
• Manage controller firmware by selecting Firmware Download.<br />
To access direct channel facilities:<br />
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.<br />
2. The following facilities are then available:<br />
• Initialise the CNC by selecting Initialise CNC ( 1100/2100/2200 CNC channel only).<br />
• Download the channel database to all controllers on the channel by selecting Download<br />
channel database.<br />
• Abort a channel download by selecting Abort channel download ( 1100/2100/2200<br />
channel only).<br />
• Synchronise all controller clocks by selecting Synchronise all controller clocks.<br />
• Disconnect the channel by selecting Disconnect the channel.<br />
To access dialup channel facilities:<br />
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.<br />
2. The following facilities are then available:<br />
• Display the Dialup Connection window by selecting Dial Now, Show Call Progress or<br />
Hang Up.<br />
• Reset the password by selecting Reset Password. The password must also be reset at<br />
the controller (see the Modems section).<br />
• Download the channel database to all controllers on the channel by selecting Download<br />
channel database.<br />
• Synchronise all controller clocks by selecting Synchronise all controller clocks.<br />
To access offline channel facilities:<br />
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.<br />
2. The following facilities are then available:<br />
• Reset the password by selecting Reset Password. The password must also be reset at
the controller (see the Reset Password section).<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 84<br />
Administration Software<br />
• Download the channel database to a PC or PDA by selecting Download to PC or<br />
Download to PDA (see the Download to the Controllers using a PC and Download<br />
to the Controllers using a PDA sections).<br />
See also List View section.
4.14.2 Channel Property Page<br />
4.14.2.1 Channel Details<br />
The Channel Property Page is used to define channels . The configuration information is<br />
displayed on initial selection.<br />
To display channel details information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a channel in the List View.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 85<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the channel (specified by data entry).<br />
Channel Type The type of channel (selected from drop-down list).<br />
Protocol Type The type of protocol (selected from drop-down list).<br />
Computer Name The name of the computer in a multi-PC system (selected from dropdown<br />
list).<br />
Communications Port The number of the communications port on the PC (selected from<br />
1<br />
drop-down list).<br />
Note<br />
If a communications port is configured for a modem, it will not be<br />
displayed for selection even if the modem is not connected.<br />
500 URL 2 The Universal Resource Locator (i.e. http://address) of the server<br />
(specified by data entry or selecting the 500 Probe button).<br />
IP Address 3 The IP address of the 512IP or 2200IP connected to a Ethernet<br />
(specified by data entry or selecting the IP Address Probe button). It<br />
is recommended to use a static IP address specified as described in<br />
the Configure Device IP Addresses section.<br />
Online The channel can be taken online/offline (specified by check box).<br />
1 Direct channel only<br />
2 500 TCP/IP channel only<br />
3<br />
Direct TCP/IP channel only<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To perform channel tasks:<br />
• Select Tasks. The following options are then available:<br />
Reset Password - Resets the 500 or offline channel password ( 500 or offline channel<br />
only, see Reset Password section).<br />
Dial Now, Show Call Progress or Hang Up - Displays the Dialup Connection window<br />
to dialup a modem (dialup channel only, see the Modems section).<br />
Download channel database - Downloads to the selected channel.<br />
Abort download 1 - Aborts the download. Only applicable during a download.<br />
Synchronise controller time- Synchronises the time on all controllers with the PC.<br />
Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected server ( 500<br />
channel only, see the Manage Controller Firmware section).
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.<br />
To add/update/delete channels:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.14.2.2 Channel Areas<br />
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a 500 TCP/IP channel.<br />
To display areas information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a 500 TCP/IP channel in the List<br />
View.<br />
3. Select the Areas tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 86<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following are then displayed:<br />
Areas A list of areas that can be assigned to the 500 (selected by<br />
check boxes).<br />
Note<br />
The default area (i.e. Outside) cannot be assigned to a 500.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete channels:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.14.2.3 Channel 500<br />
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a 500 TCP/IP channel.<br />
To display 500 information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a 500 TCP/IP channel in the List<br />
View.<br />
3. Select the 500 tab.<br />
The following are then displayed but can not be modified:<br />
Loaded An indication that the server has a valid database.<br />
Loading An indication that the server is being downloaded.<br />
Board Identity The name allocated to the printed circuit board.<br />
Board Version The version number of the printed circuit board.<br />
Firmware Type The type of firmware in the server. Different types may<br />
provide different features.<br />
Firmware Version The version firmware that has been added.<br />
Board Support Package<br />
Version<br />
The version of WinCe build.
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To suppress/unsuppress asynchronous events:<br />
• Select/deselect the Suppress async events check box.<br />
To use unencrypted/encrypted communications:<br />
• Select/deselect the Use unencrypted communications check box.<br />
To add/update/delete channels:<br />
• Click here.<br />
To specify the override as a 2-state or 4-state input:<br />
• Select the Override is 2-state or Override is 4-state radio button.<br />
4.14.2.4 Channel Alarm Management<br />
To display alarm management information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a channel in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Alarm Management tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 87<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the server is to be<br />
armed (specified by drop-down list).<br />
If none is specified, the server cannot be armed.<br />
Omit Permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with this<br />
channel to be omitted from arming (specified by check box).<br />
Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with this<br />
channel are silent (specified by check box).<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete controllers:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.14.2.5 Channel Settings<br />
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a direct channel.<br />
To display settings information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a channel in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Settings tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Line Speed 1<br />
The baud rate of the channel (selected from drop-down list).<br />
1<br />
Direct and Dialup channels only
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 88<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following are displayed but cannot be modified:<br />
Timeout The time in milli-seconds before a communication attempt is<br />
cancelled because communication has not been established.<br />
Retry Count The number of communication attempts to try before<br />
abandoning the communication.<br />
Poll Interval The time in milli-seconds between polling for communications<br />
on the line.<br />
Polls in Slow Poll The number of polls in the poll interval after a communications<br />
failure.<br />
4.14.2.6 Channel Dialup<br />
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a dialup channel.<br />
To display dialup information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a dialup channel in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Dialup tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Phone Number The telephone number of the modem connected to the<br />
server/controller (specified by data entry).<br />
Connect Timeout (mins) The timeout in minutes to terminate the connection if there are<br />
no updates to the controller.<br />
Dialup Schedule If the check box is selected, the next dialup and dialup interval<br />
can be specified.<br />
Next schedule dialup at The date and time for the next dialup (specified by data entry or<br />
drop-down calendar and time). If the date specified is in the<br />
past, a dialup is performed when Update is selected and the<br />
next dialup calculated from the dialup interval.<br />
Dialup interval The time between successive dialups.<br />
Use any available modem Any available modem connected to the PC can be used by<br />
selecting the radio button.<br />
Use the following modems A list of modems connected to the PC. Modems to use can be<br />
specified by selecting the radio button and then the modem<br />
check box(es) from the list.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete channels:<br />
Click here.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 89<br />
Administration Software<br />
4.14.2.7 Channel Dialback<br />
Notes<br />
1. Dialback is only applicable to the controller the modem is connected to.<br />
2. For a 1100/2100/2200 dialup channel, a master controller must be configured before<br />
this tab is displayed.<br />
To display dialback information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a dialup channel in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Dialback tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Enable Dialback Dialback is enabled by selecting the radio button. If enabled, a<br />
dialback is initiated by events at the server/controller.<br />
Primary Modem The name of the primary modem connected to the PC (selected<br />
from a drop-down list). The modem must be configured, see the<br />
Modems section.<br />
Secondary Modem The name of the secondary modem connected to the PC. The<br />
secondary modem is used if the primary modem is unavailable<br />
(selected from a drop-down list).The modem must be<br />
configured, see the Modems section.<br />
Threshold (percent) The percentage events in the event buffer required to initiate a<br />
dialback to the PC (specified by data entry or by increments).<br />
PC Site Number 1 The PC site number (range 2 to 128) that is unique on each PC<br />
and identifies the channel’s site (selected from a drop-down<br />
list). Sites 2 to 33 can support up to 8 controllers (1 master and<br />
7 slaves). Sites 34 to 128 support 1 controller (each one a<br />
master).<br />
Note<br />
Site 1 is reserved for direct six wire bus channels.<br />
1<br />
1100/2100/2200 only.<br />
Dialback Events A list of events that will initiate a dialback (selected by check<br />
boxes).<br />
Keep Line Alive 2 If using a GSM modem on the controller with a 'Pay as You Go'<br />
SIM card that requires at least one outward call in a specified<br />
interval (e.g. every 180 days), the line can be kept alive by<br />
specifying a periodic dialback.<br />
Notes<br />
1. The system will make a call between 00:00 and 00:10 hours<br />
on the appropriate day and the call must be answered and<br />
kept connected for at least 1 minute.<br />
2. Periodically check your credit by phoning the customer<br />
services department of your service provider and top up if<br />
necessary.<br />
2<br />
512 only
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 90<br />
Administration Software<br />
Phone Number If this radio button is selected, the phone number for periodic<br />
dialback is specified by data entry.<br />
If your service provider allows, it is recommended to dial the<br />
speaking clock (123) and the call will automatically disconnect<br />
after 1 minute. If not dialling the speaking clock, ensure that<br />
each channel dials back on a different day or to a different<br />
number.<br />
Dialback to PC If this radio button is selected, periodic dialback is to a modem<br />
connected to the administration PC.<br />
Interval (in days) The interval for periodic dialback specified by data entry or<br />
increments. Consult your service provider to determine the call<br />
frequency required. Always ensure a call is made a few days<br />
before the expiry time to allow for service failures.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete channels:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.14.2.8 Channel Layout<br />
To display layout information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a channel in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Layout tab.<br />
The layout displays a list of controllers<br />
associated with the channel.<br />
To display a list of controllers associated with a server:<br />
A firmware download will reset the keep line alive interval<br />
counter to 0.<br />
• Select the sign next to the server.<br />
To display a list of doors associated with an access controller:<br />
• Select the sign next to the access controller.<br />
To display a list of readers associated with a door:<br />
• Select the sign next to the door.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete channels:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.14.2.9 Add/Update/Delete a Channel<br />
• Select the Hardware module.<br />
To add a channel:<br />
1. Select New and Create New Channel or Create New 500.<br />
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 91<br />
Administration Software<br />
press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Add.<br />
4. Wait for the communications to be established before probing for controllers.<br />
To update an channel:<br />
1. Select a channel.<br />
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.<br />
To delete an channel:<br />
1. Select an channel.<br />
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.<br />
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the channel.
4.14.3 Controller Property Page<br />
4.14.3.1 Controller Details<br />
The Controller Property Page is used to define door controllers (e.g. controller type and<br />
address). The controller details are displayed on initial selection.<br />
To display details information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a controller in the List View.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 92<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the controller.<br />
Description A description of the controller.<br />
4-State Override An indication of whether 4-state monitoring of the controller override is<br />
used (specified by checkbox).<br />
Type The type of controller (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Channel 1 The channel associated with the controller (automatically entered).<br />
500 2 The 500 associated with the controller (selected from a drop-down<br />
list). Select ' None' if the controller is not on a 500 channel.<br />
Lock Sharing (n and<br />
m) 3<br />
An indication of whether the lock is controlled by an in and out reader<br />
on door channels n and m (specified by check box). This should only<br />
be used with 1100/2100 Series Door Controllers or Wiegand in<br />
and out readers.<br />
Online 4 The controller can be taken online/offline (specified by check box).<br />
1 Only if the controller has been assigned to a channel.<br />
2 Only if the controller has not been assigned to a channel<br />
3 Not input/output controllers<br />
4<br />
Only for connected controllers<br />
To perform controller tasks:<br />
• Select Tasks.<br />
• The following options are available for an online controller:<br />
Configure controller or Unconfigure controller - Displays the Configure Controller or<br />
Unconfigure Controller window.<br />
Download controller data - Downloads to the selected controller.<br />
Abort download 1 - Aborts the download. Only applicable during a download.<br />
Synchronise controller time- Synchronises the time on all controllers with the PC.<br />
Set Modem Initialization String - Displays the Modem Initialization String window.<br />
Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller (see the<br />
Manage Controller Firmware section).<br />
Reset diagnostic code – Resets the diagnostic code.
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 93<br />
Administration Software<br />
• The following options are available for an offline controller:<br />
Identify Controller - Displays status information for the controller currently connected.<br />
Connect to Controller - Connects the controller to the PC – this option will be grayed<br />
out until the Identify Controller steps have been completed.<br />
Whilst connected a further set of options becomes available under the tasks menu:<br />
Download controller database - Downloads the database to the selected controller.<br />
Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller (see the<br />
Manage Controller Firmware section).<br />
Only download firmware to one controller at a time.<br />
Reset diagnostic code - Resets the diagnostic code (link to glossary).<br />
Disconnect from Controller – Disconnects the controller from the PC.<br />
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete controllers:<br />
• Click here.<br />
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:<br />
• Click here.<br />
4.14.3.2 Controller Information<br />
This tab is only displayed if the selected controller has been probed.<br />
To display controller information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a controller in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Controller tab.<br />
The following are then displayed but can not be modified:<br />
Serial Number The serial number of the controller.<br />
Firmware ID The firmware identity of the controller.<br />
Firmware Version The current firmware in the controller.<br />
Firmware Type The type of firmware in the controller. Different types may<br />
provide different features.<br />
Board Revision The revision number of the printed circuit board of the<br />
controller.<br />
Power Status The status of the controller's power supply.<br />
Battery Status The status of the controller's battery.<br />
Backup Battery Status The status of the controller's backup battery.<br />
Battery Level The charge on the controller's battery.<br />
Diagnostic Code The diagnostic code of the controller.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.
To add/update/delete controllers:<br />
Click here.<br />
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.14.3.3 Controller 2100/2200<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 94<br />
Administration Software<br />
This tab is only displayed if the selected controller is a 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controller.<br />
To display 1100/2100/2200 information:<br />
4. Select the Hardware module.<br />
5. Select a 1100/2100/2200 controller in the<br />
List View.<br />
6. Select the 2100/2200 tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
[ 1<br />
1100/2100/2200 - RS232 -SWB protocol only] [ 2<br />
2200s only]<br />
Master 1 An indication of whether the door controller is a master<br />
controller (specified by radio button).<br />
Slave 1 An indication of whether the door controller is a slave<br />
controller (specified by radio button).<br />
Slave Address The address of the slave controller is selected by data entry<br />
or increment.<br />
For 1100/2100/2200 - RS232 - SWB protocol, the address of<br />
the master controller is always 1 and is automatically<br />
allocated if the Master radio switch is selected,. The slave<br />
address range is 2 to 8.<br />
For 1100/2100/2200 - RS232 -SWB - CNC protocol, the<br />
CNC is the master controller. The slave address range is 1<br />
to 32.<br />
Master Override Input 2 An indication of whether a override condition on the master<br />
(e.g. fire alarm) unlocks all the doors on the slave controller<br />
(specified by check box).<br />
This option is only available for 2200 master and slave<br />
controllers. When it is selected, an override condition on the<br />
master controller causes the doors on the master and all<br />
configured slave controllers to unlock. The slave controllers<br />
must also have this option selected.<br />
This feature is not suitable for safety critical systems<br />
which should use a hard wiring solution by daisy chaining<br />
the controller override inputs together.<br />
Anti-passback n and m An indication of whether anti-passback is enabled on the<br />
door channels n and m (specified by check box).<br />
Also apply to exit An indication of whether the anti-passback also applies to<br />
the Exit readers of the door channels (specified by check<br />
box).<br />
Anti-passback timeout The timeout period (in minutes) when an anti-passback<br />
violation is cancelled (specified by data entry or by<br />
increments).
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete controllers:<br />
Click here.<br />
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:<br />
Click here.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 95<br />
Administration Software
4.14.3.4 Controller Doors<br />
This tab is only displayed if the selected controller is an access or door controller.<br />
To display doors information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a controller in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Doors tab.<br />
The Doors tab displays a list of doors<br />
associated with the controller.<br />
To display a list of readers associated with<br />
a door:<br />
• Select the sign next to the door.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete controllers:<br />
• Click here.<br />
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:<br />
• Click here.<br />
4.14.3.5 Controller Inputs<br />
To display input configuration information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a controller in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Inputs tab.<br />
4. If necessary, select the Input<br />
Configuration tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 96<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
List A list of inputs associated with the controller (automatically<br />
entered). An input can be defined by selecting a check box<br />
or check boxes.<br />
If a 1100/2100/2200 controller is selected, the list is a tree<br />
view that can be expanded to list the inputs on any Alarm<br />
Event Managers connected to the controller.<br />
Name of Input n The name of the selected input (specified by data entry).<br />
Description The description of the selected input (specified by data<br />
entry).<br />
Input Type 1<br />
The type of the selected input (specified by drop-down list).<br />
1<br />
500 Series Controller only<br />
2<br />
Note<br />
AEM input types must be set using the switch bank and<br />
jumper on the AEM.<br />
Disarm Time Profile 3 The time profile that disarms the input (specified by dropdown<br />
list).<br />
If specified, no alarms or events are generated during the<br />
time profile.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 97<br />
Administration Software<br />
Input Mode The mode of the selected input (specified by drop-down<br />
list). 4<br />
Pulse Count 1<br />
Pulse Count Time 1<br />
Debounce Time 1<br />
The number of triggers that need to occur before an alarm is<br />
generated for the selected input (specified by data entry or<br />
increments).<br />
The time in seconds that the pulse count operates for the<br />
selected input (specified by drop-down list).<br />
Count is reset when time expires and starts from last<br />
activation.<br />
The time in milliseconds that the selected input must be in a<br />
state before that state is registered (specified by drop-down<br />
list).<br />
Debounce times is important for proper use of pressure<br />
switches, strain gauges and other sensors that are “bouncy”.<br />
Debouncing is also important for resistance to ac induction<br />
on long cable runs. 5<br />
Do not set a time that will override the pulse count.<br />
Note<br />
When specifying a debounce time, the input signal<br />
must be in a stable state for at least 200mS after the<br />
end of the debounce time before it is recognised.<br />
Configured from Template A template of input conditions to aid specification (selected<br />
for a drop-down list). The template specifies the input<br />
configuration and alarm properties. 6<br />
1 500 Series Controllers only<br />
2 Input Types<br />
Type State 512 Event 1100/2100/2200 Series Event<br />
NO Open input normal sensor open<br />
Closed input active sensor closed<br />
NC Open input active sensor open<br />
Closed input normal sensor closed<br />
3 State NO Open input normal N/A<br />
Closed input active N/A<br />
Cut input open tamper N/A<br />
3 State NC Open input active N/A<br />
Closed input normal N/A<br />
Short input short tamper N/A<br />
4 State NO Open input normal sensor open<br />
Closed input active sensor closed<br />
Cut input open tamper circuit cut<br />
Short input short tamper circuit shorted<br />
4 State NC Closed input normal sensor closed<br />
Open input active sensor open<br />
Cut input open tamper circuit cut
Short input short tamper circuit shorted<br />
3 1100/2100/2200 Controllers only<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 98<br />
Administration Software<br />
4<br />
Input Modes<br />
24-Hour Alarm If the input enters an active or tamper alarm state, an alarm message will<br />
be displayed in the Alarm Viewer and Event Log. Input inactive events only appear in the Event<br />
Log.<br />
24-Hour Information If the input enters a tamper alarm state, an alarm message will be<br />
displayed in the Alarm Viewer and Event Log. Input active events and input inactive events only<br />
appear in the Event Log.<br />
Controlled Alarm If the input enters an active or tamper alarm state, an alarm message will<br />
be displayed in the Alarm Viewer only if the area is armed. Note that input tamper alarm<br />
messages also displayed in the Alarm Viewer when the area is not armed.<br />
Lift - An input that allows a lift button selection to be monitored.<br />
5 Examples<br />
Input Function Debounce Time/mS<br />
Request-to-exit 200<br />
Break-glass,<br />
DC Override,<br />
Alarm Zone<br />
500<br />
Door Contact, Latch Contact >1s<br />
6<br />
Input Templates<br />
Template Input Type Input Mode Pulse Count<br />
and Time<br />
24-Hour<br />
Visible Panic<br />
24-Hour<br />
Invisible<br />
Panic<br />
24-Hour<br />
Burglary<br />
24-Hour<br />
Information<br />
Controlled<br />
Interior<br />
Controlled<br />
Exterior<br />
4 State N0 24-Hour<br />
Alarm<br />
4 State N0 24-Hour<br />
Alarm<br />
4 State N0 24-Hour<br />
Alarm<br />
4 State N0 24-Hour<br />
Alarm<br />
4 State N0 Controlled<br />
Alarm<br />
4 State N0 Controlled<br />
Alarm<br />
Debounce<br />
Time<br />
200ms<br />
3; 5s 200ms<br />
Lift NO Lift 200ms<br />
To display alarm properties information:<br />
• Select the Alarm Properties tab on the<br />
Controller Inputs page.<br />
Alarm<br />
Properties<br />
200ms Silent Alarm<br />
200ms Silent alarm<br />
200ms Omit permitted<br />
3; 5s 200ms Omit permitted
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 99<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
List A list of inputs associated with the controller (automatically<br />
entered). A single input or several inputs can be specified<br />
by selected a check box or check boxes.<br />
Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the controller is to<br />
be armed (specified by drop-down list).<br />
If none is specified, the controller cannot be armed.<br />
Omit permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with<br />
this input can be omitted from arming (specified by check<br />
box).<br />
Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with this<br />
input are silent (specified by check box).<br />
Configured from Template A template of input conditions to aid specification (selected<br />
from a drop-down list). The template specifies the input<br />
configuration and alarm properties. 5<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete controllers:<br />
Click here.<br />
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.14.3.6 Controller Outputs<br />
To display output configuration information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a controller in the List View.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.<br />
4. If necessary, select the Output<br />
Configuration tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
List A list of outputs associated with the controller (automatically<br />
entered). An output can be specified by selected a check<br />
box or check boxes.<br />
If a 1100/2100/2200 controller is selected, the list is a tree<br />
view that can be expanded to list the outputs on the<br />
controller and on any Alarm Event Managers connected to<br />
the controller.<br />
Name of Output n The name of the selected output (specified by data entry).<br />
Description The description of the selected output (specified by data<br />
entry).<br />
Time Profile The time profile to apply to the output (specified by dropdown<br />
list).<br />
Output Type The type of the selected output (specified by drop-down list).<br />
1 Link to output types<br />
Momentary Time 2 The time that the selected output will be on (specified by<br />
drop-down list).
Delay Before Activation (secs)<br />
3<br />
Maximum Activation Time<br />
(min) 4<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 100<br />
2 Momentary outputs only<br />
Administration Software<br />
The time delay before the output activates; 0 means no<br />
delay (selected by check box and specified by drop-down list<br />
if the Delay Before Activation checkbox is selected).<br />
3 1100/2100/2200 only<br />
The time in minutes before the selected output will be<br />
automatically turned off; 0 means no maximum activation<br />
time (selected by check box and specified by drop-down list<br />
if the Maximum Activation Time checkbox is selected).<br />
4<br />
Latched outputs only<br />
Cycle Time (s) 5 The total time in seconds for the pulse to cycle on/off<br />
(specified by data entry or increments).<br />
5<br />
Pulsed outputs only<br />
Active (%) 5 The period of cycle the selected output is on as % of cycle<br />
time (specified by data entry or increments).<br />
4<br />
Pulsed outputs only<br />
Number of Pulses 5 The maximum number of pulses of the selected output<br />
(specified by data entry or increments if the Number of<br />
Pulses checkbox is selected).<br />
Configured from Template<br />
To display output details information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a controller in the List View.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.<br />
4. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
5 Pulsed outputs only<br />
A template of output conditions to aid specification (selected<br />
from a drop-down list). The template specifies the output<br />
configuration. 6<br />
6<br />
Link to output templates<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Relay Rating The relay rating on the relay on the selected controller<br />
(automatically entered).<br />
Assigned to Area The area associated with the output (selected from a dropdown<br />
list).<br />
Area Sounders If the radio button is selected, the output will activate a<br />
sounder for the specified area.<br />
Note<br />
Area sounder should not be used with a toggle output as the<br />
output is automatically reset when the alarm is<br />
acknowledged and/or restored (see the Area Alarm<br />
Management section).<br />
Alarm Sensors Reset If the radio button is selected, the output will reset an input<br />
that is in alarm, i.e. an Area Reset command from the Alarm<br />
Viewer will clear the alarm condition.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 101<br />
Administration Software<br />
Manual If the radio button is selected, the output is activated<br />
manually.<br />
Note<br />
The output cab be placed on an Alarm Map and then<br />
manually controlled from the Alarm Viewer.<br />
Local Area Alarm If the radio button is selected, the output is activated if the<br />
area is armed.<br />
To specify output activation information:<br />
This tab is only displayed for 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a controller in the List View.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.<br />
4. If necessary, select the Output<br />
Activation tab.<br />
5. Select the Add button to add an output<br />
activation condition.<br />
6. Repeat Step 5 for each output activation<br />
condition required (e.g. if the output is to<br />
be activated when an input active or door<br />
left open alarm is detected, two output<br />
activation conditions must be specified).<br />
7. If necessary, select an output activation<br />
condition and the Delete button to delete<br />
it.<br />
The following can be specified for each output activation condition:<br />
Name The name of the output condition (specified by data entry).<br />
When condition The event that will trigger the output activation (selected from<br />
a drop-down list).<br />
Note<br />
If PIN Reader Duress is selected, a maximum activation time<br />
for the relay output must be specified to switch off the output.<br />
PIN Reader Duress allows a keyholder access if the PIN+1<br />
is entered (e.g. 1235 is entered for 1234) but generates a<br />
silent alarm indicating that the keyholder is being threatened.<br />
The PIN+1 only affects only the last digit (e.g. the duress<br />
number for 6789 is 6780 not 6790).<br />
The duress facility is not implemented in PIN only<br />
mode.<br />
Source Name The name of the item that may generate the event (selected<br />
from a drop-down list).<br />
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete controllers:<br />
Click here.<br />
To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:<br />
Click here.
Output Types<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 102<br />
Administration Software<br />
Latched The output will stay on until turned off (e.g. by event to action) or the maximum<br />
activation time expires.<br />
Momentary The output will stay on until the momentary time expires.<br />
Toggle The output will toggle its state each time it is activated (i.e. if the output is on the next<br />
activation will switch it off, if the output is off the next activation will switch off).<br />
Pulsed The output will pulse until turned off (e.g. by event to action) or the number of pulses<br />
expires.<br />
Output Templates<br />
Template Output<br />
Type<br />
Internal<br />
Sounder<br />
Sensor<br />
Reset<br />
Momentary<br />
Time<br />
Cycle Time Active<br />
Pulsed 2s 50%<br />
Momentary 3s<br />
4.14.3.7 Controller Alarm Management<br />
To display alarm management information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a controller in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Alarm Management tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the server is to be<br />
armed (specified by drop-down list).<br />
If none is specified, the server cannot be armed.<br />
Omit Permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with this<br />
controller to be omitted from arming (specified by check<br />
box).<br />
Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with this<br />
controller are silent (specified by check box).<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete controllers:<br />
Click here.<br />
4.14.3.8 Add/Update/Delete a Controller<br />
• Select the Hardware module.<br />
To add a controller:<br />
1. Select New and Create New Controller or press Alt-NC.<br />
2. Enter the controller details and select each tab in turn to check the other information (select<br />
a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Add.<br />
4. Probe and configure the controller.
5. Download the database to the controller :<br />
• Select the Details tab.<br />
• Select the Tasks button.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 103<br />
Administration Software<br />
• Select Download controller database.<br />
To update a controller:<br />
1. Select a controller.<br />
2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.<br />
4. Download the new database to the controller :<br />
• Select the Details tab.<br />
• Select the Tasks button.<br />
• Select Download controller database.<br />
To delete a controller:<br />
1. Select an controller.<br />
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.<br />
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the controller.<br />
Note<br />
Deleting a controller deletes its associated doors.<br />
4.14.3.9 Probe/Configure/Unconfigure Controllers<br />
• Select the Hardware module.<br />
To probe the controller configuration:<br />
1. Ensure that the channels are correctly specified.<br />
2. Select Probe Channels icon or Controller > Probe Channels. If there is more than one<br />
channel, the Select Channels window is displayed. Select the channels to be probed and<br />
the OK button.<br />
The physical connections are probed and the software configured.<br />
The controller barcode allocation table provided with the controller and in the Reports tab<br />
should be used to aid configuration.<br />
To configure a controller to a channel:<br />
1. Drag and drop the selected controller on<br />
to one of the connected controllers<br />
indicated by the serial number.<br />
Alternatively, right click a controller serial<br />
number, select Configure Controller from<br />
the drop-down list, enter the controller<br />
name and select OK. The Configure<br />
Controller window is displayed.<br />
2. Select the option to download to the<br />
controller and OK. If this option is not<br />
selected, a download can be performed<br />
later by selecting the controller and Tasks<br />
(see the Controller Details section).<br />
To unconfigure a controller from a channel:<br />
• Right click the channel serial number and select Unconfigure Controller from the dropdown<br />
list.
4.14.3.10 Online Controller Tasks<br />
To perform controller tasks on a configured controller, see the Controller Details section.<br />
To perform controller tasks on a probed but unconfigured controller:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select an unconfigured controller and the<br />
Unconfigured Controller window is<br />
displayed.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 104<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following are then displayed but can not be modified:<br />
Serial Number The serial number of the controller.<br />
Firmware Version The current firmware in the controller.<br />
Firmware Type The type of firmware in the controller. Different types may<br />
provide different features.<br />
Board Revision The revision number of the printed circuit board of the<br />
controller.<br />
• Select Tasks. The following options are then available:<br />
Download controller data - Downloads to the selected controller.<br />
Synchronise controller time- Synchronises the time on all controllers with the PC.<br />
Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller (see the<br />
Manage Controller Firmware section).<br />
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.<br />
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.
4.14.4 Offline Channel and Controller Tasks<br />
4.14.4.1 Download Database to the Controllers using the PC<br />
A connected controller is automatically disconnected if an update is performed or a<br />
different module is displayed. Therefore the following procedure from Step 1 (or Step 9 if<br />
already identified and configured) is required after any updates.<br />
1. Physically connect an offline controller to<br />
the PC (this controller is then the gateway<br />
controller).<br />
2. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.<br />
3. Select the gateway controller.<br />
4. Select the Tasks button.<br />
5. Select the Identify Controller button and<br />
the Identify/Configure Controller window<br />
is displayed.<br />
6. Select the COM port the gateway<br />
controller is connected to and the Identify<br />
button and the window is populated with<br />
the controller details.<br />
7. Select the Configure button and the<br />
Configure Controller window is<br />
displayed.<br />
8. Select OK to configure the controller or<br />
Cancel to return to the Identify/Configure<br />
Controller window.<br />
9. Select the Tasks button and the Connect<br />
to Controller option and the Connect<br />
Controller window is displayed.<br />
10. Select the COM port the gateway<br />
controller is connected to.<br />
11. Select the Connect button and select OK<br />
on the Successfully Connected to<br />
controller window and the Controller<br />
Synchronisation Command window is<br />
displayed.<br />
12. When the event collection process is<br />
100% complete, select OK and the<br />
controller will be available for download.<br />
13. Select the Tasks button and the<br />
Download controller database option.<br />
14. When the download process is 100%<br />
complete, select OK and the controller<br />
can be physically disconnected from the<br />
PC.<br />
The controller can be left connected and<br />
any events will be displayed in the event<br />
log.<br />
15. Select the Tasks button and the<br />
Disconnect from controller option.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 105<br />
Administration Software
4.14.4.2 Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA<br />
1. Physically connect the PC to a PDA via an<br />
RS-232 channel.<br />
2. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.<br />
3. Select Hardware > Download offline<br />
channels and the Offline<br />
synchronization required window is<br />
displayed.<br />
4. Select the channel to download to and<br />
select Next.<br />
5. When the download process is 100%<br />
complete, select OK and the PDA can be<br />
physically disconnected.<br />
6. Physically connect the PDA to the an<br />
offline controller (this controller is then the<br />
gateway controller) and use the PDA<br />
facilities to download the database to the<br />
controllers.<br />
4.14.4.3 Upload Database from PDA to a PC<br />
1. Select the Hardware module in the Explorer bar.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 106<br />
Administration Software<br />
2. Physically connect the PDA to the PC via an RS-232 or USB port (using the cable provided<br />
with the PDA) and the upload will start automatically.
4.14.5 Lift Property Page<br />
4.14.5.1 Lift Details<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 107<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Lift Property Page is used to define lift readers. A lift reader is a multi-access reader that<br />
can be used to control access to one or more areas (e.g. floors or lockers). When used in a lift,<br />
a valid key would allow access to specific floors by enabling appropriate lift buttons. Each floor<br />
of the lift is configured as an area controlled by the same 500 as the controller the lift reader is<br />
connected to.<br />
To display details information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Expand the Connected Controllers list in<br />
the List View.<br />
3. Select a lift reader.<br />
4. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the lift (specified by data entry).<br />
500 The 500 controlling the lift (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Reader The name of the lift reader (selected from a drop-down list). Lift<br />
readers must be specified first, see the Add/Update/Delete a Lift<br />
Reader section). The reader activates the appropriate destinations<br />
outputs when a keyholder presents a key to the reader. Normally the<br />
destination outputs are connected to lift floor buttons that are enabled<br />
when a valid key is presented to the reader located inside the lift.<br />
Selection Time The time (in seconds) a lift button remains selectable (selected by<br />
data entry or increments).<br />
Extra Selection Time The extra time (in seconds) a lift button remains selectable if the<br />
keyholder requires extra door time (specified by data entry or by<br />
increments). The Requires Extra Door Time check box must be<br />
enabled for the keyholder (see the Keyholder Details section).<br />
To add/update/delete a lift reader:<br />
• Click here.<br />
4.14.5.2 Lift Destinations<br />
To display configuration information:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Expand the Connected Controllers list in<br />
the List View.<br />
3. Select a lift reader.<br />
4. If necessary, select the Destinations tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 108<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Area A list of areas (floors) each associated destination output (e.g.<br />
connected to a lift button) gives access to (added using the Add New<br />
button and selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Output A list of destination outputs used to activate each lift button (selected<br />
from a drop-down list).<br />
Input A list of inputs (optional) that allows a lift button selection to be<br />
monitored (selected from a drop-down list). This is necessary to use<br />
the area usage facility.<br />
Out of Hours Exit An indication of whether out of hours exit is allowed (selected by<br />
check box).<br />
To add an area (floor):<br />
• Select the Add New button.<br />
To add/update/delete a lift reader:<br />
• Click here.<br />
4.14.5.3 Lift Access<br />
This tab is accessed via the Door module. Door details, door configuration and door alarm<br />
management for door channels that have lift readers are defined in the same way as ordinary<br />
door channels.<br />
To display access information:<br />
1. Select the Door module.<br />
2. Select a door channel that has lift readers<br />
in the List View .<br />
3. If necessary, select the Access tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Reader Type The type of reader(s) connected to the lift (selected from a drop-down<br />
list).<br />
SIG A / SIG B One of the door channels can be used for door access. The lift access<br />
specified on the Lift Destinations tab.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To add/update/delete a lift reader:<br />
• Click here.
4.14.6 Add/Update/Delete a Lift Reader<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 109<br />
Administration Software<br />
The appropriate 500, controllers, areas (floors), time profiles, inputs and outputs must be<br />
created first. All the controllers providing readers, outputs and inputs must be connected to the<br />
same 500. All the areas must be assigned to the same 500 and cannot have anti-passback or<br />
airlock properties. Inputs can be assigned for monitoring and/or area usage.<br />
The readers, inputs and outputs associated with a lift are assigned by the lift reader<br />
configuration.<br />
To add a lift reader:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select New and Create New Lift.<br />
5. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and<br />
press F1 to obtain help).<br />
6. Select Add.<br />
To add lift inputs and outputs:<br />
1. Select a controller in the List View,<br />
2. Select the Inputs tab and specify each relevant input as a lift input (i.e. 2-state normally<br />
open).<br />
3. Select the Outputs tab and specify each relevant output as a lift output (i.e. Latched with<br />
no maximum activation time).<br />
4. Select the Update button.<br />
To update a lift reader:<br />
1. Select the Door module.<br />
2. Select a door channel with a lift reader.<br />
3. Select each tab in turn and enter/update appropriate information (select a property page<br />
field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
4. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.<br />
To delete a lift reader:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Expand the Connected Controllers list in the List View.<br />
3. Select a lift reader.<br />
4. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.<br />
5. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the lift reader.
4.15 Doors<br />
4.15.1 Door List View<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 110<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Door List View displays a list of doors. A door is used to access an area and is configured<br />
by defining the readers that allow/disallow access into that area (e.g. a door can be defined by<br />
an in and out reader).<br />
See List View section.<br />
4.15.2 Door Property Page<br />
4.15.2.1 Door Details<br />
The Door Property Page is used to define doors (e.g. lock behaviour and time profile). The<br />
door details are displayed on initial selection.<br />
To display details information:<br />
1. Select the Doors module.<br />
2. Select a door in the List View.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the door (specified by data entry).<br />
Description A description of the door (specified by data entry).<br />
Door Profile A time/mode profile that determines when the door is unlocked or<br />
when the door is in particular mode, e.g. anti-passback in operation<br />
(selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Door Status 1 The Use Count ( the number of access granted events since a Reset<br />
Use Count) and Door Mode (controlled by a time/mode profile or<br />
Tasks button).<br />
1<br />
512 only<br />
To perform door tasks:<br />
1. Select Tasks. The following options are then available. For Offline channels, these tasks<br />
are only available when connected to the controller:<br />
Secure Door – this will lock the door if the door is unlocked (e.g. on a time profile)<br />
Unlock Door –this will unlock the door indefinitely or for a specified time.<br />
Bolt Door – this has different functions for door types, click here for further information.<br />
(link to glossary)<br />
Normal Door Operation – this returns the door to normal operation (e.g. locked or<br />
unlocked on a time profile).<br />
Set Mode 1 – this applies a specified door mode profile.<br />
Unlock Once 1 – this unlocks the door for the lock release time.<br />
Issue Request to Exit - this unlocks the door for the lock release time.<br />
Reset Use Count 1 - this reset the use count to zero.<br />
1 512 only
2. If Unlock Door is selected, the Unlock<br />
Door window is displayed. Select the<br />
Unlock door indefinitely or Length of<br />
time to unlock door radio button and<br />
specify the length of time (max. 255<br />
minutes). Then select the OK button<br />
3. If Set Mode is selected, the Door Mode<br />
Settings window is displayed. The<br />
<strong>Security</strong> Mode displays the current mode<br />
and can be altered by selecting the<br />
required <strong>Security</strong> Mode from a dropdown<br />
list and the length of time it will be<br />
applied. For each direction, select the<br />
Access Mode and whether Two Card<br />
Access is required. Then select the OK<br />
button<br />
The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To update doors:<br />
Click here.<br />
Note<br />
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see<br />
Controller Details section).<br />
4.15.2.2 Door Access<br />
Two readers (in and out) can be attached to each door. Alternatively, one reader and one<br />
Request to Exit switch can be used.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 111<br />
Administration Software<br />
If the controller controls a lift reader, see the Lift Access section.<br />
If the controller controls a muster reader, see the Muster and Evacuation section.<br />
Note<br />
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers only allow one reader per door channel and all<br />
controllers only allow one Wiegand or Magstripe reader per door channel. Therefore, if<br />
using 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, Wiegand or Magstripe readers, lock<br />
sharing must be enabled for in and out readers (see Controller Details section).<br />
To display access information:<br />
1. Select the Door module.<br />
2. Select a door in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Access tab.<br />
The Access tab displays the door channel for the selected door. If a 1100/2100 door with lock sharing<br />
is selected, the two door channels associated with the door are displayed. The format of the display<br />
depends on the access type and reader type. If the reader type is defined as Wiegand, only one<br />
Wiegand reader per door channel can be defined.
The following can then be specified:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 112<br />
Administration Software<br />
[ 1 1100/2100/2200 only, 2 Access by Areas mode only; 3 Access by Doors mode only ;<br />
4 512 only<br />
Reader Type The type of reader(s) connected to the door (selected from a dropdown<br />
list).<br />
PIN Reader<br />
Connected 1<br />
An indication of whether a PIN reader is connected to the door.<br />
Area 2 The area the reader gives access to (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Notes<br />
1. If the door has an anti-passback door mode assigned, SIG A is the<br />
Entry reader.<br />
2. If the door also has lock sharing specified, door channel 1 is the<br />
Entry reader.<br />
Profile For 512, the reader mode profile to apply to the reader (selected from<br />
a drop-down list).<br />
For 1100/2100/2200, the time profile to apply to a PIN reader<br />
(selected from a drop-down list). If a time profile is selected, a PIN is<br />
not required during the time period only a valid token.<br />
Mode profiles do not apply to the legacy Stanley PIN Reader.<br />
The legacy Stanley PIN Reader is the only reader that can be used<br />
with 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.<br />
Allow Access 3 An indication of whether access is allowed through this door to valid<br />
keyholders (specified by radio button).<br />
Reader connected 2 An indication of whether a reader is connected to this SIG line<br />
(specified by radio button).<br />
No reader connected An indication of whether a Request to Exit switch is connected to this<br />
SIG line (specified by radio button).<br />
Out of hours access An indication of whether out of hours access is allowed (selected by<br />
check box).<br />
Tamper Mode 4 An indication of whether reader tamper is disabled or enabled on the<br />
door channel (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To update doors:<br />
Click here.<br />
Note<br />
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see<br />
Controller Details section).<br />
4.15.2.3 Door Configuration<br />
To display configuration information:<br />
1. Select the Door module.<br />
2. Select a door in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Configuration tab.
The following can then be specified:<br />
[ 1 512 only; 2 1100/2100/2200 only]<br />
3 EOL Door Inputs<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 113<br />
Administration Software<br />
Each door channel on the controller has an input (I/P), Request to Exit (RTE) and Door Contact<br />
(DC) connections that can be used to supervise detectors. Four different input states can be<br />
detected by fitting end-of-line resistors to the appropriate connector and 0V. These states are:
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 114<br />
Administration Software<br />
Input States<br />
State Description Meaning<br />
1 Switch open Reader tamper alarm<br />
2 Switch closed Reader tamper alarm cleared<br />
3 Short circuit Reader tamper line short<br />
4 Wire cut Reader line cut<br />
RTE States<br />
State Description Meaning<br />
1 Switch open Normal, no message<br />
2 Switch closed Request to exit<br />
3 Short circuit RTE line short<br />
4 Wire cut RTE line cut<br />
DC States<br />
State Description Meaning<br />
1 Switch open When door is locked will generate a door forced alarm<br />
2 Switch closed A door forced alarm has been generated then cleared<br />
3 Short circuit Door contact line short<br />
4 Wire cut Door contact line cut<br />
4 Door Configuration Modes<br />
Field Selection Meaning<br />
Door Normal Door contact, RTE mode.<br />
Modes<br />
RTE No Lock Lock not operated, PIR sensor.<br />
Emergency Override Free exit, lock operated, Emergency override.<br />
Auxiliary<br />
Input<br />
Modes<br />
(512 only)<br />
Auxiliary<br />
Output<br />
Mode<br />
(512 only)<br />
Emergency Override No<br />
Lock<br />
Free exit, no lock operated, Emergency override.<br />
Not used I/P on controller's door channel not used.<br />
Reader tamper I/P on the controller's door channel used for<br />
reader tamper on Wiegand or Magstripe readers.<br />
Bolt door I/P on the controller's door channel is used to bolt<br />
the door when the input is active (i.e. access is<br />
denied to all users except those with bolt door<br />
privileges).<br />
Note<br />
A door that is usually open due to a time profile<br />
will be bolted.<br />
Emergency override I/P on the controller's door channel is used to<br />
generate an emergency override and unlock the<br />
door.<br />
Latch contact I/P on the controller's door channel is used to<br />
detect lock latching.<br />
General input I/P on the controller's door channel is used for a<br />
special-to-project purpose.<br />
Not used The alarm output relay on the controller is not<br />
used.<br />
Door left open alarm 1 The output relay on the controller is activated if<br />
the door has been left open.<br />
Door forced alarm 1 The output relay on the controller is activated if<br />
the door has been forced open.<br />
Door forced/left open alarm 1 The output relay on the controller is activated if<br />
the door has been forced open or left open.
Administration Software<br />
Alarm shunt The output relay on the controller is activated for<br />
the door release time if a valid access is<br />
detected.<br />
Time Profile The output relay on the controller is only used<br />
during a specified time profile.<br />
General Output The alarm output relay on the controller is used<br />
for a special-to-project purpose.<br />
1<br />
Door monitoring must be enabled.<br />
Controller The name of the controller that the controls the door<br />
(automatically entered but can be changed via the Hardware<br />
module (see Controller Details section).<br />
Door Monitoring If the check box is selected, door monitoring is enabled. Door<br />
contacts must be fitted.<br />
Door Open Time The time (in seconds) the door is unlocked after a valid key has<br />
been presented to the reader (specified by data entry or by<br />
increments). Door contacts must be fitted.<br />
Logging Mode 1 The type of transactions that will be logged in the event log<br />
(selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Key presentation - access-authorised events logged when key<br />
presented.<br />
Door opened - access-authorised events logged when door<br />
opened after key presentation. If door not opened, user walked<br />
away event is generated. A door contact must be fitted and door<br />
monitoring set.<br />
Lock Release Time The time (in seconds) allowed for the door to be unlocked after a<br />
valid access (specified by data entry or by increments).<br />
Extra Door Time 1 The extra time (in seconds) allowed if the keyholder requires<br />
extra time to get through the door (specified by data entry or by<br />
increments). The Requires Extra Door Time check box must be<br />
enabled for the keyholder (see the Keyholder Details section).<br />
Enable Lock Toggle 1 An indication of whether the door remains unlocked after a valid<br />
key has been presented, or Request to Exit pressed, and only<br />
locked when the key is presented again, or Request to Exit<br />
pressed again (selected by check box).<br />
Anti-Passback Timeout 2 The timeout period (in minutes) when an anti-passback violation<br />
is cancelled (enabled by checkbox and specified by data entry or<br />
by increments).<br />
Note<br />
If Timed Passback is enabled, this timeout also specifies the<br />
duration of anti-passback.<br />
Timed Passback 2 An indication of whether the timeout period for an anti-passback<br />
violation is enabled (selected by check box).<br />
Notes<br />
1. Anti-passback is implemented on the Entry reader to an<br />
area for the duration of the Anti-Passback Timeout. This<br />
allows anti-passback to be assigned to a door with only<br />
one reader (e.g. a Request to Exit switch is used to exit<br />
the area).<br />
2. If anti-passback is in operation on more than one door into<br />
an area and Anti-Passback Timeout is set to different<br />
times on each door, the longest Anti-Passback Timeout<br />
timeout period will apply to all doors into the area.<br />
EOL Door Inputs<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 115<br />
1 An indication of whether the end-of-line inputs are used allowing<br />
4 i i fRTE dd ( l db h k
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 116<br />
Administration Software<br />
4-state monitoring of RTE and door contact (selected by check<br />
box). 3<br />
Failsafe 4 An indication of whether the lock is fail-safe (selected by check<br />
box). If the check box is not selected, the lock is fail-secure.<br />
Alarm inhibit 4 INHB/DR3 on the controller's door channel is used to inhibit the<br />
readers when the area is armed.<br />
Door Contact Mode/RTE The type of Door Contact/Request to Exit connection (selected<br />
Mode<br />
from the Mode drop-down list). 5<br />
Mode The type of door to reader connection (selected from a drop down<br />
list). 5<br />
1 512 only; 2 512 on direct channel only; 3 1100/2100/ 2200 only; 4 link to EOL Door Inputs ; 4 link<br />
to Door Configuration Modes<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To update doors:<br />
Click here.<br />
Note<br />
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see<br />
Controller Details section).<br />
4.15.2.4 Door Auxiliary IO<br />
This tab is not displayed for 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers. Auxiliary IO for<br />
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers is specified as described in the Controller Outputs<br />
section.<br />
To display Auxiliary IO information:<br />
1. Select the Door module.<br />
2. Select a door in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Auxiliary IO tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Auxiliary Input Mode The use of the auxiliary input (selected from a drop-down list). 1<br />
1<br />
Link to definitions<br />
Auxiliary Output Mode The use of the auxiliary output (selected from a drop-down list). 1<br />
Time Profile The use of the auxiliary output (selected from a drop-down list). 1<br />
Output Type The type of the selected output (specified by drop-down list). 1<br />
Momentary Time 2 The time that the selected output will be on (specified by dropdown<br />
list).<br />
Maximum Activation Time<br />
(min) 3<br />
3 Momentary outputs only<br />
The time in minutes before the selected output will be<br />
automatically turned off; 0 means no maximum activation time<br />
(selected by check box and specified by drop-down list if the<br />
Maximum Activation Time checkbox is selected).<br />
4 Latched outputs only<br />
Cycle Time (s) 4 The total time in seconds for the pulse to cycle on/off (specified<br />
by data entry or increments).
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 117<br />
Administration Software<br />
5<br />
Pulsed outputs only<br />
Active (%) 4 The period of cycle the selected output is on as % of cycle time<br />
(specified by data entry or increments).<br />
5<br />
Pulsed outputs only<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To update doors:<br />
Click here.<br />
Note<br />
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see<br />
Controller Details section).<br />
4.15.2.5 Door Alarm Management<br />
To display alarms information:<br />
1. Select the Door module.<br />
2. Select an area in the List View.<br />
3. Select the Alarms Management tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the door is to be armed<br />
(specified by drop-down list).<br />
If none is specified, the door cannot be armed.<br />
Omit Permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with this door<br />
to be omitted from arming (specified by check box).<br />
Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with this door are<br />
silent (specified by check box).<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To update doors:<br />
Click here.<br />
Note<br />
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see<br />
Controller Details section).
4.15.2.6 Door <strong>Security</strong> Level<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 118<br />
Administration Software<br />
This tab is only displayed in Access by Doors and <strong>Security</strong> Level mode (see Access Types<br />
sections).<br />
To display access information:<br />
1. Select the Door module.<br />
2. Select a door in the List View.<br />
3. Select the <strong>Security</strong> Level tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Default <strong>Security</strong> Level The security level required to open the door outside the time<br />
profile (specified by data entry or by increments).<br />
Timed <strong>Security</strong> Level The security level required to open the door during the time<br />
profile (specified by data entry or by increments).<br />
Time Profile The time profile allocated to the door (specified by a drop-down<br />
list).<br />
Note<br />
A security level of 0 prevents the door being opened at any time by any key.<br />
The buttons are described in the Property Page section.<br />
To update doors:<br />
Click here.<br />
Note<br />
To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (see<br />
Controller Details section).<br />
4.15.3 Add/Update/Delete a Door<br />
The appropriate areas, time profiles, controllers and channels must be created first.<br />
• Select the Door module.<br />
To add a door:<br />
Doors are automatically created when a new controller is created.<br />
To update a door<br />
1. Select a door.<br />
2. Select each tab in turn and enter/update appropriate information (select a property page<br />
field and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.<br />
To delete a door:<br />
• Doors can only be deleted by deleting its associated controller.
4.16 Video Source<br />
4.16.1 Video Source List View<br />
The Video Source List View displays a list of configured video sources. Selecting a video<br />
source will cause the Video Source Property Page to display its settings.<br />
4.16.2 Video Source Property Page<br />
4.16.2.1 Video Source Property Page<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 119<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Video Source Property Page is used to create and manage connections to video sources.<br />
A video source is a channel for getting live or recorded video into the system. It can be either a<br />
camera, such as a web cam, or IP camera or an input channel on a more complex device such<br />
as a digital source video recorder.<br />
To display the video source property page:<br />
1. Select the Video Sources module.<br />
2. Select a video source in the List View or<br />
select the New button.<br />
.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the video source (specified by data entry).<br />
Description A description of the video source (specified by data entry).<br />
Type The type of video source (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
To add / update / delete a video source:<br />
• Click here.<br />
To configure a video source:<br />
• Click here.<br />
4.16.2.2 Add/Update/Delete a Video Source<br />
• Select the Video Source module.<br />
To add a video source:<br />
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.<br />
2. Select the required camera type, click the Configure button and enter the camera address<br />
and press F1 to obtain help).<br />
3. Select Add.<br />
To update a video source:<br />
1. Select a video source.<br />
2. Modify the video source properties as required.<br />
3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or select Cancel to discard changes.<br />
To delete a video source:<br />
1. Select a video source, and click the Configure button.<br />
2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.<br />
3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the video source.
4.16.3 Video Sources - Configure<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 120<br />
Administration Software<br />
4.16.3.1 Configuring Video Sources<br />
Video sources are configured using the Configure Video Source window, which is displayed<br />
by clicking the Configure button on the Video Source Property Page.<br />
The Configure Video Source window has two tabs: General and Presets.<br />
4.16.3.2 Video Sources - General Tab<br />
This tab is used to<br />
1. Configure the connection to the video source that was created in the Video Source<br />
Property Page, and<br />
2. Display the feed from a configured camera.<br />
To display general video source information:<br />
1. Select the Video Sources module.<br />
2. Select a video source in the List View or<br />
select the New button.<br />
3. Select the Configure button.<br />
4. If necessary, select the General tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the video source (specified by data entry).<br />
Description The description of the video source (specified by data entry).<br />
Address The address of the video source (specified by data entry and<br />
selecting the Connect button).<br />
<strong>User</strong> (optional) The user name required by the source in order to connect to it<br />
(specified by data entry).<br />
Password (optional) The password required by the source in order to connect to it<br />
(specified by data entry).<br />
In addition to these options, other options may be displayed which are dependant upon the type<br />
of video source being configured.<br />
Web / LAN Image<br />
Interval (ms) The refresh rate of the video display (specified by increments or<br />
data entry).<br />
Axis IP Camera<br />
PTZ If this checkbox is selected, the video source being configured<br />
has Pan, Tilt and Zoom functionality and enables the View tab in<br />
the Preset tab.<br />
Intivid<br />
Camera The camera associated with the Intivid DVR unit (selected from a<br />
drop-down list after it has been connected).<br />
PTZ 1 If this checkbox is selected, the video source being configured<br />
has Pan, Tilt and Zoom functionality and enables the View tab in<br />
the Preset tab.<br />
1 Only if camera has PTZ facilities.<br />
To confirm the specification, select the OK button.
4.16.3.3 Video Sources - Presets Tab<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 121<br />
Administration Software<br />
The Presets tab is used to configure presets for a video source.<br />
The left hand side of the tab contains a list of presets, and the right hand side displays several<br />
tabs that are used to configure the selected preset. The tabs available are: General, View (if<br />
the source supports PTZ) and Alarm Points.<br />
The tabs General and Alarm Points are available for all three of the supported camera types<br />
(Axis IP Camera, Web / LAN Image and Intvid).<br />
In addition to the General and Alarm Points tabs, a third tab View , is only available for video<br />
sources that support PTZ.<br />
Presets<br />
A preset is an alarm point and / or view that is associated with the selected video source, and<br />
is used in the Alarm Viewer application. Three different types of preset exist:<br />
1. Alarm Point Preset - an association of an alarm point with a video source. Selecting this<br />
preset in the Alarm Viewer application will cause the associated video feed to be displayed<br />
in the Video Source area.<br />
2. Preset- an definition of a PTZ setting for a video source. Selecting this preset in the Alarm<br />
Viewer Application will cause the video source to move to the PTZ position specified. This<br />
option is only available for video sources that use PTZ.<br />
3. Alarm Point and View Preset - an association of an alarm point and PTZ settings with a<br />
video source. Selecting this preset in the Alarm Viewer Application will:<br />
a. cause the associated video feed to be displayed in the Video Source area.<br />
b. cause the video source to move to the PTZ position specified by that views<br />
Adding and Deleting Presets<br />
Presets are added and deleted using the Add and Delete buttons located on the right hand side<br />
of the Presets tab.<br />
4.16.3.4 Presets Tab - General Tab<br />
A description of the Presets facility is given in the Video Sources - Presets Tab section.<br />
To display general presets information:<br />
1. Select the Video Sources module.<br />
2. Select a video source in the List View or<br />
select the New button.<br />
3. Select the Configure button.<br />
4. Select the Presets tab.<br />
5. If necessary, select the General tab.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the preset (specified by data entry).<br />
Description The description of the preset (specified by data entry).<br />
To confirm the specification, select the OK button.
4.16.3.5 Presets Tab - View Tab<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 122<br />
Administration Software<br />
This tab is only available if the video source being configured supports PTZ.<br />
A description of the Presets facility is given in the Video Sources - Presets Tab section.<br />
This tab is used to specify the pan, tilt and zoom settings of the preset. The horizontal scroll<br />
bars control the camera's panning. The vertical scroll bar is used to control the camera's tilting,<br />
and the slide bar located next to the vertical toolbar is used to set the camera's zoom level.<br />
Better control can be achieved by clicking or dragging the mouse on the video window, and<br />
using the scroll wheel.<br />
To display view information:<br />
1. Select the Video Sources module.<br />
2. Select a video source in the List View or<br />
select the New button.<br />
3. Select the Configure button.<br />
4. Select the Presets tab.<br />
5. If necessary, select the View tab.<br />
The Set button is used to set the PTZ preset to the camera's current position.<br />
The Reset button is used to return the camera to the default PTZ settings.<br />
To confirm the specification, select the OK button.<br />
4.16.3.6 Presets Tab - Alarm Points<br />
A description of the Presets facility is given in the Video Sources - Presets Tab section.<br />
This tab is used to associate an alarm point with the selected preset.<br />
In the Alarm Viewer, clicking on an alarm point, that has been configured in this tab, will cause<br />
the CCTV region to display video from the associated source, and will PTZ to the preset<br />
specified in the View tab (if available).<br />
To display alarm points information:<br />
1. Select the Video Sources module.<br />
2. Select a video source in the List View or<br />
select the New button.<br />
3. Select the Configure button.<br />
4. Select the Presets tab.<br />
5. If necessary, select the Alarm Points tab.<br />
The Add button is used to add an alarm point selected from a drop-down list.<br />
The Delete button is used to delete the selected alarm point.<br />
To confirm the specification, select the OK button.
4.17 Reports<br />
4.17.1 Report Facilities<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 123<br />
Administration Software<br />
The reports available are described in the Reports Provided section. When displayed, the<br />
report will be populated with the current data in the Administration Software database.<br />
Custom reports can be created using Crystal Reports and added to the system as described in<br />
the Add a Custom Report section.<br />
When selecting a report that requests search parameters, it is strongly recommended<br />
to specify search criteria that will not generate an excessive amount of data that will<br />
take a long time to process.<br />
To display a report:<br />
1. Select the Reports tab in the Explorer<br />
bar.<br />
2. Select a report to display.<br />
3. If a Report Search Parameters window is<br />
displayed, see the Report Search<br />
Parameters section.<br />
The report can be moved about the screen by<br />
dragging and dropping the tab (see Tear Off<br />
Controls). If dragged away from the main<br />
window a Landscape button is available to<br />
change the orientation of the report.<br />
The report has the following toolbar:<br />
The Export Report icon exports the report to a different format which can<br />
then be saved, see Export a Report section.<br />
The Go to First Page icon displays first page of the report.<br />
The Go to Previous Page icon steps backwards through the report<br />
pages.<br />
The Go to Next Page icon steps forwards through the report pages.<br />
The Go to Last Page icon displays the last page of the report.<br />
The Page Number icon displays the current page and total number of<br />
pages.<br />
The Stop Loading icon is red when it can be used to stop a requested<br />
report from being displayed and is only applicable to large reports that are<br />
taking a long time to display.<br />
The Search icon searches for specified text in the report.<br />
The Size icon displays the report in the selected size.<br />
To display the report with different search criteria:<br />
1. Select the New Report button and the Report Search Parameters window is displayed.<br />
2. Select the search criteria and select Search.<br />
To set the page layout for printing a report:<br />
3. Select the Page Setup button and the Windows Page Setup window is displayed.<br />
4. Select the print options and select OK.<br />
To print a report:<br />
• Select the Print button.
To close the report:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 124<br />
Administration Software<br />
Select the button.<br />
4.17.2 Reports Provided<br />
The following reports are provided when applicable:<br />
Note<br />
Some reports require search parameters to be specified (see the Report Search<br />
Parameters section).<br />
17-Week Average - Detail A detailed break down of the time worked by a specified keyholder or<br />
keyholders over a specified 17-week period and determines<br />
compliance to the Working Time (Amendment) Regulations 2003<br />
Statutory Instrument 2003 No. 1684. A warning is displayed if the<br />
average working time exceeds 48 hours or if the working time in<br />
any week exceeds 60 hours.<br />
If entry and exit areas are not specified, the report will calculate the<br />
difference between the earliest and latest access events for each day.<br />
17-Week Average - A summary of the time worked by a specified keyholder or keyholders<br />
Summary<br />
over a specified 17-week period and determines compliance to the<br />
Working Time (Amendment) Regulations 2003 Statutory<br />
Instrument 2003 No. 1684. A warning is displayed if the 48 hour<br />
weekly average is exceeded.<br />
If entry and exit areas are not specified, the report will calculate the<br />
difference between the earliest and latest access events for each day.<br />
2100/2200 Controllers A list of specified door controllers and associated details, limits and<br />
doors.<br />
512 Controllers A list of specified access controllers and associated details, limits and<br />
doors.<br />
512 Controllers I/O A list of access controllers on specified 500 channel(s) and details of<br />
their inputs and outputs.<br />
520/ 530 Controllers A list of input and output controllers on specified 500 channel(s) and<br />
details of their inputs and outputs.<br />
Access Groups A list of specified access groups and associated time profiles and<br />
areas.<br />
Access History A list of areas (and associated doors) accessed by a specified<br />
keyholder between specified dates.<br />
Note<br />
This report indicates when a key has been presented to a door's<br />
reader but will not detect when a keyholder has tailgated into or out of<br />
an area or used a Request to Exit switch.<br />
Area Authorisation A list of specified areas and associated keyholders with their access<br />
groups and time profiles.<br />
Areas A list of specified areas and associated doors.<br />
Area Usage A list of specified keyholders and their area usage.<br />
Attendance A list of specified keyholders and times they entered and left an area or<br />
opened a door. The report will calculate the difference between the<br />
earliest and latest access events for each day.<br />
Note<br />
Categories A list of keyholder categories and associated area usage.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 125<br />
Administration Software<br />
Channels A list of all communication channels and associated details and<br />
settings.<br />
Channels (500) A list of specified 500 TCP/IP channels and associated details and<br />
settings.<br />
Controller Barcode A controller barcode table of probed controllers.<br />
Controllers A list of controllers and associated details.<br />
Dead Keys A list of keyholders who have not used their keys after a specified date.<br />
Door Controller Summary A list of all probed access controllers arranged by channel with<br />
associated channel protocol type and controller firmware version.<br />
Doors A list of all doors and associated details, configuration and access.<br />
Event Alarm History A list of alarms generated between specified dates.<br />
Events A list of the events for specified criteria.<br />
Excessive Key Use A list of keys that have been used more than a specified number of<br />
times within a specified period.<br />
Guest Authorisation A list of specified guests from other organisational units and<br />
associated authorisation.<br />
Holiday Profiles A list of all holiday profiles and associated holiday periods.<br />
Key Expiry A list of keyholders whose keys expired on or after a specified date.<br />
Keyholder Authorisation A list of specified keyholders and associated authorisation.<br />
Keyholder Images A list of keyholder photos and signatures that satisfy a specified search<br />
criteria.<br />
Keyholder List A list of keyholders that satisfy a specified search criteria.<br />
Keyholders A list of specified keyholders and associated details.<br />
Last Area Access A list of specified areas accessed by specified keyholders and the time<br />
accessed on the present date.<br />
Note<br />
This report indicates when a key has been presented to a door's<br />
reader but will not detect when a keyholder has tailgated into or<br />
out of an area or used a Request to Exit switch.<br />
Modems A list of modems attached to the PC and associated details.<br />
Operators A list of all operators and associated details.<br />
Offline Controllers A list of connected offline controllers associated details.<br />
Time & Mode Profiles A list of selected time and mode profiles and associated time periods.
4.17.3 Report Search Parameters<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 126<br />
Administration Software<br />
Some reports require search criteria to display relevant information (e.g. a list of keyholders).<br />
When such a report is selected the Report Search Parameters window is displayed (e.g. only<br />
list keyholders with the surname Smith).<br />
Notes<br />
1. When selecting a report that requests search parameters, it is strongly recommended to<br />
specify search criteria that will not generate an excessive amount of data that will take a<br />
long time to process.<br />
2. If organisational units are licensed, the organisational unit(s) to include in the search can be<br />
specified. The default is the current (active) organisational unit.<br />
3. To filter a report on a name that contains an apostrophe, e.g. O'Brian, enter two single<br />
quotes in place of the apostrophe in the report parameters (e.g .O''Brian).<br />
4. To get the best from the Attendance, 17 Week Average (Detailed), 17 Week Average<br />
(Summary) reports, follow this recommendation:<br />
• When specifying an entry and exit area, ensure that the keyholder accesses those<br />
areas at appropriate times to ensure accurate data is generated. If entry and exit<br />
areas are not specified, the report will calculate the difference between the earliest<br />
and latest area access times.<br />
To specify report search parameters:<br />
1. Select the Reports tab in the Explorer<br />
bar.<br />
2. Select a report to display.<br />
3. If report search parameters are required, a<br />
Report Search Parameters window is<br />
displayed.<br />
4. Select the search parameters:<br />
• Select a search parameter on the left<br />
and the button and the search<br />
parameters is added to the report<br />
search options.<br />
• Select the button and all search<br />
parameters are added to the report<br />
search options.<br />
• Select the button and all search<br />
parameters are removed from the report<br />
search options..<br />
• Select a search parameter on the right<br />
and the button and the search<br />
parameter is removed from the report<br />
search options.<br />
Note<br />
Mandatory search parameters cannot be<br />
removed.<br />
5. Select each search parameter in turn and<br />
specify the required search criteria.<br />
Wildcards * (used to substitute zero or<br />
more characters) and ? (used to substitute
a single character) can be used in data<br />
entry fields). Some fields cannot be<br />
changed.<br />
6. If organisational units are licensed, select<br />
the appropriate checkbox(es).<br />
7. If you want to create a report that always<br />
uses the same search criteria, select the<br />
Save button and enter a name for the<br />
report.<br />
8. Select the Search button.<br />
4.17.4 Export a Report<br />
To export a report:<br />
1. Display a report.<br />
2. Select the icon and the Export<br />
window is displayed.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 127<br />
Administration Software<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Format The format to export to (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Destination The destination of the export (selected from a drop-down list):<br />
Application Exports the report to a temp file in the specified format and then opens<br />
the file in the appropriate application.<br />
The file name of the report and the file name of the temp file cannot be<br />
the same.<br />
When exporting in Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) format, the<br />
'application' and the 'disk file' are the same, so the destination is not<br />
specified. The ODBC data source must be set up through ODBC<br />
Administrator in order for the program to export to a particular ODBC<br />
database format.<br />
When exporting in HTML format, a file path is requested.<br />
Disk File Saves the report to the specified disk or diskette.<br />
Lotus cc:Mail Exports the report to a mail message.<br />
(VIM)<br />
The character-separated values (separator and delimiter), mail number,<br />
date format and password are requested.<br />
Lotus<br />
Exports the report to the specified Lotus Domino server.<br />
Domino<br />
Version 3.0 or later of the Lotus Domino client is required and, at a<br />
minimum, depositor access. Export to a Lotus Domino OS/2 client is not<br />
possible.<br />
Microsoft Exports the report to a mail message.<br />
Mail (MAPI)<br />
The formatting options depending on the format selected are requested.<br />
Note<br />
The report can be exported to Crystal Reports.
4.17.5 Add a Report to Favourites<br />
To display the Favourite Reports<br />
Manager window:<br />
• Select Reports > Manage Favourites<br />
and the Favourite Reports Manager<br />
window is displayed.<br />
To add a report to favourites:<br />
1. Select the Add button and the Add<br />
Favourite Report window is displayed.<br />
2. Navigate to where the report to be<br />
added is located and double click on<br />
the required report.<br />
3. Select the Save button to confirm the<br />
selection or the Discard Changes<br />
button to cancel the selection.<br />
To delete a report from favourites:<br />
1. Select the report on the Favourite<br />
Reports Manager window.<br />
2. Select the Delete button<br />
3. Select the Save button to confirm the<br />
deletion or the Discard Changes<br />
button to cancel the deletion.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 128<br />
Administration Software
4.17.6 Add a Custom Report<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 129<br />
Administration Software<br />
A report can be created using Crystal Reports and can access the Administration Software<br />
database to display current data. The report files can be created and tested in the Custom<br />
folder or added using Reports > Custom Report Manager.<br />
For further information on creating reports, contact Technical Support.<br />
To display the Custom Report Manager<br />
window:<br />
• Select Reports > Custom Report<br />
and the Custom Report Manager<br />
window is displayed.<br />
A shared report or a private report can be<br />
added. A shared report can be displayed<br />
by other Windows users. A private report<br />
cannot be displayed by other Windows<br />
users but can be displayed by different<br />
operators if using the same Windows<br />
account.<br />
To add a custom report:<br />
1. If necessary, select the Installed<br />
Custom Report tab.<br />
2. Select the appropriate Add button and<br />
the Add Custom Report window is<br />
displayed.<br />
3. Navigate to where the report to be<br />
added is located and double click on<br />
the required report.<br />
4. Select the Close button.<br />
To delete a custom report:<br />
1. If necessary, select the Installed<br />
Custom Report tab.<br />
2. Select the report to be deleted.<br />
3. Select the Delete button.<br />
4. Select the Close button.<br />
To delete a saved report:<br />
1. If necessary, select the Saved Report<br />
Queue tab.<br />
2. Select the report to be deleted.<br />
3. Select the Delete button.<br />
4. Select the Close button.
5. Image Capture<br />
5.1 Image Capture Introduction<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 130<br />
Image Capture<br />
The Image Capture Utility is used to capture images from files, Video for Windows devices and<br />
TWAIN devices, for use in the Signature and Photo image fields in the Keyholder property page.<br />
To capture an image:<br />
1. Select the Keyholders module.<br />
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.<br />
• To capture a photo image,<br />
select the Details tab and<br />
Capture button at the bottom of<br />
the photo frame.<br />
• To capture a signature image<br />
select the Personal Details tab<br />
and Capture button at the<br />
bottom of the signature frame.<br />
Click here for information on using the Image Capture Utility.<br />
5.2 Using the Image Capture Utility<br />
Image Capture Utility is divided into two panes: Capture Source and Preview Window.<br />
Capture Source<br />
This area is used to select an image file, or an item of hardware to be used to capture an<br />
image.<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Preview Window<br />
This area displays the image that was captured / is being captured using the capture source,<br />
allowing the image to be cropped before placing it into the keyholder record.<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
5.3 Capture Source<br />
There are three tabs displayed in this area: File, TWAIN and Video.<br />
File<br />
This tab is used to select an image file from a local or network location.<br />
A Windows explorer style "tree" is displayed that is used to navigate to, and select an image file.<br />
The image files displayed in the tree are determined by the filter options set in the Show File<br />
Types pulldown list beneath the tree. By default this is set to all supported file types.<br />
The selected image file is displayed in the Preview Window.<br />
TWAIN<br />
This tab displays a list of TWAIN compatible image capture devices, for example, scanners and<br />
digital cameras. Before selecting an image capture device ensure that it is correctly configured<br />
(you may need to refer to its documentation).<br />
Select the required TWAIN device and click the Acquire Image button - the video or scan will be<br />
displayed in a separate window (follow the instructions for your imaging device to capture the<br />
desired image). The captured image will be displayed in the Preview Window.<br />
Video<br />
This tab displays a list of Video for Windows compatible devices, for example webcams. Before<br />
selecting a Video device ensure that it is correctly configured (you may need to refer to its
documentation).<br />
Select the required Video for Windows device to view its live image feed in the Preview<br />
Window.<br />
Click the Freeze button to freeze the display in the Preview Window.<br />
5.4 Preview Window<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 131<br />
Image Capture<br />
This area displays the image that was selected or captured from the Capture Source area, and<br />
is used to place the image into the keyholder’s Photo or Signature field.<br />
Images displayed in this area may first be cropped before being captured (placed) into the<br />
keyholder record.<br />
Importing an image uncropped<br />
By default the Show Crop Box option is enabled. Uncheck the Show Crop Box option and<br />
then click the Capture button.<br />
Note<br />
A cropped image will have the same aspect ratio as the area it will be displayed in and is<br />
displayed correctly. Uncropped images may not have the appropriate aspect ratio and<br />
may therefore be displayed incorrectly.<br />
Cropping an image<br />
Ensure the Show Crop Box option is checked. Cropping an image will preserve only the<br />
selected part of it - allowing background, unnecessary detail, etc to be removed.<br />
To define the crop area: click and drag anywhere on the captured image to insert a crop box. It<br />
may then be resized by clicking with primary mouse button on the boundary box and dragging.<br />
The shape of the crop box is determined from where the Image Capture Utility is launched from:<br />
Photo Crop box ratio 3:4<br />
Signature Crop box ration 3:1<br />
After an area has been selected click the Crop Button.<br />
Placing an image into a keyholder record<br />
When you have cropped the selected image, or removed the crop box, click the Capture Button<br />
at the bottom of the Preview Window area to insert it into the keyholder record.
6. ID Card Designer<br />
6.1 Card Designer Introduction<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 132<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
The ID Card Designer is used to design ID cards. Each design for an ID card is associated with<br />
a Keyholder Category - assigning a category will associate a specific card design to a<br />
keyholder.<br />
6.1.1 Displaying the Card Designer<br />
The ID Card Designer can launched from the following locations:<br />
1. Selecting ID-Card Designer in the Shortcut tab of the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Selecting the Tools > Card Designer.<br />
3. Selecting the ID-Card Designer icon located in the Categories tab of the<br />
Organisation Options window (Tools > Options)<br />
6.1.2 Interactive Map<br />
Click here to view an interactive map of the ID-Card Designer.<br />
6.2 Card Designer Menus<br />
6.2.1 Design Menu<br />
The Design menu contains the following items:<br />
Import - If the file to be imported was exported as a selected items, it will be imported onto the<br />
current card face. If the file to be imported was exported as a design, it will replace the current<br />
ID-Card design.<br />
Export - Two export options are displayed:<br />
1. Selection - Exports the selected items or the selected card face to a file in the<br />
specified location.<br />
2. Design - Exports the entire ID-Card to the specified location.<br />
Update - Updates (saves) the current ID-Card.<br />
Exit - Exits the Card Designer without saving changes.<br />
6.2.2 Edit Menu<br />
The Edit Menu contains the following items:<br />
Cut - cuts the item(s) selected on the Main View. This function is also available in the Toolbar.<br />
Copy - copies the item(s) selected on the Main View. This function is also available in the<br />
Toolbar.<br />
Paste - pastes the item(s) that has been cut or copied. This function is also available in the<br />
Toolbar.<br />
Delete - deletes the item(s) selected This function is also available in the Toolbar.<br />
Select All - selects all items on the card face.<br />
Card Face Properties - selecting this item will cause the Properties Region to display the<br />
properties of the selected card face.<br />
Align to Grid - click here.<br />
Bring to Front - click here.<br />
Send to Back - click here.<br />
Group Items - groups the selected items. Click here for more information.<br />
Ungroup Items - ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.
6.2.3 View Menu<br />
The menu contains the following items:<br />
Units - selects the scale used by the Ruler. The scale can also be changed by the Ruler<br />
Context Menu.<br />
1. None (turns of the ruler, e.g. for "not to scale diagrams")<br />
2. Inches,<br />
3. Millimetres,<br />
4. Centimetres,<br />
5. Metres.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 133<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
Zoom - Displays a submenu which allows you to change the card face zoom level.<br />
Small Icons - this item toggles between small and large icons for all items in the Toolbars and<br />
Add Items Region.<br />
6.2.4 Help Menu<br />
Selecting the item Contents displays the ID Card Designer helpfile.<br />
6.3 Toolbar, Browser and Status Bar<br />
6.3.1 Card Designer Toolbar<br />
The ID-Card designer toolbar contains the following items:<br />
Select<br />
Zoom<br />
Cut<br />
Copy<br />
Paste<br />
Delete<br />
Print<br />
Preview<br />
Zoom in<br />
Zoom out<br />
Show Full Card<br />
Face<br />
Bring to Front<br />
Enables select mode, which is used to select single or multiple items<br />
on the card face. Click here for more information.<br />
Allows the user to zoom in and zoom out on the card face view by<br />
using mouse buttons, keys or the mouse wheel. Click here for more<br />
information.<br />
Cut the selected item or card face. This function is also available in<br />
the Edit Menu.<br />
Copy the selected item or card face. This function is also available in<br />
the Edit Menu.<br />
Paste the item or card face which has been cut or copied. This<br />
function is also available in the Edit Menu.<br />
Delete the selected item or card face. This function is also available<br />
in the Edit Menu.<br />
This will print the current design using the specified printer.<br />
Click here for information about double sided printing.<br />
This will display a window containing a print preview of the current<br />
design using the specified printer.<br />
Increase the magnification of the card face. Click here for more<br />
information.<br />
Decrease the magnification of the card face. Click here for more<br />
information.<br />
Decrease the magnification so that the full card face will be<br />
displayed. This function is also available in the View Menu.<br />
Sends the selected item to the front of the card face - click here for<br />
more information.
Send to Back<br />
Group<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 134<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
Sends the selected item to the back of the card face - click here for<br />
more information.<br />
Groups the selected items. Click here for more information.<br />
Ungroup Items Ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.<br />
6.3.2 Card Designer Browser<br />
The Keyholder/Category Browser toolbar (pictured above) is used to:<br />
1. Select an ID-Card design to edit. which will be displayed in the Card Design region.<br />
2. Select a keyholder associated with the selected category, which causes the card<br />
design to display its data items populated with the keyholder's relevant details.<br />
6.3.3 Card Designer Status Bar<br />
The status bar, located at the bottom of the ID Card Designer application, displays the following<br />
information :<br />
1. X and Y coordinates of the mouse pointer, in the selected units for the card face.<br />
2. Item Size - the size in the specified units of the item selected on the card face.<br />
3. Mode Selected - the icon displayed here reflects the item that has been selected in the<br />
Add Area or Toolbar. For example it displays a picture of magnifying glass and the word<br />
"zoom" if zoom mode is selected, a shape icon and the word "shape" if shapes are<br />
selected etc.<br />
4. Operator Name - the name of the operator currently logged on.<br />
5. Zoom Level - the current level of magnification.<br />
6.4 Design Regions<br />
6.4.1 Add Items Region<br />
This region contains the following items that are used to and create designs on the selected<br />
card face.<br />
Shape<br />
Image<br />
Line<br />
Text<br />
Photo<br />
This is used to create shapes; the default is a square. Six other shapes are<br />
available by changing the items Shape Properties.<br />
Click here to view a shape item's properties.<br />
This is used to create frames which display the image file specified in its Image<br />
Property.<br />
Click here to view an image item's properties.<br />
This is used to create lines on the card face whose thickness is specified using the<br />
Line Width Property.<br />
Click here to view its properties.<br />
This is used to create a box which displays the text specified by its Text Properties.<br />
Click here to view its properties.<br />
This item displays a keyholder photo (if one is present) when a keyholder is<br />
selected in the Card Designer Browser.<br />
Click here to view its properties.
Signature<br />
Text Data<br />
6.4.1.1 Creating Designs<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 135<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
This item displays a keyholder signature (if one is present) when a keyholder is<br />
selected in the Card Designer Browser.<br />
Click here to view its properties.<br />
These items display keyholder text data (e.g. title, first name, last name, etc.) when<br />
a keyholder is selected in the Card Designer Browser.<br />
Click here to view their properties.<br />
Click here for more information on using any of the above items to create designs.<br />
6.4.1.2 ID-Card Design Overview<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
6.4.2 Card Face Region<br />
This region is where the ID-Card is designed by using items from the Add Items Region.<br />
6.4.2.1 Selecting Card Faces<br />
To select a card face click a tab, which are located above the current card face,<br />
6.4.2.2 Mouse Coordinates<br />
The coordinates of the mouse pointer on the page are displayed in the Status Bar.<br />
6.4.2.3 Card Face Properties<br />
The selected card face has the following properties:<br />
Name Snap Grid Colour<br />
Units Holopatch<br />
Background Colour Smart Card<br />
Background Image Magnetic Stripe<br />
Snap Grid<br />
Snap Grid Size<br />
6.4.2.4 Rulers<br />
Orientation<br />
The rulers on the selected card face can have their units changed from:<br />
1. the View Menu, or<br />
2. the Units Property of the Card Face Properties, or<br />
3. the rulers Context Menu.<br />
6.4.2.5 Viewing Card Face Properties<br />
To view the card face properties, select it by clicking on any empty area of the card face.<br />
6.4.2.6 Editing Card Face Properties<br />
Click here for more information.
6.4.3 Properties Region<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 136<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
This region displays the properties of the selected item on the selected page.<br />
The properties of all pages and items in the card design define their appearance and behaviour<br />
on the card face. Changes to the properties of items in the card design will be reflected on the<br />
card face.<br />
Click on an entry below to view more information on it.<br />
Shape Properties Multiple Item Properties<br />
Image Properties Group Properties<br />
Line Properties Card Face Properties<br />
Text Properties<br />
6.4.3.1 Editing Item Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
6.4.3.2 Update / Exit<br />
These buttons located beneath the properties area respectively update (save) the ID-Card<br />
design and exit the application.<br />
6.4.4 Buttons Region<br />
6.4.4.1 Assign a Name to this Item<br />
This button is no longer used. To change the name of an item, edit the Name Property.<br />
6.4.4.2 Update Button<br />
Clicking this button will save any changes to the current design.<br />
6.4.4.3 Exit Button<br />
This button will exit the ID-Card Designer. To ensure any changes have been made, click the<br />
Update button first.<br />
You will be warned if you have not saved your changes when this button is pressed.
6.5 Card Design Overview<br />
Drawing and placing items<br />
Click here for more information on creating designs.<br />
Editing ID-Card Designs<br />
Select Mode<br />
Select mode is used to edit ID-Card designs.<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Grouping and ungrouping<br />
Merge many items into one item, or<br />
breakdown a group into its constituent parts.<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Viewing Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Rulers and Measurement<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Docking Items<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 137<br />
Moving, resizing and deleting<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Context Menus<br />
Context Menus are used to edit items.<br />
Aligning items to the Grid<br />
Click here for information.<br />
Ordering items on a card face<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Properties<br />
Click here for more information on editing the properties of a card face or an item on the card<br />
face.<br />
Double Sided Printing<br />
Click here for more information on printing double sided ID-cards.<br />
6.5.1 Drawing and Placing Items<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
Items from the Add Items Region can be placed on the selected card face by using two different<br />
methods:<br />
1. Dragging and dropping.<br />
2. Selecting and clicking.<br />
6.5.1.1 Dragging and Dropping<br />
Any item from the Add Items Region can be placed on the selected card face by selecting the<br />
item and dragging it to the required location on the page while holding down the mouse button.<br />
6.5.1.2 Selecting and Clicking<br />
Items can be placed on the selected card face by selecting it, and then clicking on the required<br />
area to place it. How an item is placed is dependant upon whether it is a fixed shape item,<br />
variable shape item or line.<br />
After selecting an item the ID-Card designer stays in this mode until a different one is selected.<br />
The mode is indicated in the Status Bar.<br />
6.5.1.3 Fixed Shape Items<br />
Fixed shape items (indicated above) are items that when placed have a predetermined size,<br />
which cannot be changed. However, text items' sizes can be adjusted by using the Font<br />
Property.
To place a fixed shape item select it and click the required area on the card face to place it.<br />
6.5.1.4 Variable Shape Items<br />
Variable shape items (indicated above) are items whose rectangular size is determined by<br />
clicking twice on the card face: the first click specifies the location of the item’s top left corner<br />
the second click specifies the location of the bottom right corner.<br />
6.5.1.5 Line<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 138<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
Lines can be placed in two ways: individually or many.<br />
Individually: After selecting the line item, clicking on the card face defines the line's start point<br />
and releasing it defines its end point.<br />
Many: Selecting the card face will specify a line's start point and clicking a second time will<br />
specify its end point, causing that line to be drawn, clicking a third time will specify the end point<br />
of the next line - the end point of the previous line is start of the current line.<br />
To end drawing press the Esc key, click the Toolbar's select function or right click.<br />
6.5.2 Editing Properties<br />
The properties of all items and both ID-card faces in the ID-Card Designer define their<br />
appearance and behaviour. Changes to the properties of anything within the ID-Card Design<br />
Editor will be instantly reflected on the card face.<br />
Item Properties<br />
To edit an item's properties you must first be in Select Mode. Click the require item and the<br />
Properties Region will display that items properties allowing them to be edited.<br />
ID-Card Face Properties<br />
To view and edit the properties of the selected ID-Card face ensure that all items on the face<br />
are unselected.<br />
6.5.3 Grouping and Ungrouping<br />
When the Group command is applied to two or more selected objects, they will behave as if<br />
they are a single item - clicking on a constituent item will cause the group to be selected, and<br />
clicking and dragging a single item will cause all of them to move. Grouped items can be rotated<br />
or docked as a single item.<br />
Grouping Items<br />
To group items:<br />
1. Enter Select Mode,<br />
2. Select the required items.<br />
3. Select the group command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar or<br />
the Context Menu of the selected group.<br />
Ungrouping a Group<br />
To ungroup a group and return it to its constituent components, select it and then use the<br />
ungroup command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar or the Context<br />
Menu of the selected group.<br />
Resizing Groups<br />
Groups cannot be resized.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 139<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
6.5.4 Select Mode<br />
Before any item can be moved, resized, group / ungroups or deleted select mode must be<br />
entered. To enter select mode click the select item from the Toolbar or click the Esc key.<br />
Note: The current mode of the ID-Card Designer is displayed in the Status Bar.<br />
Selecting Items<br />
When an item or group is selected, its properties will be displayed in the Properties Region.<br />
To select multiple items either:<br />
1. Hold the Shift key down and select the required items.<br />
2. Selecting a blank part of the card face and then dragging will cause a selection area<br />
to appear. Any items that fall within the selection area will become selected.<br />
Note: Holding the Ctrl key and clicking a selected item will toggle its selection status.<br />
Select All<br />
To select all items on the card face, use the select all function by:<br />
1. Selecting the item Select All on the Edit Menu.<br />
2. Holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the key 'A'<br />
Properties<br />
Selecting any item on the card face will cause the Properties Region to display the properties of<br />
that item.<br />
6.5.5 Move, Resize and Delete<br />
This page describes how to perform the listed actions on single items, multiple items or<br />
groups, after entering Select Mode.<br />
1. Move,<br />
2. Resize, or<br />
3. Delete.<br />
Moving<br />
Select an item or group and drag to move it around. Release the button to stop moving it.<br />
Resizing<br />
After an item has been selected it is enclosed by a rectangular boundary box that<br />
has on each side and corner grab handles.<br />
Solid black grab handles (pictured left top) indicate that the item or group can be<br />
resized by click and drag. Outlined grab handles in each corner (pictured left<br />
middle) indicate the item cannot be resized by click and drag. The Text Properties<br />
can be used to allow resizing of text items.<br />
Items with their Aspect Lock Property set to on, have grab handles in the middle of<br />
each side (picture bottom left), and maintain their aspect ratio when resized.<br />
Notes:<br />
Groups cannot be resized.<br />
The size of a Text Item can only be adjusted with the Font Property.<br />
Deleting<br />
Items or groups can be deleted from the card face by:<br />
1. Selecting the delete option from its Context Menu, or<br />
2. Selecting it and pressing in the Delete key, or<br />
3. Selecting it, dragging it off the main view and releasing the button, or
4. Using the delete function button on the Toolbar, or the Edit Menu.<br />
6.5.6 Printing Double-Sided ID Cards on a Single-Sided ID Card Printer<br />
6.5.6.1 Printing from the ID Card Designer<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 140<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
The ID Card designer will only print cards appropriate to the selected category. All of the front<br />
sides for the category will be printed first, followed by all of the back sides.<br />
Printing Double-Sided Cards<br />
To print double-sided ID cards on a single-sided ID Card printer, you must follow the following<br />
instructions:<br />
1. Load the printer with a enough ID cards to complete the print job.<br />
2. Begin the printing process: select Design Menu > Print, select the required printer<br />
type, and click OK.<br />
3. The printing process will begin, shortly afterwards a dialogue will be displayed that will<br />
ask you if want to begin print the back sides of the ID Cards. You MUST wait until the<br />
printing process for the front sides has finished. Take all of the cards that have been<br />
printed, and reinsert them into the ID card printer hopper (consult the printer's operation<br />
instructions to determine the correct loading procedure).<br />
4. Click Ok to confirm the back side printing dialogue, and the ID card back side printing<br />
will begin.<br />
6.5.6.2 Batch Printing ID Cards from Keyholder Module<br />
Batch printing is where two or more ID cards are printed in one session. This is done by<br />
selecting more than one keyholder and then the File > Print ID Card menu. The keyholders<br />
selected for batch printing may belong to different categories which will require arranging for<br />
printing:<br />
1. All double-sided ID cards, in alphabetic order, all front sides for the category, followed<br />
by all back sides.<br />
2. All single-sided ID cards, in alphabetic order.<br />
For example: If many categories of card holder are printed, the front side of all the first<br />
category of double-sided ID cards will be printed first, followed by the back side of the first<br />
category; this will be repeated for all double-sided categories, and then will move onto single<br />
side categories.<br />
Printing Double-Sided Cards<br />
To print double-sided ID cards on a single-sided ID Card printer, you must follow the following<br />
instructions:<br />
1. Load the printer with a enough ID cards to complete the print job.<br />
2. Select the required keyholder entries from the keyholder list view, and to print them:<br />
o Select File Menu > Print ID Card, select the required printer type, and click<br />
OK, or<br />
o Right click any of the selected keyholder entries, select Print ID Card, select<br />
the required printer type, and select OK.<br />
3. Begin the printing process: select Design Menu > Print, select the required printer<br />
type, and click OK.<br />
4. The printing process will begin, shortly afterwards a while a dialogue will be displayed<br />
that will ask you if want to begin print the back sides of the ID Cards. You MUST wait<br />
until the printing process for the front sides has finished. Take all of the cards that have<br />
been printed, and reinsert them into the ID card printer hopper (consult the printer's<br />
operation instructions to determine the correct loading procedure).<br />
5. Click Ok to confirm the back side printing dialogue, and the ID card back side printing<br />
will begin.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 141<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
After the first category has been printed, the next category will begin printed and so on until the<br />
final category has been completed.<br />
6.6 Item Properties<br />
6.6.1 Multiple Item Properties<br />
When multiple items are selected on the page, the Properties Region displays a set of<br />
properties common to all of the selected items. When these common properties are edited, the<br />
respective property for each item will be changed as well.<br />
When two or more items are selected the following properties are displayed:<br />
The following properties are displayed when multiple items are selected:<br />
Aspect Lock Shadow<br />
Anchor Density<br />
Angle Shadow X<br />
Transparency Shadow Y<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
6.6.2 Group Item<br />
A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A group<br />
item has the following properties:<br />
X Transparency<br />
Y Shadow<br />
Anchor Density<br />
Angle Shadow Y<br />
Aspect Lock Shadow X<br />
Creating a Group<br />
To create a group, you must select two or more items on the card face, and use the group<br />
command on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.<br />
Ungrouping a Group<br />
To ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command on<br />
the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.<br />
Editing Group Properties<br />
Any changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of its<br />
constituent items.<br />
Click here for more information on editing groups.<br />
Resizing a Group<br />
Groups cannot be resized.<br />
6.6.3 Shape Item Properties<br />
A shape selected on a page has the following properties:<br />
Name Shape<br />
X Fill Colour<br />
Y Border Colour<br />
Width Line Width<br />
Height Shadow
Aspect Lock Density<br />
Anchor Shadow X<br />
Angle Shadow Y<br />
Transparency<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
6.6.4 Image Item / Photo Item / Signature Item Properties<br />
Image Item, Photo Item and Signature Item have the following common properties:<br />
Name Anchor<br />
Data Field (photo and Angle<br />
signature items only)<br />
Transparency<br />
X Image (image item only)<br />
Y Shadow<br />
Width Density<br />
Height Shadow X<br />
Aspect Lock Shadow Y<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
6.6.5 Line Item Properties<br />
A line has the following properties:<br />
Name Colour<br />
X Line Width<br />
Y Shadow<br />
Width Density<br />
Height Shadow X<br />
Anchor Shadow Y<br />
Transparency<br />
Aligning to Axis<br />
A line can be aligned to the closest axis (straightened) by selecting Align to Axis from the<br />
Context Menu.<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
6.6.6 Text Item / Text Data Item Properties<br />
A text item or text data item selected on a card face has the following properties:<br />
Name Colour<br />
X Multi-line<br />
Y Shadow<br />
Anchor Density<br />
Angle Shadow X<br />
Transparency Shadow Y<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 142<br />
ID Card Designer
Text (text item only) Data Field (text data item only)<br />
Font<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
6.7 Individual Properties<br />
6.7.1 Name Property<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 143<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
The name of the item. This is can be edited and is used if the item is to be linked to other items<br />
and is only required when configuring the Action Property.<br />
6.7.2 Units Properties<br />
Allows the user to select the units that the card face is displaying values in. Click here.<br />
6.7.3 Background Properties<br />
Background Colour<br />
Click the button on right hand side to display the colour picker that selects the card face's<br />
background colour.<br />
Background image<br />
Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you to<br />
navigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed on the map's selected side. The<br />
file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.<br />
Removing an Image<br />
To remove an image from a card face background or from an image item without deleting it<br />
(i.e. leaving an empty frame), select the image property and press the Delete key.<br />
6.7.4 Snap Properties<br />
Snap Grid<br />
There are three options associated with this property:<br />
1. No snap grid - no grid / dots displayed. This option disables the "snap to" when placing<br />
items.<br />
2. Snap only - items snap to an invisible grid. The size of the grid is determined by the<br />
Snap Grid Size property (see below).<br />
3. Grid - displays a grid on the card face which items snap to. The size of the grid is<br />
determined by the Snap Grid Size property (see below).<br />
Snap Grid Size<br />
Sets the scale used by the displayed grid / dots in the units specified in the Units Properties.<br />
Snap Grid Colour<br />
Sets the colour of the grid. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will display a<br />
colour selector.<br />
Preventing Snap to Grid<br />
To prevent items snapping to the grid when moving them, hold down the Shift key when moving<br />
them.<br />
6.7.5 Holopatch / Magstripe / Smart Card Properties<br />
6.7.5.1.1 Holopatch<br />
This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:<br />
1. Off - (default) Holopatch not displayed.<br />
2. Show - displays a square on the front of the Card Design, that indicates the location of
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 144<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
a standard holopatch. Items beneath it remain visible.<br />
3. Punch Out - displays a white square on the front of the Card Design. Items beneath it<br />
are not visible and not printed.<br />
6.7.5.1.2 Magstripe<br />
This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:<br />
1. Off - (default) Magstripe not displayed.<br />
2. Show - displays a rectangle on the Card Design back, indicating the location of a<br />
magstripe on a standard card. Items beneath it remain visible.<br />
3. Punch Out - displays a solid white rectangle on the Card Design back. Items beneath it<br />
are not visible and not printed.<br />
6.7.5.1.3 Smartcard<br />
This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:<br />
1. Off - (default) Smartcard not displayed.<br />
2. Show - displays a square on the Card Design front, indicating the location of a the chip<br />
on a standard smartcard. Items beneath it remain visible.<br />
3. Punch Out- displays a white square on the Card Design front. Items beneath it are not<br />
visible and not printed.<br />
6.7.6 Orientation<br />
This property toggles the orientation of the selected face between landscape and portrait.<br />
Note<br />
In order to change the orientation of a card, items on the card design that would no longer be<br />
visible are deleted after changing the orientation. If such a situation occurs, a prompt to confirm<br />
the orientation change will be displayed.<br />
6.7.7 X, Y, Width and Height Properties<br />
X<br />
The distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin from the left side of the card face. The<br />
origin location is set using the item's Anchor Property.<br />
Y<br />
The distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin the item from the top of the card face.<br />
The origin location is set using the item's Anchor Property.<br />
Width<br />
The width of the object, in the selected units.<br />
Height<br />
The height of the object, in the selected units.
6.7.8 Aspect Lock Property<br />
The Aspect Lock Property determines how a shape changes when it is resized using the<br />
mouse.<br />
6.7.9 Anchor and Angle Properties<br />
6.7.9.1 Anchor<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 145<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
Aspect Lock Off<br />
Object's right side is clicked and dragged.<br />
Note how the grab handles' position differ from the Aspect Lock On<br />
setting.<br />
Aspect Lock On - item retains aspect ratio when resized.<br />
Object's right side is clicked and dragged.<br />
Note how the grab handles' position differs from the Aspect Lock Off<br />
setting.<br />
The Anchor Property controls where, in the selected item, its origin is located. The origin is<br />
the point which it rotates around, and whose location determines the shape's X and Y<br />
coordinate properties.<br />
top left<br />
left<br />
bottom left<br />
top<br />
centre<br />
bottom<br />
top right<br />
right<br />
bottom right<br />
The image below shows examples of how the alignment properties affect an item when it is<br />
rotated 45 degrees clockwise . The red dot indicates the shape's origin.<br />
Horizontal alignment: centre<br />
Vertical alignment: centre<br />
Horizontal alignment: right<br />
Vertical alignment: bottom<br />
6.7.9.2 Angle<br />
Horizontal alignment: left<br />
Vertical alignment: centre<br />
Entering a value will rotate the shape around its origin. A positive value will rotate the item<br />
clockwise, and a negative anticlockwise.<br />
6.7.10 Transparency Property<br />
A value between 0 (opaque) and 100 (transparent).
6.7.11 Shape Properties<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 146<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
Shape<br />
The type of shape the selected item is: Circle, Square, Triangle, Star, Pentagon, Hexagon or<br />
Burst.<br />
Fill Colour<br />
Sets the colour of the selected item's fill. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display<br />
will display a colour selector.<br />
Border Colour<br />
Sets the colour of the selected item's border. Clicking on the button on the right side of the<br />
display will display a colour selector.<br />
6.7.12 Text Properties<br />
Text entered here will be displayed in the text item on the card face. The text item can be is<br />
resized using the Font property.<br />
6.7.12.1 Font<br />
This property controls the appearance of the text in the selected item.<br />
Clicking the button on the right hand side displays the font editor, that is used to select font<br />
type, font style, font size, font effect and scripting.<br />
6.7.12.2 Multi-line<br />
Setting this property to On will allow a text box to be resized, whilst setting it to Off prevents a<br />
text box from being resized.<br />
6.7.12.3 Colour<br />
Sets the colour of the text. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will display a<br />
colour selector.<br />
6.7.13 Line Properties<br />
6.7.13.1 Line Width<br />
This property sets the line thickness of the selected:<br />
1. Line (for lines), or<br />
2. Border (for shapes).<br />
The default value is 1. Setting this value to 0 will turn the line off.<br />
6.7.13.2 Colour<br />
Sets the colour of the line or border. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will<br />
display a colour selector.<br />
6.7.14 Image Property<br />
This property is used to choose the image file that an item displays.<br />
If the image property is specified as a background image for a card face, it will expand to fill<br />
the card face, and cannot be resized.<br />
If the image property is specified as an image for an image item, the image will be sized to fit<br />
the image frame, and may therefore appear distorted. An image can be adjusted by using the<br />
image items Context Menu.<br />
Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you to<br />
navigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed within the boundary box of the<br />
image item. The file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.
Removing an Image<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 147<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
To remove an image from a card face background or from an image item without deleting the<br />
frame (i.e. leaving an empty frame), select the image property and press the Delete key.<br />
6.7.15 Shadow Properties<br />
Shadow<br />
Toggles shadow visibility.<br />
Shadow X<br />
The horizontal offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed to the<br />
right of the item.<br />
Shadow Y<br />
The vertical offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed below<br />
the item.<br />
Shadow Density<br />
The darkness of the shadow: 0 will make it invisible, and a value of 100 makes it black. By<br />
default this value is set to 20 (light gray).<br />
6.7.16 Colour Properties<br />
Colour Property<br />
Sets the colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will<br />
display a colour selector.<br />
Fill Colour Property<br />
Sets the fill colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will<br />
display a colour selector.<br />
6.7.17 Data Field Property<br />
This property specifies the keyholder database field that will populate the text data item or<br />
photo/signature item when the ID-Card is printed or when a keyholder is selected from the<br />
Card Designer Browser.<br />
The text data fields available are:<br />
1. Date of Birth<br />
2. Email<br />
3. Employee Number<br />
4. First Name<br />
5. Home Telephone<br />
6. Initials<br />
7. Last name<br />
8. Mobile Telephone<br />
9. Start Time Date<br />
10. Title<br />
11. Work Telephone<br />
12. Keyholder Extra Information fields 1 - 5 - these values are only available if they are<br />
defined in the Keyholder Extra Information tab of the Organisation Options window,<br />
selected from the Tools Menu.<br />
The photo/signature fields available are:<br />
13. Photo
14. Signature<br />
6.8 Group Item Properties<br />
6.8.1 Group Item Properties<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 148<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A group<br />
item has the following properties:<br />
X Transparency<br />
Y Shadow<br />
Anchor Density<br />
Angle Shadow Y<br />
Aspect Lock Shadow X<br />
6.8.2 Creating a Group<br />
To create a group, you must select two or more items on the card face, and use the group<br />
command on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.<br />
6.8.3 Ungrouping a Group<br />
To ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command on<br />
the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.<br />
6.8.4 Editing Group Properties<br />
Any changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of its<br />
constituent items.<br />
Click here for more information on editing groups.<br />
6.8.5 Resizing a Group<br />
Groups cannot be resized.<br />
6.9 Context Menus<br />
Context menus are displayed by right clicking on an item.<br />
Click on a link below to view the Context Menu associated with an item.<br />
Single items - shapes, text group<br />
Single items - line ruler<br />
Single item - image card face<br />
multiple items<br />
6.9.1 Card Face<br />
The card face context menu contains the following items:<br />
1. Cut - cuts the selected page.<br />
2. Copy - copies the selected page.<br />
3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut page -only displayed when a page has been cut or<br />
copied.<br />
4. Delete - deletes the selected page.<br />
5. Zoom in - click here.<br />
6. Zoom out - click here.<br />
7. Show Full Card Face- this causes the card face view to fill the entire page.<br />
8. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).
6.9.2 Ruler<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 149<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
The Ruler context menu allows the units used by the selected card face to be set, and contains<br />
the following items:<br />
1. Inches,<br />
2. Millimetres,<br />
3. Centimetres,<br />
4. Metres,<br />
5. None - turns off the ruler.<br />
6.9.3 Multiple Items<br />
In addition to the Context Menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu contains:<br />
1. Group - click here.<br />
6.9.4 Group<br />
In addition to the common menu contents, a context menu for a group item contains:<br />
1. Ungroup - click here.<br />
2. Test action – not used<br />
6.9.5 Single Items<br />
Context menu contains the following items:<br />
1. Cut - cuts the selected item(s).<br />
2. Copy - copies the selected item(s).<br />
3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut item(s) -only displayed when a item has been copied.<br />
4. Delete - deletes the selected item(s).<br />
5. Test action – not used<br />
6. Set action – not used<br />
7. Align to Grid - click here.<br />
8. Bring to Front - click here.<br />
9. Send to Back - click here.<br />
10. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).<br />
6.9.6 Image<br />
In addition to the Context Menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for an image<br />
item with an image assigned contains:<br />
1. Restore Size - this function will restore the image to its original size if it has been<br />
stretched or shrunk.<br />
2. Restore Aspect - this function will restore the image to its correct aspect ratio at its<br />
current size.<br />
6.9.7 Line<br />
In addition to the Context Menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for a line<br />
contains:<br />
1. Align to axis - this will move the end point to make the line parallel with the horizontal<br />
or vertical axis.
6.10 Common Items<br />
6.10.1 Align to Grid<br />
Selecting this option, from the View Menu or a Context Menu, will cause the selected item or<br />
items to "jump" to the nearest grid line or dot.<br />
A snap grid can be ignored by holding down the Shift key when placing an item.<br />
The snap grid is controlled by the snap grid property of the selected card face.<br />
6.10.2 Docking Items<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 150<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
By docking one item with another, many fields can be "stuck" or docked together - this can be<br />
used to move around groups of items on the card designer.<br />
Items can be docked to the right side and bottom of an object's boundary box. The position on<br />
the side of the item at which the docking occurs is determined by the Anchor Property of the<br />
item that is being docked.<br />
The property set for the Vertical Alignment determines the position docking occurs on the left<br />
side and Horizontal Alignment determines the position of the bottom side.<br />
By default the vertical alignment is set to Top and horizontal alignment is set to Left.<br />
Examples of the alignment properties are shown below. The yellow square is the item being<br />
docked.<br />
Anchor Properties<br />
Left<br />
Centre<br />
Right<br />
6.10.2.1 Docking Items<br />
Top<br />
Centre<br />
Bottom<br />
To dock items:<br />
1. Moving an item so that its top left corner comes into contact with the top right hand<br />
corner of another item, or<br />
2. Moving an item so that the left side of its top comes into contact with the left side of the<br />
bottom of another item.<br />
A small box will appear when an item is successfully docked to another item. The position of<br />
that box indicates what that item's alignment property is set to. The alignment examples above<br />
show the position of the small confirmation box.<br />
6.10.2.2 Docking Text Data Items<br />
Text data items may change in size when previewed - items that are docked to a text data item<br />
will move as that text item changes in size,<br />
6.10.2.3 Moving Docked Items<br />
When an item is moved only the items that are docked to it will move with it, not those it is
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 151<br />
ID Card Designer<br />
docked to. When an item is clicked with the primary mouse button and moved its boundary box<br />
will turn blue.<br />
6.10.2.4 Undocking items<br />
For example, three items are docked together and the middle<br />
item is moved, it (and the item docked to it) will be move away<br />
from the item on the left.<br />
To undock a item select it, and either:<br />
1. Drag it away from the item it was docked to, or<br />
2. Right click it and select Undock from the displayed menu (this field is only displayed<br />
when the selected item is docked).<br />
The selected item will be undocked from the object that it was docked to.<br />
6.10.2.5 Preventing Docking<br />
To move an item next to another, but not have it dock hold down the Ctrl key whilst moving it.<br />
6.10.3 Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face<br />
Red circle moved from Back to<br />
front.<br />
6.10.4 Zoom Function<br />
An item's or group's order reflects its position in relation to other<br />
items e.g. whether it is on top of, or beneath another item.<br />
The order of an item can be changed using the Bring to Front<br />
and Send to Back commands from:<br />
1. the item's Context Menu.<br />
2. the Edit Menu when the item is selected.<br />
3. The Toolbar.<br />
The zoom function is used to increase or reduce the magnification of a card face - zooming in<br />
to see details and zooming out for a broader view, or,<br />
Magnification Level<br />
The level of magnification is displayed in the Status Bar.<br />
Zooming<br />
The card face view can be reduced or magnified by using:<br />
1. The Zoom function of the View Menu, or<br />
2. The Zoom in and Zoom out Toolbar buttons, or<br />
3. The Zoom Toolbar button, or<br />
4. Your mouse's mouse wheel (if present), or<br />
5. The numeric pad keys + (plus) and -(minus) keys.<br />
To view a full card face:<br />
1. Click the Show Full card face button on the Toolbar, or<br />
2. Select Show Full card face from the Zoom entry of the View Menu, or<br />
3. Select the Show Full card face item from the card face's Context Menu.
6.10.5 Measurement<br />
The units of measurement used by the ID-Card Designer are: Inches, Millimetres,<br />
Centimetres, and Metres.<br />
These options can be set from the Ruler Context Menu, the View Menu, or by the Card Face<br />
Property Units.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 152<br />
ID Card Designer
7. Alarm Map Designer<br />
7.1 Introduction<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 153<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
The Alarm Map Designer is used to design maps that are displayed in the Alarm Viewer.<br />
Alarm Point Tab, such as doors, areas and controller, that are placed on the map and used in<br />
the Alarm Viewer Application to visually indicate the occurrence of alarm.<br />
Typically, a map shows a schematic of the building(s) and has placed upon it alarm points in<br />
the same location as their real world counterparts. A map can consist of many pages, that can<br />
represent floors, different sites etc.<br />
7.1.1 Starting Alarm Map Designer<br />
To start this application:<br />
By clicking on the Alarm Map Design icon (pictured left) in the Administration<br />
Software's Toolbar, or selecting the entry Alarm Map Designer from the<br />
Administration Software's Tools Menu.<br />
7.1.2 Alarm Designer Interactive Map<br />
Click here to see an interactive map of the Alarm Map Designer<br />
7.1.3 Alarm Map Designer Layout<br />
To find out more about a specific part of the Alarm Map Designer select one of the following:<br />
Menu. Toolbar, General Tab, Page Tabs, Properties Region<br />
7.1.4 Making a Map<br />
Click here for more information on making maps.<br />
7.2 Alarm Map Designer Glossary<br />
Add Area<br />
The Add Area is located on the left hand side of the Alarm Map Designer application. It contains<br />
a list of drawing objects that are used to create shapes, text labels etc on the selected page,<br />
and a list of configured areas and their associated alarm inputs which can on the page to build a<br />
map, for example, of an area.<br />
Alarm Area<br />
An area that is associated with a 500 for alarm management. Alarm points, such as doors or<br />
inputs, can be associated with alarm areas.<br />
Alarm Point<br />
Alarm points are items capable of generating alarms, for example, doors, inputs or controllers.<br />
Child Area<br />
A child area is an area that is contained by a parent area.<br />
Context Menu<br />
A menu that is displayed when an item is clicked with the secondary mouse button.<br />
Parent Area<br />
A parent area is an area that contains one or more areas within it.<br />
Select<br />
To select an item you must first enter select mode, by clicking the select mode icon in the<br />
toolbar, or pressing the Select key.
7.3 Alarm Map Designer Interactive Map<br />
Click an area on the map below to find out more about it:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 154<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
For guidance on image formats and sizes of maps, click here.<br />
Guidance on Image Formats and Sizes<br />
Owing to the variety of ways in which alarm maps can be designed and used, it would be<br />
impractical to apply any limits on the format and size of images used. However, it is<br />
recommended that care be taken to use the minimum amount of bitmap images possible. The<br />
administration software imposes no limits on image formats and sizes but tries to limit the<br />
amount of bitmap data stored by resampling any images used.<br />
Ideally bitmap images should only be used to denote item locations such as those used for<br />
doors and alarm points. Wherever possible, use of vector graphics is preferable in order to<br />
obtain the best performance and scalable system since the data sizes required are minimal<br />
when compared to using raster graphics.<br />
An additional benefit of using vector graphics is that they will look good at almost any zoom<br />
factor due to their efficient image rescaling when using the zoom in and out feature.<br />
Where only bitmap images are available for a facility, the best approach is to import these into<br />
and then trace around the areas using the vector graphics features available in the Alarm Map<br />
Designer.
7.4 Alarm Map Designer Menus<br />
7.4.1 Design Menu<br />
The File menu contains the following items:<br />
New > New Page - Click here.<br />
Import - Click here.<br />
Export - Click here.<br />
Update - Updates (saves) the current map. The map is stored within the database.<br />
Exit- exits the Map Design Editor without saving changes.<br />
7.4.2 Edit Menu<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 155<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
The Edit Menu contains the following items:<br />
Cut - cuts the item(s) or page selected on the Main View. This function is also available in the<br />
Toolbar.<br />
Copy - copies the item(s) or page selected on the Main View. This function is also available in<br />
the Toolbar.<br />
Paste - pastes the item(s) or page that has been cut or copied. This function is also available in<br />
the Toolbar.<br />
Delete - deletes the item(s) or page selected This function is also available in the Toolbar.<br />
Select All - selects all items on the page.<br />
Page Properties - selecting this item will cause the Properties Region to display the properties<br />
of the selected page.<br />
Set Page Extent - makes the page slightly bigger than the objects that define its maximum<br />
width and height.<br />
Align to Grid - click here.<br />
Bring to Front - click here.<br />
Send to Back - here.<br />
Group Items - groups the selected items. Click here for more information.<br />
Ungroup Items - ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.<br />
7.4.3 View Menu<br />
The menu contains the following items:<br />
Units - selects the scale used by the Ruler. The scale can also be changed by the Ruler<br />
Context Menu.<br />
Zoom - Displays a submenu which allows you to change the page Zoom level.<br />
Animation - this item toggles the animation state of any animated icons or graphics on the<br />
page.<br />
Small Icons - this item toggles between small and large icon states any area and alarm items<br />
states present on the page.<br />
7.4.4 Help Menu<br />
Selecting the item Contents displays the Alarm Map Designer helpfile.
7.5 Alarm Map Designer Toolbar<br />
The toolbar contains the following items:<br />
Select<br />
Zoom<br />
Cut<br />
Copy<br />
Paste<br />
Delete<br />
Zoom in<br />
Zoom out<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 156<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
Enables select mode, which is used to select single or multiple items on the<br />
page. Click here for more information.<br />
Allows the user to zoom in and zoom out on the page view by using mouse<br />
buttons, keys or the mouse wheel. Click here for more information.<br />
Cut the selected item or page. This function is also available in the Edit<br />
Menu.<br />
Copy the selected item or page. This function is also available in the Edit<br />
Menu.<br />
Paste the item or page which has been cut or copied. This function is also<br />
available in the Edit Menu.<br />
Delete the selected item or page. This function is also available in the Edit<br />
Menu.<br />
Increase the magnification of the page. Click here for more information.<br />
Decrease the magnification of the page. Click here for more information.<br />
Decrease the magnification so that the full page will be displayed. This<br />
Show Full Page<br />
function is also available in the View Menu.<br />
Sends the selected item to the front of the page - click here for more<br />
Bring to Front<br />
information.<br />
Sends the selected item to the back of the page - click here for more<br />
Send to Back<br />
information.<br />
Group<br />
Groups the selected items. Click here for more information.<br />
Ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.<br />
Ungroup Items<br />
7.6 Add Items Region<br />
7.6.1 General Tab<br />
This tab contains six items that are used to draw and create maps on the selected page.<br />
Shape Item<br />
Image Item<br />
Line Item<br />
Text Item<br />
View Item<br />
This is used to create shapes on the page - shapes supported are: circle,<br />
square, triangle, star, pentagon, hexagon or a burst. When drawing shapes<br />
a circle is drawn by default and can be changed using it's Shape Properties.<br />
Click here to view a shape item's properties.<br />
This is used to create frames on the page which display the image file<br />
specified in its Image Property.<br />
Click here to view an image item's properties.<br />
This is used to create lines on the page whose thickness is specified<br />
Click here to view its properties.<br />
This is used to create a box on the page that displays the text specified by<br />
its Text Properties.<br />
Click here to view its properties.<br />
A view item defines a rectangular region on the map, that once configured,<br />
will be displayed in the page view when the item associated with it is double<br />
li k d th T t A ti f ti i d
Button Item<br />
clicked, or the Test Action function is used.<br />
Click here to view its properties.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 157<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
A button is used to link to another item or page in the Alarm Map Designer.<br />
Clicking this item after its action property has been configured will cause the<br />
item to which is linked to be displayed.<br />
Click here to view its properties.<br />
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.<br />
7.6.2 Areas Tab<br />
The Areas tab contains alarm areas that have been configured In the administration software.<br />
Each area can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location and<br />
status of the area in the Alarm Viewer.<br />
Alarm Areas<br />
An alarm area is used to signal that at least one alarm point in the<br />
area has not been cleared (i.e. not been restored and/or<br />
acknowledged). Click here for more information.<br />
Click here to view an alarm area properties.<br />
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.<br />
7.6.3 Inputs Tab<br />
The Inputs tab contains inputs that have been configured In the administration software.<br />
The inputs can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:<br />
The default is inputs in all areas.<br />
Each input can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location and<br />
status of the input in the Alarm Viewer.<br />
An input is an alarm point used to signal the<br />
occurrence of an alarm. Click here for more<br />
Inputs information.<br />
Click here to view alarm point properties.<br />
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.<br />
7.6.4 Outputs Tab<br />
The Outputs tab contains outputs that have been configured In the administration software.<br />
The outputs can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:<br />
The default is outputs in all areas.<br />
Each output can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location and<br />
status of the output in the Alarm Viewer.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 158<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
Outputs<br />
An output is a relay used to activate a sounder or reset an alarm<br />
sensor. Alternatively, an output can also be configured to be set<br />
manually or when an area is armed. Click here for more information.<br />
Click here to view output properties.<br />
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.<br />
7.6.5 CCTV Tab<br />
This tab is only displayed if a video source has been defined.<br />
This CCTV tab contains a list of configured video sources, which are used to represent<br />
cameras, or display the feed from a camera on the selected page.<br />
Video<br />
Sources<br />
Once it is placed upon the page this item has two modes of behaviour<br />
that depend upon its Display Mode property.<br />
Click here to view an video source properties.<br />
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.<br />
7.6.6 Alarm Points Tab<br />
The Alarm Points tab contains alarm items that have been configured in administration<br />
software. Alarm points are configured by specifying an alarm area in the Alarm Management<br />
tab of servers, controllers, and doors.<br />
The alarm points can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:<br />
The default is alarm points in all areas.<br />
Each alarm point can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location<br />
and status of the alarm item in the Alarm Viewer.<br />
Servers<br />
Controllers A server, controller, or door is an alarm point used to signal the<br />
occurrence of an alarm. Click here for more information.<br />
Click here to view alarm point properties.<br />
Doors<br />
Click here for further information on the Add Items region.<br />
7.6.7 Further information on the Add Items Region<br />
7.6.7.1 Changing Add Items Views<br />
The Add Items region (except for the General and Areas tabs) can be filtered by selecting an<br />
area from a drop-down list in the Add Items box.<br />
In addition, right clicking on the region give the following options:<br />
Show all iems - shows all items (not applicable to General tab).<br />
Show items not on current page - shows only the items not on the current page (not<br />
applicable to General tab)..<br />
Large icons – toggles between large and small icons.
7.6.7.2 Drawing and Creating Maps<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 159<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
Click here for more information on using any of the above items to draw and create maps with.<br />
7.6.7.3 Map Design Overview<br />
Click here.<br />
7.7 Design Editor Region<br />
7.7.1 Design Editor Region Introduction<br />
7.7.1.1 Adding / Deleting Map Pages<br />
Click here for more information<br />
7.7.1.2 Drawing and Placing Items<br />
Click here for more information on drawing and creating maps.<br />
7.7.1.3 Editing Map Designs<br />
Select Mode<br />
Select mode is used to edit map designs.<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Moving, resizing and deleting<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Grouping and ungrouping<br />
Context Menus<br />
Merge many items into one item, or Context menus are used to edit items.<br />
breakdown a group into its constituent parts.<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Viewing Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Rulers and Measurement<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
7.7.1.4 Properties<br />
Aligning items to the Grid<br />
Click here for information.<br />
Ordering items on a page<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Click here for more information on editing the properties of a page or an item on the page.<br />
7.7.1.5 Map Making Hints<br />
Click here to view hints on making maps.<br />
7.7.2 Map Making and Editing<br />
7.7.2.1 Map Making Hints<br />
Text or Picture Button<br />
You can use a Text Item or an image item on your map as a "button". Pressing the button will<br />
zoom to another part of the map, or another page. To do this<br />
1. Add a text or bitmap item to the page<br />
2. Adjust its properties to a suitable appearance, then, in the view property put the name<br />
of a page, or alarm area or preset view object.<br />
3. Click here.<br />
Icon Size<br />
Alarm points and alarm areas have icons associated with them whose size can be toggled<br />
between large (32 pixels) or small (16 pixels) using the View Menu to set the Small Icons<br />
value.<br />
Action<br />
In the Alarm Viewer Application the operator can select an active alarm, an alarm area or
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 160<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
alarm point, and all of the Alarm Viewer Application panel's will highlight the selected item.<br />
When an alarm occurs the map must show the alarm to the operator immediately. This means<br />
that the map view must be able to jump to any alarm point or area automatically and display it<br />
to the user. This "zoom-to" behaviour can be set up and tested in the map editor.<br />
To jump to an object - double click it, or right click and select Test Action from the Context<br />
Menu.<br />
When you jump to an object it tries to fill the screen with the item specified in the view property.<br />
This can be the name of a page, a view, or an alarm area. if the item is rotated the view will also<br />
rotate so the item appears "right way up".<br />
Normally the view for an alarm area is the area itself. This behaviour can be changed by<br />
altering the action property of the alarm area, or by adding a view with the same name.<br />
Normally the view for an alarm point is the parent area, so using the Action Property function<br />
on the alarm point will fill the screen with its parent area (even if that area has a different view<br />
specified). However, if the alarm point is outside the rectangle specified for the alarm area it<br />
may not be visible, and you need to specify the name of a different page, view or area in the<br />
view property of the alarm point.<br />
View items can be added to the map - but they must have a name specified before they can be<br />
used. View items are not visible in the alarm viewer - but in the map designer you see an icon<br />
and name.<br />
If a view has the same name as an alarm area the view will be chosen by objects that specify<br />
that name in their view property.<br />
There may be alarm areas and views with the same name on different pages. If there is a view<br />
or area available on the current page with the specified name, then that one is chosen.<br />
Otherwise all pages are searched and the Action may change to a different page.<br />
Overriding the Area with a View<br />
The icon for an alarm area can be placed in any of the 9 anchor positions by adjusting the<br />
Anchor property, but you can place the icon somewhere else if you need to.<br />
1. Add a view item to specify the rectangle of the alarm area.<br />
2. Give that view the same name as the area.<br />
3. Move the area rectangle so the icon appears in the desired location. Now the icon will<br />
be where you want it, but zooming to the area or any of its alarm points will fill the<br />
screen with the rectangle specified by the view instead of the area.<br />
7.7.2.2 Adding/Deleting/Copying Pages<br />
Adding Pages<br />
To add a blank page to the current design, select New > New Page from the Design Menu.<br />
To copy an existing page, click on the required page tab, copy it and paste it.<br />
After a page is added, a new tab will be added to the Pages Tab area.<br />
Deleting Pages<br />
To delete a page select it by clicking the appropriate tab, and select the delete function from the<br />
Toolbar or Edit Menu.<br />
Copying Pages<br />
To copy an existing page, right click the tab of the page to be copied required page tab, and<br />
copy it and paste it using the either the Toolbar or Edit Menu.<br />
7.7.2.3 Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor<br />
The Alarm Viewer is used in the management of alarms - if maps are present it will display<br />
them in a viewer. If an alarm point goes into alarm, the appearance of that alarm point on the<br />
map will change to indicate that it has gone into alarm, and the map viewer will zoom to the<br />
area associated with that alarm point, so that it fills the map view.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 161<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
Alarm Point Appearance<br />
The appearance of an alarm point is modified by the Alarm Viewer to indicate the state of that<br />
alarm point, i.e. whether it has been disarmed, armed etc.<br />
An alarm point's Alarm Status property can be used to view how an alarm point will appear in a<br />
different states in the Alarm Viewer.<br />
Associated Areas<br />
When an operator configures alarm points he or she associates them with an alarm area.<br />
This feature can be used in the Map Design Editor: double clicking an alarm point, or selecting<br />
the Test Action entry from the items Context Menu, will cause the page to jump to that<br />
associated area, so that it fills the page view.<br />
Action<br />
Zoom to can be configured for any item in the Map Design Editor. Click here for more<br />
information.<br />
7.7.2.4 Editing Properties<br />
The properties of all pages and items in the Map Design Editors define their appearance and<br />
behaviour on the page and in the Alarm Viewer Application. Changes to the properties of<br />
anything within the Map Design Editor will be instantly reflected on the page.<br />
Item Properties<br />
To edit the properties of an item on the page: select the required item and the Properties<br />
Region will display that items properties allowing them to be edited.<br />
Page Properties<br />
To view and edit the properties of the selected page select Page Properties from the View<br />
Menu.<br />
7.7.2.5 Page Tabs<br />
The page area is used to design maps: items from the Add Items and Alarm Points placed here<br />
and are shown in the Alarm Viewer.<br />
Additional pages can be added using the New Page command, located in the design menu.<br />
The page name, displayed in the tab, is entered in the page's name property.<br />
Selecting Pages<br />
Additional pages are selected using the page tabs, which are located above the page area.<br />
Page Coordinates<br />
The coordinates of the mouse pointer on the page are displayed in the Status Bar.<br />
Page Properties<br />
The page has the following properties:<br />
Name Units<br />
Tool tip Background Colour<br />
X Background Image<br />
Y Snap grid<br />
Width Snap grid size<br />
Height Snap grid colour<br />
Resolution<br />
Rulers<br />
The rulers on the map area can have their units changed from:<br />
1. the View Menu, or
2. the units property of the Page Properties, or<br />
3. the rulers Context Menu.<br />
Viewing Page Properties<br />
To view the page properties, select it by<br />
1. Clicking on any empty area of the page, or<br />
2. Select the Page Properties entry from the Edit Menu<br />
Editing Page Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
7.7.2.6 Group Item<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 162<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A group<br />
item has the following properties:<br />
Name Transparency<br />
X Shadow<br />
Y Shadow Y<br />
Anchor Density<br />
Angle Shadow X<br />
Aspect Lock<br />
Creating a Group<br />
To create a group, you must select two or more items on the page, and use the group<br />
command on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.<br />
Ungrouping a Group<br />
To ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command on<br />
the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.<br />
Editing Group Properties<br />
Any changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of its<br />
constituent items.<br />
Click here for more information on editing groups.<br />
Resizing a Group<br />
Groups cannot be resized.<br />
7.7.2.7 Grouping and Ungrouping<br />
When the Group command is applied to two or more selected objects, they will behave as if<br />
they are a single item - clicking on a constituent item will cause the group to be selected, and<br />
clicking and dragging a single item will cause all of them to move.<br />
Grouping Items<br />
To group items:<br />
1. Enter Select Mode.<br />
2. Select the required items.<br />
3. Select the group command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar or<br />
the Context Menu of the selected group.<br />
Ungrouping a Group<br />
To ungroup a group and return it to its constituent components, select it and then use the<br />
ungroup command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar or the Context<br />
Menu of the selected group
Resizing Groups<br />
Groups cannot be resized.<br />
7.7.2.8 Select Mode<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 163<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
Before any item can be moved, resized, group / ungroups or deleted select mode must be<br />
entered.<br />
To enter select mode click the select item from the Toolbar or click the ESC key.<br />
Note: The current mode of the Map Design Editor is displayed in the Status Bar.<br />
Selecting Items<br />
When an item or group is selected, its properties will be displayed in the Properties Region.<br />
To select multiple items either:<br />
1. Hold the Shift key down and select the required item.<br />
2. Select a blank part of the page and then dragging will cause a selection area to<br />
appear. Any items that fall within the selection area will become selected.<br />
Note: Holding the Ctrl key and clicking a selected item will unselect it.<br />
Select All<br />
To select all items on the page, use the select all function by:<br />
1. Selecting the item Select All on the Edit Menu.<br />
2. Holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the key 'A'<br />
Properties<br />
Selecting any item on the page will cause the Properties Region to display the properties of that<br />
item.<br />
7.7.2.9 Move/Resize/Delete Items<br />
This page describes how to perform the listed actions on single items, multiple items or<br />
groups, after entering Select Mode.<br />
1. Move,<br />
2. Resize, or<br />
3. Delete.<br />
Moving<br />
Select an item or group and drag to move it around. Release the button to stop moving it.<br />
Resizing<br />
After an item has been selected it is enclosed by a rectangular boundary<br />
box that has on each side and corner grab handles.<br />
Solid black grab handles (pictured left top) indicate that the item or group can<br />
be resized by click and drag. Outlined grab handles in each corner (pictured<br />
left bottom) indicate the item cannot be resized by click and drag.<br />
Items with their Aspect Lock Property set to on, have grab handles in the<br />
middle of each side (picture bottom left), and maintain their aspect ratio when<br />
resized.<br />
Notes:<br />
Groups cannot be resized.<br />
The size of a Text Item can only be adjusted with the Font Property.<br />
Deleting<br />
Items or groups can be deleted from the page by:
1. Selecting the delete option from its Context Menu, or<br />
2. Selecting it and pressing in the Delete key, or<br />
3. Selecting and dragging it off the main view and releasing the button, or<br />
4. Using the delete function button on the Toolbar, or the edit menu.<br />
7.7.2.10 Drawing and Placing Items<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 164<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
Items from the General Tab, Alarm Points Tab and CCTV Tab can be placed on the selected<br />
page by using two different methods:<br />
1. Dragging and dropping.<br />
2. Selecting and clicking.<br />
Dragging and Dropping<br />
Any item from the Add Items Region Tabs can be placed on the selected page by selecting the<br />
item and dragging it to the required location on the page while holding down the mouse button.<br />
Selecting and Clicking<br />
Items can be placed on the selected page by selecting it, and then clicking on the required area<br />
to place it. How an item is placed is dependant upon whether it is a fixed shape item, variable<br />
shape item or line.<br />
Fixed Shape Items<br />
Fixed shape items (indicated above) are items that when placed have a predetermined size,<br />
which cannot be changed. However, Text items' sizes can be adjusted by using the Font<br />
Property.<br />
To place a fixed shape item select it and click the required area on the page to place it.<br />
Variable Shape Items<br />
Variable shape items (indicated above) are items whose rectangular size is determined on by<br />
clicking twice on the page: the first click specifies the location of the item’s top left corner and<br />
the second click specifies the location of the bottom right corner.<br />
Line<br />
Lines can be placed in two ways: individually or many.<br />
Individually: After selecting the line item, selecting the page defines the line's start point and<br />
releasing it defines its end point.<br />
Many: Selecting the page will specify a line's start point and clicking a second time will specify<br />
its end point, causing that line to be drawn, clicking a third time will specify the end point of the<br />
next line - the end point of the previous line is start of the current line.<br />
To end drawing press the Esc key or click the Toolbar's select function.
7.7.3 Context Menus<br />
Context menus are menus that are displayed by right clicking on an item.<br />
Click on a link below to view the context menu associated with an item.<br />
Single items - shapes, text, views, group<br />
alarm point, alarm area<br />
Single items - line ruler<br />
Single item - image page<br />
multiple items<br />
7.7.3.1 Multiple Items<br />
In addition to the context menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu contains:<br />
1. Group - click here.<br />
7.7.3.2 Page<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 165<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
The page context menu contains the following items:<br />
1. Cut - cuts the selected page.<br />
2. Copy - copies the selected page.<br />
3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut page -only displayed when a page has been cut or<br />
copied.<br />
4. Delete - deletes the selected page.<br />
5. Zoom in - click here.<br />
6. Zoom out - click here.<br />
7. Show Full Page - this causes the page view with to show the entire page.<br />
8. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).<br />
7.7.3.3 Ruler<br />
The Ruler context menu allows the units used by the current page to be set, and contains the<br />
following items:<br />
1. Inches,<br />
2. Millimetres,<br />
3. Centimetres,<br />
4. Metres,<br />
5. None - turns of the ruler, e.g. for "not to scale diagrams").<br />
7.7.3.4 Group<br />
In addition to the common menu contents, a context menu for a group item contains:<br />
1. Ungroup - click here.<br />
7.7.3.5 Single Items<br />
Context menu contains the following items:<br />
1. Cut - cuts the selected item(s).<br />
2. Copy - copies the selected item(s).<br />
3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut item(s) -only displayed when a item has been copied.<br />
4. Delete - deletes the selected item(s).
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 166<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
5. Test Action - tests the an item's action property. Click here.<br />
6. Set Action - a sub menu that contains items present in the design that can be linked to<br />
the selected item. Click here.<br />
7. Align to Grid - click here.<br />
8. Bring to Front - click here.<br />
9. Send to Back - click here.<br />
10. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).<br />
7.7.3.6 Image<br />
In addition to the context menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for an image item<br />
with an image assigned contains:<br />
1. Restore Size - this function will restore the image to its original size if it has been<br />
stretched or shrunk.<br />
2. Restore Aspect - this function will restore the image to its correct aspect ratio at its<br />
current size.<br />
7.7.3.7 Line<br />
In addition to the context menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for a line<br />
contains:<br />
1. Align to axis - this will move the end point to make the line parallel with the horizontal<br />
or vertical axis.<br />
7.8 Properties Region<br />
7.8.1 Item Properties<br />
7.8.1.1 Multiple Item Properties<br />
When multiple items are selected on the page, the Properties Region displays a set of<br />
properties common to all of the selected items. When these common properties are edited, the<br />
respective property for each item will be changed as well.<br />
When two or more items are selected the following properties are displayed:<br />
The following properties are displayed when multiple items are selected:<br />
Anchor Shadow<br />
Angle Density<br />
Aspect Lock Shadow X<br />
Transparency Shadow Y<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
7.8.1.2 Group Item Properties<br />
A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A group<br />
item has the following properties:<br />
Name Transparency<br />
X Shadow<br />
Y Density<br />
Anchor Shadow X<br />
Angle Shadow Y<br />
Aspect Lock
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 167<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
Creating a Group<br />
To create a group, you must select two or more items on the page, and use the group<br />
command on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.<br />
Ungrouping a Group<br />
To ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command on<br />
the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.<br />
Editing Group Properties<br />
Any changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of its<br />
constituent items.<br />
Click here for more information on editing groups.<br />
Resizing a Group<br />
Groups cannot be resized.<br />
7.8.1.3 Shape Item Properties<br />
A shape selected on a page has the following properties:<br />
Name Shape<br />
X Border Colour<br />
Y Fill Colour<br />
Width Line Width<br />
Height Shadow<br />
Aspect Lock Density<br />
Anchor Shadow X<br />
Angle Shadow Y<br />
Transparency<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
7.8.1.4 Image Item Properties<br />
An image item has the following properties:<br />
Name Angle<br />
X Image<br />
Y Transparency<br />
Width Shadow<br />
Height Density<br />
Aspect Lock Shadow X<br />
Anchor Shadow Y<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.
7.8.1.5 Line Item Properties<br />
A line has the following properties:<br />
Name Colour<br />
X Line Width<br />
Y Shadow<br />
Width Density<br />
Height Shadow X<br />
Anchor Shadow Y<br />
Transparency<br />
Aligning to Axis<br />
A line can be aligned to the closest axis (straightened) by selecting Align to Axis from the<br />
Context Menu.<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
7.8.1.6 Text Item Properties<br />
A text item selected on a page has the following properties:<br />
Name Font<br />
X Multi-line<br />
Y Colour<br />
Anchor Shadow<br />
Angle Density<br />
Transparency Shadow X<br />
Text Shadow Y<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
7.8.1.7 View Item Properties<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 168<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
A view item is used in conjunction with Set Action to enable an alarm point to be linked to an<br />
area on the map, i.e. when the alarm point is double clicked the linked view is displayed.<br />
A view item has the following properties:<br />
Name Angle<br />
X Anchor<br />
Y<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.
7.8.1.8 Button Item Properties<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 169<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
A button item is used in conjunction with Set Action to enable the button to be linked to an area<br />
on the map, i.e. when the button is double clicked the linked view is displayed.<br />
A button item selected on a page has the following properties:<br />
Name Colour<br />
Tool tip Image<br />
Action Common Icon<br />
X Shadow<br />
Y Density<br />
Anchor Shadow X<br />
Angle Shadow Y<br />
Font<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
7.8.1.9 Alarm Area Properties<br />
An alarm area has the following properties:<br />
Name Font<br />
Action Colour<br />
X Shadow<br />
Y Density<br />
Width Shadow X<br />
Height Shadow Y<br />
Anchor<br />
Angle<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
7.8.1.10 Alarm Point/Output Properties<br />
An alarm point/output has the following properties:<br />
Name Colour<br />
Action Shadow<br />
X Density<br />
Y Shadow X<br />
Anchor Shadow Y<br />
Angle<br />
Font<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.
7.8.1.11 Video Source Properties<br />
A video source item selected on a page has the following properties:<br />
Name Font<br />
X Colour<br />
Y Shadow<br />
Anchor Density<br />
Angle Shadow X<br />
Display Mode Shadow Y<br />
Editing the Item's Properties<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
7.8.2 Individual Properties<br />
7.8.2.1 Name Property<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 170<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
The name of item. This is not an essential property, unless the item selected is a view which<br />
you intend to link through other items, and is only required when configuring the Action<br />
Property.<br />
7.8.2.2 Tool tip Property<br />
This is only applicable to page and button items. Text entered for a page is displayed when the<br />
mouse is held over the page tab in the Alarm Viewer. Text entered for a button is displayed<br />
when the mouse is held over the button in the Alarm Viewer.<br />
7.8.2.3 Action and Set Action<br />
Action is a property that allows one item to be linked to another. Double clicking on the item<br />
will display the linked item (e.g. display Page 2).<br />
Setting an Item's Action property<br />
An item's action property can be set by:<br />
1. Selecting the item that you wish to link it to from the Set Action entry of its Context<br />
Menu .The name of the selected item is automatically entered into the select items<br />
Action Property, or<br />
2. Entering the Name (defined in the Name Property) of the item you wish to link to in its<br />
Action Property.<br />
Testing an Item's Action Property<br />
To test if an items action property is correctly configured:<br />
1. Select from its Context Menu the entry Test Action, or<br />
2. Double click it<br />
If it is correctly configured the item to which is linked will be displayed in the page area.<br />
7.8.2.4 X, Y, Height and Width Properties<br />
X<br />
The distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin from the left side of the page. The origin<br />
location is set using the item's Anchor Property.<br />
Y<br />
The distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin the item from the top of the page. The<br />
origin location is set using the item's Anchor Property.<br />
Width<br />
The width of the object, in the selected units.
Height<br />
The height of the object, in the selected units.<br />
7.8.2.5 Resolution and Units Properties<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 171<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
Resolution<br />
Controls how detailed an object can be drawn on a page. The higher the value, the more<br />
detailed a feature can be and the more you can zoom in. This value, represents the number of<br />
pixels per selected unit within the page.<br />
Specifically affects bitmap images, causing them to be resampled so that their resolution is not<br />
higher than the resolution of the page.<br />
Also, with fonts and lines, whose size is specified in pixels.<br />
Units<br />
Allows the user to select the units that the page is displaying values in. Click here.<br />
7.8.2.6 Background Properties<br />
Background Colour<br />
Click the button on right hand side to display the colour picker that selects the page's<br />
background colour.<br />
Background image<br />
Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you to<br />
navigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed on the map's selected side. The<br />
file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.<br />
To remove the image select its property again and press the Delete key.<br />
7.8.2.7 Aspect Lock Property<br />
The Aspect Lock Property determines how a shape changes when it is resized using the<br />
mouse.<br />
7.8.2.8 Anchor and Angle Property<br />
Anchor<br />
Aspect Lock Off<br />
Object's right side is clicked and dragged.<br />
Note how the grab handles' position differ from the Aspect Lock<br />
On setting.<br />
Aspect Lock On - item retains aspect ratio when resized.<br />
Object's right side is clicked and dragged.<br />
Note how the grab handles' position differs from the Aspect Lock<br />
Off setting.<br />
The Anchor Property controls where, in the selected item, its origin is located. The origin is<br />
the point which it rotates and scales around, and whose location determines the shape's X<br />
and Y coordinate properties. For View and Alarm Area items, this property determines the<br />
location of their icons within their boundary frame.
top left<br />
left<br />
bottom left<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 172<br />
top<br />
centre<br />
bottom<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
top right<br />
right<br />
bottom right<br />
The image below shows examples of how the alignment properties affect an item when it is<br />
rotated 45 degrees clockwise . The red dot indicates the shape's origin.<br />
Horizontal alignment: centre<br />
Vertical alignment: centre<br />
Horizontal alignment: right<br />
Vertical alignment: bottom<br />
Horizontal alignment: left<br />
Vertical alignment: centre<br />
Angle<br />
Entering a value will rotate the shape around its origin. A positive value will rotate the item<br />
clockwise, and a negative anticlockwise.<br />
7.8.2.9 Display Mode<br />
This property toggles the selected video source's behaviour on the page.<br />
Setting the value to icon will change the video source item to a camera icon.<br />
Setting the value to image will change the video source item to a rectangular, live video feed<br />
from that video source, which can then be resized as required.<br />
7.8.2.10 Transparency Property<br />
A value between 0 (opaque) and 100 (transparent).<br />
7.8.2.11 Text Property<br />
Text entered here will be displayed in the text item on the page.<br />
7.8.2.12 Font Property<br />
This property controls the appearance of the text in the selected item.<br />
Clicking the button on the right hand side displays the font editor, that is used to select font<br />
type, font style, font size, font effect and scripting.<br />
7.8.2.13 Multi-line Property<br />
This property allows a text item to be wrap round on more than one line (e.g. when specified as<br />
ON, a long piece of text can be adjusted by altering its width).<br />
7.8.2.14 Colour Property<br />
Colour Property<br />
Sets the colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will<br />
display a colour selector.<br />
Fill Colour Property
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 173<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
Sets the fill colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will<br />
display a colour selector.<br />
7.8.2.15 Line Width Property<br />
This property sets the line thickness of the selected:<br />
1. line (for lines), or<br />
2. boundary (for shapes).<br />
The default value is 1. Setting this value to 0 will turn the line off.<br />
7.8.2.16 Image Property<br />
This property is used to choose the image file that an item displays.<br />
If the image property is specified as a background image for a page, it will expand to fill the<br />
page, and cannot be resized.<br />
If the image property is specified as an image for an image item, the image will be sized to fit<br />
the image frame, and may therefore appear distorted. An image can be adjusted by using the<br />
image items Context Menu.<br />
Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you to<br />
navigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed within the boundary box of the<br />
image item. The file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.<br />
Removing an Image<br />
To remove an image from a page background or from an image item without deleting it (i.e.<br />
leaving an empty frame), select the image property and press the Delete key.<br />
7.8.2.17 Shadow, Shadow X, Shadow Y and Shadow Density<br />
Shadow<br />
Toggles shadow visibility.<br />
Shadow X<br />
The horizontal offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed to the<br />
right of the item.<br />
Shadow Y<br />
The vertical offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed below<br />
the item.<br />
Shadow Density<br />
The darkness of the shadow: 0 will make it invisible, and a value of 100 makes it black. By<br />
default this value is set to 20 (light gray).<br />
7.8.2.18 Snap Grid, Snap Grid Size, Snap Grid Colour<br />
Snap Grid<br />
There are three options associated with this property:<br />
1. No snap grid - no grid / dots displayed. This option disables the "snap to" when placing<br />
items.<br />
2. Grid - displays a grid on the page.<br />
3. Dots - displays dots on the page.<br />
Snap Grid Size<br />
Sets the scale used by the displayed grid / dots in the units specified in the Units Properties.<br />
Snap Grid Colour<br />
Sets the colour of the grid. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will display a<br />
colour selector.
7.9 Status Bar<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 174<br />
Alarm Map Designer<br />
The status bar, located at the bottom of the Alarm Map Designer application, displays the<br />
following information :<br />
1. X and Y coordinates of the mouse pointer, in the selected units for the page.<br />
2. Mode Selected - the icon displayed here reflects the item that has been selected in the<br />
Add Area or Toolbar. For example it displays a picture of magnifying glass and the word<br />
"zoom" if zoom mode is selected, a shape icon and the word "shape" if shapes are<br />
selected etc.<br />
3. Operator Name - the name of the operator currently logged on.<br />
4. Zoom Level - the current level of magnification.
8. Alarm Viewer<br />
8.1 Introduction<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 175<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
The Alarm Viewer application is used to monitor and manage alarms that occur on your<br />
Administration Software administered access control system.<br />
Alarms occur when Alarm Points are triggered. Alarm points are items capable of generating<br />
alarm events, and take the form of inputs, doors, controllers or 500s.<br />
When an alarm occurs the Alarm Viewer will:<br />
1. Sound an alarm (if defined)<br />
2. Highlight the Alarm Point or its associated Alarm Area in the tab selected in the Alarm<br />
/ Areas Board.<br />
3. Display information about it in the active alarms window.<br />
4. Highlight its location in the Map Region (if maps are present).<br />
Alarm Viewer Components<br />
Three components are always present:<br />
1. Alarm/Event Region that includes three tabs: Active Alarms, Event Log Viewer and Alarm<br />
History.<br />
2. Areas Board.<br />
3. Alarm Board.<br />
Two other optional components are:<br />
1. Map Region.<br />
2. CCTV Region.<br />
8.2 Alarm Viewer Glossary<br />
Alarm Areas<br />
An area that is associated with a 500 for alarm management. Alarm points, such as doors or<br />
inputs, can be associated with alarm areas.<br />
Alarm Point<br />
An alarm point is a input, door, controller or a 500 that has been associated with an area, and is<br />
capable of generating alarm events.<br />
Alarm Sensor Resets<br />
An alarm sensor reset is a relay that is used to reset the condition of inputs associated with an<br />
area.<br />
Area Sounders<br />
An area sounders is a relay that is activated when the area it is associated with goes into alarm.<br />
Area sounders are connected to devices that signal when an alarm has occurred, for example<br />
an alarm bell.<br />
Child area<br />
A child area is an area that is contained by a parent area.<br />
Disarm Privilege<br />
A disarm privilege is assigned to an access group. When that access group is applied to a<br />
keyholder, it will give the keyholder the ability to disarm any armed area associated with that<br />
access group.<br />
Parent Area<br />
A parent area is an area that contains one or more areas within it.
8.3 Interactive Map<br />
Click on a region of the map for further information.<br />
The tab order and/or their regions can be moved about the screen by dragging and dropping<br />
the tab (see Tear Off Controls). Click here for an example.<br />
Example of regions moved about the screen:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 176<br />
Alarm Viewer
Tear Off Controls<br />
To enable tear off controls, select View > Windows > Enable Tear Off.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 177<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
To undock the Event Log, a Report or an Alarm Viewer Region, select the tab or icon and<br />
drag and drop at its required position. The Event Log also has an Undock icon in the toolbar. A<br />
tear off confirmation window will be displayed if the facility has not been disabled.<br />
The undocked window has standard Windows minimise, maximise, and resize facilities but only<br />
windows that can be closed have the icon in the tab.<br />
To move an undocked window, select the title bar or tab and drag and drop at its required<br />
position. Docking is suppressed when the title bar is used or the Ctrl or Shift key is pressed<br />
when the tab is used.<br />
To dock the Event Log, Report or Alarm Viewer Region, select the tab and drag and drop at its<br />
required docked position or select the icon . The Event Log also has a Dock icon in the<br />
toolbar A tear off confirmation window will be displayed if the facility has not been disabled.<br />
To disable tear off controls, select View > Windows > Disable Tear Off.<br />
Tear Off Confirmation Window<br />
A tear off confirmation window will be<br />
displayed when attempting to dock or undock<br />
a window.<br />
To disable the facility, select the Do not show this message again checkbox.<br />
To confirm, select the OK button.<br />
To cancel, select the Cancel button.<br />
To display help information, select the Help button.<br />
To enable this facility, select View > Windows > Show all tear off tips.<br />
8.4 Alarm Viewer Menus<br />
8.4.1 File Menu<br />
Close - closes the Alarm Viewer.<br />
PC Sounder - selecting this item mutes the PC sounder (there is an identical function in the<br />
Alarm Viewer Toolbar).<br />
Acknowledge All - selecting this item will display the Acknowledge Alarm window.<br />
Silence All - selecting the function will display the Silence All window.<br />
8.4.2 View Menu<br />
Refresh - refreshes the Alarm Viewer.<br />
Show Text on Toolbar Buttons - toggles the appearance of descriptive text on all toolbar<br />
buttons in the Alarm Viewer.<br />
Muster Report (only if a muster event to action has been specified) - displays the Muster<br />
Report.<br />
Windows – has several options:<br />
Restore Panes – displays all tabs and restores undocked windows back to their default<br />
position.<br />
Show all tear off tips – Enables tips to be displayed when attempting to use the tear off<br />
facility.<br />
Don’t show tear off tips – Disables the tear off tip.
Enable/Disable Tearoff – toggles the tear off facility. If disabled, any undocked windows<br />
can be moved but not docked.<br />
Tech Support Mode – toggles between default windows settings and customised<br />
windows settings.<br />
A list of windows that can be brought to the front when selected.<br />
Visual Notification – selecting this item will display the Visual Notification window.<br />
8.4.3 Visual Notification<br />
Visual notification is designed to display an image of the person who is entering a particularly<br />
sensitive area. When a key is presented to a reader that has been specified for visual<br />
notification, an image of the person is displayed and the operator can ensure that the person<br />
attempting to enter the area is the valid keyholder.<br />
Note<br />
The door giving access to the area must have an area assigned in its Alarm<br />
Management tab.<br />
To specify a reader for visual notification:<br />
1. Display the Alarm Viewer.<br />
2. Select View > Visual Notification and the<br />
Visual Notification window is displayed.<br />
3. Select the readers that require visual<br />
notification.<br />
4. Select to close the window.<br />
To verify the identity of the keyholder:<br />
1. A person presents a key to a reader and<br />
the Visual Verification window is<br />
displayed.<br />
2. If the person is recognised as the valid<br />
keyholder from the displayed image,<br />
select Open to allow entry.<br />
If the person is not recognised, take the<br />
appropriate action (e.g. notify security).<br />
3. Select to close the window.<br />
8.4.4 Active Alarms / Event Log / Alarm History Menu<br />
The menu title depends on the tab currently selected.<br />
Start Automatic Updates - starts automatic updating of the list.<br />
Pause Automatic Updated - stops automatic updating of the list.<br />
Acknowledge Alarm - acknowledges the selected event/alarm (not applicable to Alarm<br />
History list).<br />
Show details for item - displays details of the appropriate item.<br />
8.4.5 Alarm Board Menu<br />
The Alarm Boards Menu is used to select small or large icons.<br />
If an item in the Alarms Boards tab is selected, different options are displayed depending on<br />
the type of item selected.<br />
8.4.6 Areas Menu<br />
The Areas Menu is used to select small or large icons.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 178<br />
Alarm Viewer
If an area in the Areas tab is selected, area options are displayed.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 179<br />
Alarm Viewer
8.4.7 Map Menu<br />
The map menu will be displayed if one or more maps exist.<br />
Small Icons / Large Icons - toggles the icon sizes on the map viewer.<br />
Zoom In - enlarges the selected map.<br />
Zoom Out - shrinks the select map.<br />
100% - shows the full map.<br />
Zoom to fit - zooms to the selected item on the map.<br />
8.4.8 CCTV Menu<br />
The CCTV menu will be displayed if one or more video sources exist.<br />
Select –selects a video source.<br />
Enable – enables a video source to be viewed in the CCTV region.<br />
Expand name / Norman Operation – expands the selected video source or redisplays the<br />
normal view.<br />
Show Names – toggles the display of the video source name(s) in the CCTV region.<br />
Connect – connects the video source(s) in the CCTV region.<br />
Save Image – saves the selected video source image in the My Pictures folder with an<br />
automatically-generated name that includes the camera name and date and time.<br />
Save Image As – saves the selected video source image in a specified folder with a specified<br />
name.<br />
Save Image as Incident Report – displays the Incident Report Details window which allows<br />
the image to be saved with a comment and a checkbox to display the incident after creation.<br />
After a CCTV image has been saved, the Incident Report Saved Successfully window is<br />
displayed.<br />
When the html file is displayed it includes the Incident Date, Frame Time, Site Name, Camera<br />
Name, and Comments.<br />
8.4.9 Incident Report Details<br />
To save an CCTV image of an incident:<br />
1. Display the Alarm Viewer.<br />
2. Select CCTV > Save Image as<br />
Incident Report and the Incident<br />
Report Details Window is<br />
displayed.<br />
3. Specify the location and names of<br />
an image file and html file and enter<br />
a comment. The default names<br />
include the date and time.<br />
4. If the html file is to be displayed<br />
immediately, select the Show<br />
Incident Report in browser after<br />
creation checkbox.<br />
5. Select the OK button.<br />
After a CCTV image has been saved,<br />
the Incident Report Saved<br />
Successfully window is displayed,<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 180<br />
Alarm Viewer
Incident Report Saved Successfully window<br />
After a CCTV image has been saved, the<br />
Incident Report Saved Successfully window<br />
is displayed.<br />
To navigates to where the image is stored:<br />
• Select the Browse button.<br />
To display the image file:<br />
• Select the Open button.<br />
To send the image files via Email<br />
1. Select the Send button and the CCTV<br />
Email window is displayed.<br />
2. Enter the recipient details.<br />
Select the Send button.<br />
8.4.10 Context Menu<br />
The context menu is displayed by right clicking on one or more alarms. This menu contains<br />
displays the same options as the Toolbar plus: Show Details of selected alarm.<br />
8.5 Alarm Viewer Toolbars<br />
8.5.1 Alarm Viewer Toolbar<br />
The toolbar contains the following buttons:<br />
Refresh This button refreshes the Alarm Viewer application.<br />
PC Sounder Click here for more information.<br />
Silence all.. Click here for more information.<br />
Acknowledge all.. Click here for more information.<br />
All Organisations<br />
8.5.2 Active Alarm Toolbar<br />
The active alarm list has the following toolbar:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 181<br />
A list of organisational units that are available for<br />
filtering. The default is all organisational units.<br />
The Play icon refreshes the active alarm list automatically when a new alarm<br />
occurs.<br />
The Pause icon prevents the active alarm list being updated when a new alarm<br />
occurs.<br />
The Acknowledge Alarm icon acknowledges the selected alarm. Click here for<br />
more information.<br />
Alarm Viewer
8.5.3 Event Log Viewer Toolbar<br />
The event log viewer has the following toolbar:<br />
The Play icon refreshes the event log automatically when a new event occurs.<br />
The Pause icon prevents the event log being updated when a new event occurs.<br />
The Controller Time icon displays the data and time based on either controller or<br />
PC time dependent on the event source time zone.<br />
The Universal Time icon displays the data and time based on UT time.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 182<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
The Filter icon displays three tabs that allow filter criteria to be specified:<br />
Highlight – select the highlight colour for the filter (only displayed if specifying<br />
a filter). Each filter can be allocated a colour to use in the Event Log Viewer to<br />
highlight events, see the Highlighting Events section.<br />
Category – select the required categories.<br />
Identity - select a category. If the selected category is not ‘Any’, the filter<br />
criteria can be specified by data entry or from a drop down list (select the<br />
icon) or (for keyholders) the Advanced Keyholder Search window<br />
(select the icon), see the Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator<br />
section. This tab also allows and or or operators to be selected.<br />
Time – select a date and time range for the filter criteria and a CCTV only<br />
checkbox to display only events related to alarms points linked to a CCTV<br />
video source..<br />
Three buttons are also displayed:<br />
Clear – clears filter criteria that has been applied (if this button is not greyed<br />
out, some events are being filtered out).<br />
Apply – applies the specified filter criteria.<br />
Cancel – cancels filter criteria that has not been applied.<br />
The Report icon displays the Event Log report that provides print facilities.<br />
The Dock/Undock icon docks or undocks the event log (see Tear Off Controls).<br />
8.5.4 Alarm History Toolbar<br />
The alarm history has the following toolbar:<br />
The Resume updates icon cause the event list to resume displaying events.<br />
The Pause updates icon causes the event list to stop showing new events.<br />
The Controller Time icon displays the data and time based on either controller or PC<br />
time dependent on the event source time zone.<br />
The Universal Time icon displays the data and time based on UT time.
8.5.5 CCTV Region Toolbar<br />
The CCTV region has the following toolbar:<br />
Expand<br />
selected<br />
feed<br />
Show all<br />
feeds<br />
Select<br />
feed<br />
Save feed<br />
snapshot<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Shows all enabled video sources.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 183<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
A drop down menu containing a list of all enabled video sources. Selecting a video<br />
source from this list will cause it to be selected (outlined in a red rectangle) in the CCTV<br />
board.<br />
Saves a still image from the selected video source. The image is saved to the My<br />
Pictures folder with an automatically generated name, consisting of the camera name,<br />
the date and time the still image was saved.<br />
Displays a drop down menu containing a list of presets associated with the selected<br />
Presets list video source. Selecting a preset will cause the video source to behave according to the<br />
conditions of the preset.<br />
Zoom<br />
Pan left<br />
Tilt up<br />
Tilt down<br />
Pan right<br />
Displays a drop down menu contain zoom options. The available options are:<br />
Zoom In - sets the selected video source to zoom in by a large amount.<br />
Nudge In - sets the selected video source to zoom in by a small amount.<br />
Nudge Out - sets the selected video source to zoom out by a small amount.<br />
Zoom Out - sets the selected video source to zoom out by a large amount.<br />
Zooming can also be controlled using the mouse and keyboard.<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
8.6 Alarm/Event Region<br />
8.6.1 Active Alarms<br />
This board is used to:<br />
1. Display alarm information, and<br />
2. Manage alarms when they occur.<br />
When the Active Alarms Board is selected the Active Alarms Toolbar is displayed.<br />
8.6.1.1 Alarm Information<br />
The Active Alarms tab displays the following types of alarms:<br />
1. Current - this is an alarm that is currently active but has not been restored or<br />
acknowledged.<br />
2. Restored - alarms that have had the condition that cause them cleared, for example,<br />
a door left open has been closed, but has not been acknowledged.<br />
3. Acknowledged - alarms that have not been restored, but have been acknowledged.<br />
Active Alarm List Headings<br />
Active alarms are displayed in a list with the following headings:<br />
1. Time - the date and time the alarm occurred at.<br />
2. Priority - the priority of the alarm. This is a value between 1 and 99, and it is set in the
Alarm Management tab of the selected Area's property page in the Administration<br />
Software.<br />
3. Source - the source of the alarm, e.g. a door or input.<br />
4. Alarm - the type of alarm.<br />
5. Status - the status of the current alarm.<br />
Adding and Removing Headings<br />
The Active Alarms headings can be turned off and on by right clicking the headings and<br />
checking/unchecking the items as required.<br />
8.6.1.2 Viewing Associated Active Alarm Information<br />
To view associated alarm information, double click the active alarm point:<br />
1. The selected Alarm Board / Areas tab will highlight all of items associated with the<br />
selected active alarm.<br />
2. The Map Region (if displayed) will zoom to, and highlight the selected alarm point that<br />
is causing the active alarm.<br />
3. If the CCTV Region is present, and one or more CCTV feeds exist, with presets<br />
associating them with the active alarm, those feeds will be displayed.<br />
8.6.2 Managing Alarms<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 184<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
Alarms are managed using the commands available in the Active Alarms tab. Commands can<br />
be issued to alarms in three different ways:<br />
1. The Active Alarms toolbar, or<br />
2. The Active Alarms menu, or<br />
3. by context menu.<br />
Toolbar<br />
The Active Alarms Toolbar is displayed when the Active Alarms tab is clicked. It is displayed<br />
above the icon list.<br />
Active Alarms Menu<br />
The Active Alarms Menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu list in when the Active Alarms<br />
tab is selected. This menu contains a command that the toolbar doesn't possess: Show Details<br />
of selected alarm.<br />
Context Menu<br />
The Context Menu is displayed by right clicking on one or more alarms. This menu contains a<br />
command that the toolbar doesn't possess: Show Details of selected alarm.<br />
8.6.3 Acknowledge Commands<br />
8.6.3.1 Acknowledge<br />
The acknowledge command is used by an Alarm Viewer Operator to record information about<br />
an alarm or alarms that are displayed in the Active Alarms.<br />
To acknowledge an Alarm an Alarm Viewer Operator has to:<br />
1. Select a predefined response from the response menu, or<br />
2. enter a comment into the comment box, or<br />
3. both of the above.<br />
Response Menu<br />
One of the responses in this menu must be selected when acknowledging an alarm. A response<br />
is a pre-defined phrase that has some relation to the alarm being acknowledged, for example,<br />
"false alarm", or "door forced".
Predefined comments are entered in the Alarm Responses of the Organisation Options<br />
window (Tools > Options of the Administration Software).<br />
Comment Box<br />
Additional information about the alarm of alarms being acknowledged in this box by the<br />
operator.<br />
8.6.3.2 Acknowledge All<br />
This command will record the same response and / or comment for all occurring alarms.<br />
The Acknowledge All command is launched from:<br />
1. The File Menu, and<br />
2. The Alarm Viewer Toolbar.<br />
8.6.3.3 Acknowledge Selected Command<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 185<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
This command will record a response and / or comment for the alarm or alarms selected in the<br />
Active Alarms tab.<br />
The acknowledge selected command is launched from the following locations:<br />
1. The Active Alarms Toolbar, and<br />
2. The Active Alarms Context Menu.<br />
8.6.4 Silence Commands<br />
Silence<br />
The Silence command this silences the PC sound, it has no affect on the alarms. It is available<br />
from 2 different locations:<br />
1. File Menu<br />
2. Alarm Viewer Toolbar.<br />
8.6.4.1 Silence All<br />
The Silence All command silences the PC sounder and deactivates all of the area sounders<br />
associated with the areas in alarm. It is available from 2 different locations:<br />
1. File Menu<br />
2. Alarm Viewer Toolbar.<br />
8.6.5 Event Log Viewer<br />
This tab displays an Event Log - the information displayed here is identical to the<br />
Administration Software's event log except that different filters can be set.<br />
When the Event Log Viewer tab is selected, the Event Log Viewer Toolbar is displayed.<br />
8.6.5.1 Event Information List<br />
All events are displayed in a list view, that, by default, contains the following headings:<br />
1. Date and Time - the date and time the event occurred.<br />
2. Category - the category of the event.<br />
3. Originator - the name of the keyholder that caused the event or the type of event from<br />
an hardware item.<br />
4. Source - the name of the operator or hardware item that is affected by the event.<br />
5. Description - a description of the event.<br />
Editing Headings<br />
Event Log list headings can be turned off and on by right clicking on the headings and<br />
checking/unchecking the items as required.
8.6.5.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 186<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
Alarm Area / Alarm Input Information<br />
Double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will cause the tab selected in the Alarm /<br />
Areas board to highlight items associated with it.<br />
Map Location<br />
If a map is present, double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will highlight its location on<br />
the Map Region.<br />
Detailed Information<br />
Right click an event item to view additional information about it.<br />
8.6.6 Alarm History<br />
This tab displays a list of recent alarm events that have occurred within the selected time<br />
range. This time range is specified in the dialogue box Number of hours to show in the<br />
bottom right hand corner of this tab, and is limited to a maximum range of 24 hours. To view<br />
alarm information older than this use the Alarm History report, located in the Administration<br />
Software's report tab.<br />
When the Alarm History is selected the Alarm History Toolbar is displayed.<br />
8.6.6.1 Alarm History Column Headings<br />
The following information is displayed:<br />
1. Date and Time - the date and time at which the alarm was acknowledged.<br />
2. Originator - the type of alarm from a hardware item.<br />
3. Alarm Point - the name of the Alarm Point that triggered the alarm.<br />
4. Description - this field contains the comments entered when an alarm is acknowledged<br />
or a description of the alarm if it hasn't been acknowledged.<br />
Adding and Removing Headings<br />
Alarm History headings can be turned off and on by right clicking on the headings and<br />
checking/unchecking the items as required.<br />
8.6.6.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information<br />
Alarm Area / Alarm Input Information<br />
Double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will cause the tab selected in the Alarm /<br />
Areas board to highlight items associated with it.<br />
Map Location<br />
If a map is present, double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will highlight its location on<br />
the Map Region.<br />
Detailed Information<br />
Right click an event item to view additional information about it.
8.7 Areas Region<br />
8.7.1 Areas Board<br />
This board is used to:<br />
1. Issue commands to areas - click here for more information.<br />
2. Display area status - the appearance of an icon indicates the area's current state.<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
3. Viewing additional information - see below.<br />
When the Areas tab is selected the Areas Toolbar is displayed, see the Issuing Commands<br />
to Areas section.<br />
Area Board Menu<br />
When the Alarm Board is selected the menu area will display a menu called Areas. Click here<br />
to view its commands.<br />
Area Board Icons<br />
This icon is the default Administration Software icon for Alarm Areas. The<br />
appearance of this icon changes to indicate its current state - click here for more<br />
information.<br />
8.7.1.1 Viewing Associated Alarm Area Information<br />
To view associated alarm area information, double click the required area:<br />
1. The selected Alarm / Event Information tab will highlight all of the events associated<br />
with the selected area.<br />
2. The Map Region (if displayed) will zoom to, and highlight the selected area.<br />
3. If the CCTV Region is present, and one or more CCTV feeds exist, with presets<br />
associating them with the selected area, those feeds will be displayed.<br />
8.7.1.2 Viewing Additional Alarm Area Information<br />
Holding the mouse pointer over an Alarm Area will display a yellow tool tip box which<br />
contains:<br />
1. Area Name<br />
Status - a description of the Alarm Points which that Alarm Area possess.<br />
8.7.2 Issuing Commands to Areas<br />
Areas that are selected in the Areas Board can have commands issued to them in three<br />
different ways:<br />
1. By the Alarm Board toolbar, or<br />
2. by the Areas menu, or<br />
3. by context menu.<br />
8.7.2.1 Toolbar<br />
The Alarm Area toolbar is displayed when the Areas tab is clicked. It is displayed above the<br />
icon list.<br />
8.7.2.2 Areas Menu<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 187<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
The Areas Menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu list in the top left side of the application.<br />
8.7.2.3 Context Menu<br />
The context menu is displayed by right clicking on an area.
8.7.2.4 Areas Commands<br />
The commands that can be issued to areas from any of the methods listed above are:<br />
Arm<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 188<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
Selecting this command will display the Arm Areas window. This window contains a list of all<br />
alarm areas, with the areas selected on the alarm board<br />
The areas that where selected when this command was performed will be selected in the list of<br />
alarm areas that the window contains.<br />
Arming an area will cause all of the doors associated with that area to become bolted or locked.<br />
This will prevent keyholders without a disarm privilege access to that area.<br />
Also, arming an area may be a pre-requisite for it reporting one or more alarms. When areas<br />
are configured in the Administration Software the events that can cause it to go into alarm can<br />
be set to always cause an alarm (i.e. regardless of whether it is armed or disarmed) or Only<br />
When Armed (i.e. the area must be armed for that event to cause an alarm).<br />
An Alarm Area can be armed:<br />
• Immediately, or<br />
• By the specified delay in minutes and seconds.<br />
For example: An parent area contains several children - arming the parent will cause its<br />
children to become armed as well.<br />
Disarm<br />
This action is only enabled if an armed area is selected.<br />
Disarming an area will cause all of the doors associated with it to become unbolted or unlocked,<br />
allowing keyholders with appropriate privilege access to it.<br />
Silence<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
Omit<br />
Omitting an area will prevent it from being armed when its parent area is armed. An omit can<br />
be either permanent or for the next arm only - this choice is given in the Omit Alarm Points<br />
from Arm window that is displayed when this option is selected.<br />
For example: An parent area contains several children and one of the children requires<br />
maintenance work - if that child is omitted it will not become armed if its parent is armed, but all<br />
other children will be armed.<br />
Reinstate<br />
This option will cause any area that has been omitted to become active again.<br />
For example: an omitted child area that has been reinstated will become armed when its<br />
parent is armed.<br />
Reset<br />
This option will cause an area's Alarm Sensor Resets to reset any of it inputs that are in alarm.<br />
to a reset state.<br />
Views<br />
This option toggles Alarm Point icon size between large and small.
8.8 Alarm Board Region<br />
8.8.1 Alarm Board<br />
This board is used to<br />
1. Issue commands to alarm inputs- click here for more information.<br />
2. Display area status - the appearance of an icon indicates the area's current state.<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
3. Viewing additional information - see below.<br />
When the Alarm Board tab is selected the Alarm Board Toolbar is displayed, see the Issuing<br />
Commands to Alarm Points section.<br />
8.8.1.1 Alarm Viewer Icons<br />
The different types of icons displayed on the Alarm Viewer are listed below, and their<br />
appearance will change to indicate their state.<br />
500 servers<br />
500 series controllers<br />
Doors<br />
24-hour alarm inputs<br />
Controlled alarm inputs<br />
Information only inputs (only appears in Map Region)<br />
Outputs (only appears in Map Region)<br />
Click here for more information.<br />
8.8.1.2 Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States<br />
The table below shows the different states of alarm areas and alarm points.<br />
Disarmed<br />
Armed<br />
Partially Armed<br />
In Alarm<br />
Area<br />
(Default<br />
icon)<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 189<br />
Server Controller Door 24-Hour<br />
Alarm<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
Controlled<br />
Alarm<br />
input
Acknowledged<br />
Restored<br />
Omitted Once<br />
Omitted<br />
Permanently<br />
Acknowledged<br />
and Silenced<br />
In Alarm and<br />
Silenced<br />
Restored and<br />
Silenced<br />
Two additional icons, the 24-hour information and output icons only appear in the<br />
map region of the Alarm Viewer.<br />
The output icon changes depending on its state: indicates output is on.<br />
indicates output is off.<br />
Acknowledged<br />
This state occurs when an alarm or alarms have been acknowledged.<br />
Silenced<br />
This state occurs when the Silence All command is executed.<br />
An area can be silenced in any three of its alarm states: Acknowledged, In Alarm and<br />
Restored.<br />
Restored<br />
This state occurs when the cause of an alarm is removed (i.e. a forced door has been closed)<br />
but the alarm hasn't been acknowledged.<br />
Omitted<br />
This state occurs when one or more Alarm Point or Alarm Input have been omitted.<br />
Partially Armed<br />
This state occurs when an Alarm Area is armed, and one or more of the constituents (Alarm<br />
Points or Alarm Areas) have been omitted.<br />
8.8.1.3 Viewing Additional Alarm Point Information<br />
Holding the mouse pointer over an Alarm Point will display a yellow tool tip box which<br />
contains:<br />
1. Name - the name of the Alarm Point.<br />
2. Type - the type of Alarm Point.<br />
3. Area - the name of the Alarm Area the Alarm Point is associated with.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 190<br />
Alarm Viewer
4. Mode - the mode assigned to the Alarm Point in its configuration page in the<br />
Administration Software.<br />
5. Status - the status of the Alarm Point.<br />
8.8.2 Issuing Commands to Alarm Points<br />
There are two types of commands that can be issued to alarm points:<br />
1. General commands - these are commands that can be issued to all types of alarm<br />
points (doors, controllers and inputs).<br />
2. Door only commands - commands that can only be issued to doors.<br />
8.8.2.1 General commands<br />
Any selected alarm point(s) can have general commands issued in three different ways:<br />
1. By the Alarm Board toolbar, or<br />
2. by the Alarm Board menu, or<br />
3. by context menu.<br />
8.8.2.2 Door only commands<br />
Door only commands can be issued to the selected doors in two different ways:<br />
1. by the Alarm Board menu, or<br />
2. by context menu.<br />
8.8.2.3 Toolbar<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 191<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
The Alarm Board toolbar is displayed when the Alarm Board tab is clicked. It is displayed above<br />
the icon list.<br />
8.8.2.4 Alarm Board Menu<br />
The Alarm Board menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu list in the top left side of the<br />
application.<br />
8.8.2.5 Context Menu<br />
The Context Menu is displayed by right clicking on an alarm point.<br />
8.8.2.6 Alarm Input Commands<br />
Omit<br />
Omitting an alarm point will prevent it from being armed when its parent area is armed. An omit<br />
can be either permanent or for the next arm only - this choice is given in the Omit Alarm Points<br />
from Arm window that is displayed when this option is selected.<br />
Alarming an area with one or more alarm input omitted will cause it to be partially armed.<br />
Reinstate<br />
This option will cause any alarm point that has been omitted to become active again.<br />
Views<br />
2. This option toggles Alarm Point icon size between large and small
8.9 Map Region<br />
The Map region is only displayed if a map design is present. Map designs are created using the<br />
Administration Software Alarm Map Designer Application.<br />
8.9.1 Multi-Page Maps<br />
If the map has multiple pages, tabs allowing you to select them will be displayed at the top of<br />
the viewer.<br />
8.9.2 Viewing Alarms<br />
When an alarm has occurred, the Alarm Point which has caused it will be zoomed to on the<br />
map.<br />
8.9.3 Viewing the Map<br />
The following commands can performed on the selected map by using the Map Menu or by<br />
right clicking a part of it:<br />
Small Icons / Large Icons - toggles the icon sizes on the map viewer.<br />
Zoom In - enlarges the selected map.<br />
Zoom Out - shrinks the select map.<br />
100% - shows the full map.<br />
Zoom to fit - zooms to the selected item on the map.<br />
8.9.4 Issuing Commands to Areas, Alarm Points and Outputs<br />
The areas, alarm points and outputs assigned to the map can be commanded by right clicking<br />
on one to display its context menu.<br />
An area's context menu contains the same commands as those offered in the Areas Board.<br />
An alarm point's context menu contains the same commands as those offered in the Alarm<br />
Board.<br />
An output’s context menu contains the following commands: Turn output on, Turn output off,<br />
Show details of output, and Small icons.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 192<br />
Alarm Viewer
8.10 CCTV Region<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 193<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
The CCTV region is displayed if one or more video sources are present. Video sources are<br />
configured using the Administration Software Video Source module.<br />
When the CCTV region is present, a CCTV Menu is displayed in the main menu, a CCTV<br />
Region Toolbar is displayed in the CCTV Region and pictures from the video sources that have<br />
been selected using the Select option on the CCTV Region Toolbar are displayed.<br />
Commands can be issued to video sources by using:<br />
1. CCTV Region Toolbar<br />
2. CCTV Menu,<br />
3. Context Menu – right clicking in this region displays the same options as the CCTV<br />
Menu (except Select).<br />
4. Additional controls shown when video sources are expanded.<br />
8.10.1 Expanding Video Sources<br />
Double clicking or expanding a video source (using the CCTV Menu, Context Menu or<br />
Toolbar command) in the picture area will cause that feed to enlarge to the size of the CCTV<br />
Board.<br />
When a video source is expanded additional features will be made available, provided the<br />
selected video source supports them . The controls available are:<br />
1. PTZ (pan, tilt and zoom)<br />
2. Archiving.<br />
8.10.2 Panning, Tilting and Enlarging<br />
Panning and Tilting<br />
A single click on a PTZ video source will try to move the camera to centre of the clicked point in<br />
the view.<br />
When the mouse button is held down, the cursor turns to a yellow blob and the position of<br />
the mouse now controls the speed of the camera. Return the mouse to the initial position or<br />
release the mouse button to stop. The speed of movement is represented by the mouse cursor<br />
as an arrow.<br />
Zooming<br />
Scrolling the mouse wheel forwards will cause the video source to zoom in and scrolling<br />
backwards will cause it to zoom out.<br />
Enlarging<br />
Toolbar Control<br />
When a video source that supports PTZ is<br />
expanded vertical and horizontal scroll<br />
bars are displayed which are used to pan<br />
and tilt the feed. A slider bar to the right of<br />
the vertical scroll bar is used to control<br />
zooming.<br />
Selecting a PTZ enabled feed will enable the pan, tilt and zoom toolbar buttons, which can<br />
then be used to control that camera.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 194<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
Keyboard Control<br />
Holding one of the four arrow keys will move the camera in the selected direction. Holding the +<br />
or – key will zoom in or out.<br />
8.10.3 CCTV Archive Tools<br />
This is a feature available to video sources<br />
that support archiving. Double clicking or<br />
expanding a video source in the CCTV<br />
Region will display archiving tools.<br />
Enabling the Archiving Tools<br />
Once selected, this feature is enabled by unchecking the textbox labelled live in the lower right<br />
hand corner of the window.<br />
Event Control<br />
This control represents a section of time with a starting point and an end point. The track bar in<br />
the centre can be used to move rapidly to any point in the selected time interval. The Arrow<br />
button on the left will rewind playback to the start point of the selected time interval. The right<br />
arrow will move to the end. Normal playback will pause on reaching the end of the selected<br />
interval.<br />
At any time, the Cut buttons on the left or right can be used to set the start or end point of the<br />
selected interval to the current playback time shown in the tape counter. If you want to select a<br />
larger time interval, you can go to the end of the interval and press play to continue playback<br />
past the end. You can also adjust the current position using the Tape Counter to play back<br />
video from outside the selected time interval. Use the Cut buttons as before to set the start or<br />
end point to the current time shown in the tape counter.<br />
When you select an event or an alarm the event control is set to give playback from 5 seconds<br />
before the event to 15 seconds after.<br />
To change the time period of the intervals, move to the desired event (using the date stamp or<br />
play speed control) and click the required set interval button ( ).<br />
Tape Counter<br />
This control shows the date and time of the recording currently being shown. When viewing<br />
recordings You can also set the values in this control to move to any position in the recorded<br />
video.<br />
Play Speed<br />
This shows the playback speed selected for viewing recordings. Speed 0 is paused, speed 1 is<br />
normal real time playback. Larger values are fast forward. Negative values are reverse. Play<br />
speed can be adjusted by entering a number, clicking on the buttons, or sliding the track bar.<br />
Pressing fast forward or rewind again will increase the speed.
8.11 If an Alarm Occurs<br />
8.11.1 When an alarm occurs....<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 195<br />
Alarm Viewer<br />
When an alarm occurs the Alarm Viewer will perform the following actions:<br />
1. An entry will appear in the Active Alarms tab, displaying information about the alarm<br />
2. The appearance of the Alarm Input and Alarm Area will change to indicate an alarm is<br />
occurring.<br />
3. If an alarm sound has been defined, it will alarm will sound on your PC. The alarm<br />
sound is defined in the Alarms Response option of the Organisation Options window<br />
(Tools > Options in the Administration Software).<br />
8.11.2 What to do if an alarm occurs....<br />
An Operator has the following options:<br />
1. Silence all alarms - turn off the Administration Software alarm sound and stop any<br />
alarm sounders.<br />
2. View Alarm Point information - to view more information about the Alarm Point<br />
generating the alarm, select in the Active Alarms List and use the show details<br />
command.<br />
3. View Alarm Map information (this assumes that an alarm map has been created)<br />
a. Double clicking an entry in the Active Alarms list will cause the Alarm Map<br />
display and highlight the item that is generating the alarm.<br />
b. Double clicking the Alarm Area that is currently in alarm will cause it to be<br />
zoomed to on the Alarm Map.<br />
4. Acknowledge alarms - alarms can be acknowledged in two ways:<br />
a. All at once - If many alarms have occurred they can be acknowledged with one<br />
comment using the Acknowledge All command.<br />
b. Individually - individual comments can be recorded for the alarm selected in the<br />
Active Alarms List by using the Acknowledge command.<br />
5. Restore an alarm - to restore an alarm, its cause must be removed, for example, a<br />
door left open has been closed.<br />
8.11.3 How to stop (clear) an alarm<br />
An alarm is stopped (cleared) when it has been restored and acknowledged.<br />
1. Restored is when the cause of the alarm has been removed, for example, a door left<br />
open has been closed.<br />
2. Acknowledged is when the operator has noticed the alarm and acknowledged it via<br />
the menus, toolbar or context menu.<br />
8.11.4 What to do after an alarm...<br />
Reset alarm<br />
The Reset Alarm command needs to be carried out on any Alarm Areas that have associated<br />
Alarm Points with the Requires Reset option checked.
9. Event Facilities<br />
9.1 Event Log<br />
Note<br />
If simple alarm monitoring is being used (i.e. alarm management not licensed), see<br />
Alarm Events section<br />
To display the event log:<br />
• Select Tools > View Event Log (via the<br />
Menus) or Tools > Event Log (via the<br />
Explorer Bar) and the event log is<br />
displayed.<br />
The event log can be moved about the<br />
screen by dragging and dropping the tab<br />
(see Tear Off Controls).<br />
The following information can be displayed selected by right click on column heading:<br />
Vid An icon is displayed if the event has an associated video clip.<br />
Controller Time / The date and time the event occurred based on the controller time or on<br />
Universal Time the UT time depending on the icon selected on the toolbar.<br />
Category The category of the event (i.e. alarm, system, authorised, denied comms,<br />
audit, or restored).<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 196<br />
Event Facilities<br />
Originator The name of the keyholder that caused the event or the type of event from<br />
an hardware item.<br />
Source The name of the operator or hardware item that is affected by the event.<br />
Description A description of the event.<br />
Organisation The organisational unit where the event occurred.<br />
The event log has the following toolbar:<br />
The Play icon refreshes the event log automatically when a new event occurs.<br />
The Pause icon prevents the event log being updated when a new event occurs.<br />
The Controller Time icon displays the data and time based on either controller or<br />
PC time dependent on the event source time zone.<br />
The Universal Time icon displays the data and time based on UT time.<br />
The Filter icon displays three tabs that allow filter criteria to be specified:<br />
Highlight – select the highlight colour for the filter (only displayed if specifying<br />
a filter). Each filter can be allocated a colour to use in the Event Log to<br />
highlight events, see the Highlighting Events section.<br />
Category – select the required categories.<br />
Identity - select a category. If the selected category is not ‘Any’, the filter<br />
criteria can be specified by data entry or from a drop down list (select the<br />
icon) or (for keyholders) the Advanced Keyholder Search window
(select the icon), see the Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator<br />
section. This tab also allows and or or operators to be selected.<br />
Time – select a date and time range for the filter criteria and a CCTV only<br />
checkbox to display only events related to alarms points linked to a CCTV<br />
video source.<br />
Three buttons are also displayed:<br />
Clear – clears filter criteria that has been applied (if this button is not greyed<br />
out, some events are being filtered out).<br />
Apply – applies the specified filter criteria.<br />
Cancel – cancels filter criteria that has not been applied.<br />
The Show as a Report icon displays the Event Log report that provides print<br />
facilities.<br />
The Refresh icon updates the event log.<br />
The Dock/Undock icon docks or undocks the event log (see Tear Off Controls).<br />
To select which columns to display:<br />
1. Right click on the column heading.<br />
2. Select which columns to display from the drop-down menu.<br />
To display information on items associated with the event:<br />
• Right click on the event and select Show Details for item or Navigate to item from the<br />
drop-down menu.<br />
To display information on an audit event:<br />
• Right click on the event and select Show Audit Details from the drop-down menu.<br />
To create a keyholder when an unknown keyholder event occurs:<br />
1. Right click on the event and select the Copy keycode option.<br />
2. Select the Keyholder module and New button.<br />
3. Select the Keyholder Keys tab and Add New Key button.<br />
4. Right click on the Key Code field, select the Paste option and the copied key code is<br />
entered in to the field.<br />
5. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information for the new keyholder.<br />
6. Select the Add button.<br />
To forgive an anti-passback violation by a keyholder:<br />
• Right click on the event and select the Anti-Passback Forgive option.<br />
To close the event log:<br />
• Select on the tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 197<br />
Event Facilities
9.1.1.1 Highlighting Events<br />
To allocate a colour to an events filter:<br />
1. Display the Event Log.<br />
2. If the Filter bar is not already<br />
displayed, select the Filter<br />
icon.<br />
3. Select a filter or the Add button.<br />
4. Enter the filter name and (if<br />
required) a description.<br />
5. Select the Colour button and<br />
select a colour for the event<br />
filter (e.g. red for alarms).<br />
6. Specify a filter by selecting the<br />
appropriate tab(s) and<br />
specifying the filter criteria (e.g.<br />
select the Category tab and<br />
deselect all event types except<br />
the Alarms checkbox).<br />
7. Select Apply to display the<br />
results.<br />
To move an entry in the list:<br />
1. Select the event filter.<br />
2. Select the up or down button<br />
next to the Colour button.<br />
Note<br />
The position in the list<br />
determines the colour used if<br />
an event satisfies more than<br />
one search criteria.<br />
To delete an entry from the list:<br />
1. Select the event filter.<br />
2. Select the Delete button.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 198<br />
In this example alarms are shown in red and denied<br />
access events in yellow.<br />
Event Facilities
To save a set of event filters:<br />
1. Select Rules.<br />
2. Enter the file name and (if<br />
required) a description.<br />
3. Select the Save button.<br />
To load a set of event filters:<br />
1. Select Rules.<br />
2. Select the Load button.<br />
To specify the main filter:<br />
1. Select Filter.<br />
2. Specify a filter by selecting the<br />
appropriate tab(s) and<br />
specifying the filter criteria.<br />
3. Select the Apply button.<br />
Note<br />
The main filter may filter out<br />
highlighted events.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 199<br />
Event Facilities
9.2 Alarm Events and System Alarms<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 200<br />
Event Facilities<br />
If simple alarm monitoring is being used (i.e. alarm management is not licensed or selected<br />
alarms are not assigned to an area) the events to be classed as alarms can be specified by<br />
customisation and be monitored by the System Alarms window.<br />
The window is displayed if alarm events or system alarms are detected at login and when a new<br />
alarm is generated.<br />
The window can also be displayed by selecting Tools > System Alarms (see Menus section).<br />
To acknowledge the alarm(s), select the Clear<br />
All button.<br />
To update the alarm list, select the Refresh<br />
list.<br />
To prevent the window being displayed other<br />
than at login, select the Do not pop up this<br />
dialog again (until next login) checkbox.<br />
To close the window, select the Close<br />
window.
9.3 Alarm Alerts<br />
If Alarm Alert popups are enabled, any alarms will be displayed in the bottom right corner of<br />
the screen even when administration software is not running.<br />
To enable Alarm Alert popups:<br />
• Select File > Activate Alarm Alerts (see<br />
the Menus section).<br />
Changes will not take effect until Windows is<br />
logged off and on again.<br />
An Alarm Alerts icon will appear in the<br />
Windows taskbar. The icon's appearance<br />
depends on the area/alarm state:<br />
Disarmed Area<br />
Armed Area<br />
Partially Armed Area<br />
To close the popup:<br />
• Select the icon.<br />
To perform Alarm Alert tasks:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 201<br />
In Alarm<br />
Acknowledged Alarm<br />
Restored Alarm<br />
Server Connection Lost<br />
• Right click the Alarm Alert icon and the following options are available:<br />
Show <strong>User</strong> Interface - displays the Logon window.<br />
Run Alarm Viewer - displays the Logon window.<br />
Option - the following options are available:<br />
Popups for access events - enables/disables No popup for access events,<br />
Popup access denied only, or Popup any access events.<br />
Popups for alarm events - enables/disables All alarms in one popup, One<br />
popup per alarm area, or Popup for each alarm point.<br />
Activate Alarm Alerts - deselection disables the Alarm Alert popups.<br />
Exit - Exits the administration software and disables Alarm Alert popups.<br />
To disable Alarm Alert popups:<br />
• Select File > Activate Alarm Alerts (see the Menus section).<br />
or<br />
• Right click on the Alarm Alerts icon and deselect the Activate Alarms Alerts option.<br />
Changes will not take effect until Windows is logged off and on again.<br />
Event Facilities
9.4 Event Archive<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 202<br />
Event Facilities<br />
Archiving can be performed manually or automatically.<br />
Notes<br />
1. Archiving is specified using the Customisation facilities and the name of the files<br />
created are Edate.CSV. All archive files are in CSV (Comma-Separated Value) text file<br />
format.<br />
2. Only one archive can be performed each day and archives can only be performed if the<br />
minimum number of events to archive are available.<br />
3. Automatic archiving is not possible until at least Archive events older than (e.g. 7)<br />
days of events are available (see the Event Archiving section).<br />
4. Automatic archives are then performed at 18:00 only if the minimum number of events<br />
to archive are available and a manual archive has not been performed that day.<br />
When the event log is 80% full, an Event log<br />
archive due window is displayed.<br />
To manually archive the event log:<br />
1. Select the Yes button on the Event log<br />
archive due window or Tools > Event<br />
Archiving (either via the Menus or<br />
Explorer Bar) and the Event Archiving<br />
window is displayed.<br />
2. Enter the Archive Destination (i.e. the<br />
location of the archive file that will be<br />
created) or use the browse facility.<br />
3. Select the From oldest event up to and<br />
including events on this day radio<br />
button and specify a date.<br />
or<br />
Select the Percentage of events to<br />
archive radio button and specify the<br />
percentage.<br />
4. Select the Start button.<br />
To view the event archive history:<br />
• Select the Archive History tab.<br />
The following is then displayed for each archived file:<br />
Archive Date The date the archive was made.<br />
Filename The file name of archived data.<br />
Earliest Event The time and date of the earliest event in the archive file.<br />
Latest Event The time and date of the latest event in the archive file.
Discarded An indication as to whether events have been discarded instead of<br />
archived.<br />
Reloaded An indication as to whether archived events have been restored.<br />
Location The physical location of the archive media.<br />
Comment The comment entered by the operator when events were archived.<br />
To edit the comment:<br />
1. Select the Edit button and the Archive<br />
File Status window is displayed.<br />
2. The archive file is marked as Present by<br />
default but can be marked as Lost if it has<br />
been lost or deleted.<br />
3. The comment can be created or edited.<br />
4. Select the OK button.<br />
To display the event statistics:<br />
• Select the Event Statistics tab.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 203<br />
Event Facilities<br />
The following is then displayed:<br />
Event Total/Max: Then number of events not archived and the number of events<br />
required before archive will occur.<br />
Earliest event timestamp The earliest event not archived.<br />
Latest event timestamp The latest event not archived.<br />
Total days of events The number of days not archived.<br />
Total events for archive The number of events that will be archived if a manual or<br />
automatic archive is performed. If Automatic is 0, the<br />
minimum number of events for an automatic archive are not<br />
available and an automatic archive will not be performed if this<br />
condition exists at 18:00.<br />
Percentage of events The percentage of events that can be archived if a manual or<br />
archivable<br />
automatic archive is performed.
9.5 Event Archive Restore<br />
To restore an archived event file:<br />
1. The event report is used to restore<br />
archived events. When the events report<br />
is selected, a range of dates are specified<br />
and if these dates require an archived<br />
event file, the Event Archive Restoral<br />
window is displayed.<br />
2. Select which files to restore and the file<br />
path of their location.<br />
3. Select the Continue button and the files<br />
will be restored.<br />
4. If a file is not found, an error message is<br />
displayed which then redisplays the Event<br />
Archive Restoral window. The missing<br />
file can be removed from the list and the<br />
Continue button used to restore the other<br />
files.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 204<br />
Event Facilities
9.6 Event to Action<br />
9.6.1 Introduction<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 205<br />
Event Facilities<br />
The Event to Action facility enables system actions to be activated based on an event occurring<br />
within the system. Each set of actions for a specified event is called and each scenario can<br />
specify one or more actions linked to a specific event.<br />
To specify a scenario, click here.<br />
To add each event and its associated action in the scenario, click here.<br />
To configure muster and evacuation, click here.<br />
Note<br />
The Event to Action facility for 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers is implemented<br />
via the Output Activation tab of the Controller Outputs page.<br />
9.6.2 Event to Action Details<br />
To specify a scenario:<br />
1. Select Event to Action Configuration in<br />
the Shortcut tab or Tools menu and the<br />
Event to Action Configuration window is<br />
displayed.<br />
2. If necessary, select the organisational<br />
unit.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
4. Select the New button.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Name The name of the scenario (specified by data entry).<br />
Description A description of the scenario (specified by data entry).<br />
Time Profile<br />
The time profile during which the scenario is active (selected from a dropdown<br />
list).<br />
• Select the Add button and it changes to Update.<br />
Now add the event and associated actions.<br />
9.6.3 Event to Action Configuration<br />
To specify the event and add its associated actions in the scenario:<br />
1. Specify the scenario as described in the<br />
Event to Action Details section.<br />
2. Select the Configuration tab.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 206<br />
Event Facilities<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Type The type of item that may generate the event (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
Name<br />
The name of the item that may generate the event (selected from a dropdown<br />
list).<br />
When Condition<br />
To add an event:<br />
The event that will trigger the action (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
• Select the Add button.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Perform The action to take if the event occurs (selected from a drop-down list).<br />
The output to turn on or off if the event occurs (selected from a drop-down<br />
Target<br />
list). Not used if the action is to send an e-mail.<br />
The recipient and subject of the e-mail (specified by selecting the field, then<br />
Action Settings<br />
, and the Configure Send Email window is displayed. Not used if the<br />
action is to turn an output on or off.<br />
To delete an event:<br />
1. Select the event.<br />
2. Select the Delete button.<br />
To test an event:<br />
1. Select the event.<br />
2. Select the Test button.<br />
To confirm any changes to the scenario:<br />
• Select Add/Update button.<br />
To cancel any changes to the scenario:<br />
• Select Cancel button.<br />
To delete a scenario:<br />
1. Select the scenario.<br />
2. Select the Delete button.<br />
If licensed for remote event-to-action, inputs on one 500 can be selected to trigger<br />
actions on a different 500. These remote actions are intentionally distinguished from<br />
normal (local) actions because they require the PC to be switched on, require the target<br />
500 as well as the source 500 to be working, and they take longer to activate because<br />
the events have to get back to the event manager before any action can be taken.<br />
Because of this, remote actions have a 5-minute timeout: if the initiating event does not<br />
reach the event manager within 5 minutes, the event manager does not perform the<br />
action. Instead it sends a message to the log. The 5-minute timeout could be reached<br />
after a communications failure and recovery or a huge amounts of events are being<br />
handled.
9.6.4 Configure Send Email<br />
To configure an email that is sent if a specified event occurs:<br />
• Display the Configure Send Email window<br />
as described in the Event to Action<br />
Configuration section.<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
The name of the keyholder to whom the email is to be sent (selected<br />
Keyholder from a drop-down list). The keyholder must have an email address<br />
specified.<br />
Subject The subject of the email (specified by data entry).<br />
Send cause of<br />
action<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 207<br />
An indication that the cause of the action should be included in the email<br />
(specified by check box).<br />
Message The message to be included in the email (specified by data entry).<br />
To confirm any changes:<br />
• Select the OK button.<br />
To cancel any changes:<br />
• Select the Cancel button.<br />
Event Facilities
9.7 Muster and Evacuation<br />
9.7.1 Introduction<br />
The Muster and Evacuation facility works through the Event to Action facility, which enables<br />
system actions to be activated, based on an event occurring within the system. Each set of<br />
actions for a specified event is called a scenario and each scenario can specify one or more<br />
actions linked to a specific event.<br />
To specify a scenario, click here.<br />
To add each event and its associated action in the scenario, Click here.<br />
9.7.2 Specifying the Alarm Point for Muster<br />
In order to configure a muster alarm, several conditions must be fulfilled.<br />
1. The digital input must be an alarm point.<br />
Select the Navigator tab followed by the Door option. Select the door to which the Muster<br />
event is to be connected. Select the Access tab. The appropriate SIG frame will show the<br />
Reader selected in the Muster Configuration process and the name of the Muster event.<br />
Once a Muster has been configured the SIG details are not editable within this screen.<br />
2. Ensure that the Input Mode is a 24-Hour Alarm.<br />
Select the Navigator tab followed by the Hardware option. Select the controller through which<br />
the Muster event is configured. Select the reader through which the Muster event is to be<br />
configured. Select the Inputs tab. Select the relay through which the Muster event is to be<br />
configured. Select the Input Configuration tab.<br />
This must be completed before the Muster configuration can be created, otherwise the muster<br />
configuration will fail and an error message will appear.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 208<br />
Event Facilities
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 209<br />
Event Facilities<br />
3. Ensure that the alarm is assigned to an area.<br />
Select the Navigator tab followed by the Hardware option. In the tree list view of the<br />
Connected Controllers a list of the Muster controllers is displayed along with the associated<br />
doors.<br />
Select a Muster Controller to display it’s properties. The properties frame displays tabs for<br />
Controller Details, Doors, Inputs, Outputs and Alarm Management. Within the Inputs tab<br />
are the Input Configuration and Alarm Properties tabs. Select the Alarm Properties tab and<br />
the Alarm Area box in order to assign the alarm to an area for display with the Alarm Viewer.<br />
If the area is disassociated from the alarm an error message will appear.
9.7.3 Muster Details<br />
To specify a scenario:<br />
1. Select Event to Action Configuration in<br />
the Shortcut tab or Tools menu and the<br />
Event to Action Configuration window is<br />
displayed.<br />
2. If necessary, select the organisational<br />
unit.<br />
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.<br />
4. Select the New button.<br />
The following can then be specified within the Details tab:<br />
Name The name of the scenario (specified by data entry).<br />
Description A description of the scenario (specified by data entry).<br />
The time profile during which the scenario is active (selected from a drop-<br />
Time Profile<br />
down list).<br />
Select the Add button and it changes to Update.<br />
Now add the event and associated actions.<br />
9.7.4 Event to Action - 1<br />
The following can be specified within the Event to Action Configuration tab:<br />
The source of the input signal (specified by drop-down menu list)<br />
Type<br />
must be a Controller Input.<br />
Name The name of the signal provider (specified by drop-down menu)<br />
When condition<br />
Select Add and a new<br />
entry will be created with<br />
Perform, Target and<br />
Action settings fields.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 210<br />
A description of times in which the scenario is active (selected from<br />
a drop-down list) e.g. when Input normal, Input tamper cleared etc.<br />
Perform You should select Muster for this option.<br />
Target Not applicable for Muster configuration.<br />
Action Settings This box remains empty, except for an expand button. Select<br />
this button to display the Muster Configuration window.<br />
Event Facilities
9.7.5 Muster Configuration<br />
Once the expand button inside the Action Settings box has been selected, a new Muster<br />
Configuration window will open and the following options will be available:<br />
General, Server Printers, Readers.<br />
General Muster Name<br />
Server<br />
Printers<br />
Alarm reset requires<br />
acknowledgement<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 211<br />
A Muster name must be added.<br />
The OK button will remain grey until a name<br />
has been entered.<br />
All alarms must be assigned to an area.<br />
If checked, the muster will not stop until the<br />
alarm generated by the muster start has<br />
been acknowledged and cleared.<br />
If not checked, then once the digital input<br />
(24 hour alarm point which triggered the<br />
event to action) has returned to its normal<br />
state, the muster will stop.<br />
Event Facilities<br />
Select and Add the Printer to be used for generating the Muster report. This can be<br />
any printer configured on the PC on which the <strong>PAC</strong> <strong>SecureNet</strong> server is installed.<br />
After the Printer has been selected further options become available within the General tab.<br />
General Report Printing Setup Repeat<br />
Delay<br />
Select the time, in minutes, to specify the<br />
report printing frequency.
Readers<br />
Repeat<br />
Count<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 212<br />
Select the number of times the Muster<br />
report is required to be printed.<br />
Select the one, or more, Reader(s) to be used for Mustering. The list of available<br />
readers will be displayed for selection.<br />
Note:<br />
Any readers selected for mustering will not be available for normal access use.<br />
Event Facilities<br />
Once the Muster configuration has been completed, select OK to accept the changes or select<br />
Cancel at any time to abandon the changes made.<br />
Only one Muster Configuration is available per Organisational Unit.<br />
If an attempt is made to add a second Muster Configuration then an error window will appear<br />
stating “License exceeded. You are only licensed for 1 Muster record(s).”<br />
Select OK to acknowledge and close this window.
9.7.6 Event to Action Configuration - 2<br />
The name of the Muster Configuration created will now appear in the Action Settings tab of the<br />
Event to Action window.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 213<br />
Event Facilities<br />
• Select the Add button to add more actions to perform or Delete to remove the action. Test<br />
is not available when configuring a Muster.<br />
To add a scenario:<br />
1. Select the scenario.<br />
2. Select the Add button.<br />
To delete an event:<br />
1. Select the event.<br />
2. Select the Delete button.<br />
To confirm any changes to the scenario:<br />
• Select Add/Update button.<br />
To cancel any changes to the scenario:<br />
• Select Cancel button.<br />
To delete a scenario:<br />
• Select Delete button.<br />
Select OK to close the Event to Action Configuration window.<br />
9.7.7 Muster Operation<br />
After a Muster alarm is raised:<br />
• Muster mode is entered – the event log shows an alarm raised.<br />
• Alarm viewer maximises to show the area where the alarm has been raised.<br />
• The Muster report window opens.<br />
• The Initial Muster report optionally prints.<br />
• The Muster report on screen refreshes each time a token is presented to any reader and/or<br />
every minute if no token is presented.<br />
• Muster mode remains active until the associated activating alarm is cleared, i.e. the alarm is<br />
acknowledged and the alarm state is returned to normal.
Note:<br />
• The Alarm viewer will only display if it is already running or if the option to automatically<br />
open in the event of an alarm being raised has been selected in the currently logged on<br />
operator’s options.<br />
• The Muster report window will only open if the Alarm viewer opens.<br />
• If the Alarm viewer is closed then the Muster report window is also closed.<br />
• If the Muster report window is closed it can be re-opened from within the Alarm viewer,<br />
View > Muster Report.<br />
Each time a token is presented to a Muster reader, the Event log will show two events<br />
• A Token has been presented to the Muster reader<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 214<br />
Event Facilities<br />
• The Keyholder has been mustered i.e. the keyholder’s name now appears on the Muster<br />
report and triggers the Muster screen and report to refresh.<br />
If a token is used within the alarm area whilst the area is in muster mode then the report screen<br />
will refresh showing the last known location of all keyholders (tokens) still in the building.<br />
If a token is used within the area whilst no muster alarm is in process then the report screen will<br />
refresh showing the last known location of all keyholders.
10. Other Facilities<br />
10.1 Modems<br />
To configure a modem:<br />
1. Select the Hardware in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select the channel the modem is<br />
connected to.<br />
3. Select Hardware > Modems (via the<br />
Menus) or the icon (in the toolbar)<br />
and the Modems windows is displayed.<br />
4. Select a modem from the list of available<br />
modems<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 215<br />
Other Facilities<br />
The following can then be specified:<br />
Use this modem The modem is enabled for use (specified by check box).<br />
Name The name of the modem (specified by data entry).<br />
Dialback number The telephone number for dialback to the PC (specified by data entry<br />
and enabled by check box).<br />
Current Number The current telephone number of the modem (automatically<br />
entered).<br />
To dialup/hangup a modem:<br />
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select the dialup channel, select Hardware<br />
> Dial Up, Show Call Progress or Hang<br />
Up (via the Menus) and the Dialup<br />
Connection window is displayed.<br />
or<br />
Right click on the dialup channel and select<br />
the Dial Now, Show Call Progress or<br />
Hang Up option and the Dialup<br />
Connection window is displayed.<br />
3. Select Dial Now to dialup the modem, or<br />
Hang Up to hang up the connection, or<br />
Close to close the window.<br />
To reset dialup password:<br />
This procedure is required if a Failed authentication for dialup channel message is obtained.<br />
This occurs because a password is used to establish communication between the PC and<br />
controller. If a controller or PC is changed, the password will need to be reset at the controller<br />
and PC.<br />
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select the dialup channel, select Hardware<br />
> Reset Password (via the Menus) and<br />
the Reset Password window is displayed.<br />
or<br />
Right click on the dialup channel and select<br />
the Reset Password option and the Reset<br />
Dialup Password window is displayed..<br />
3. Select OK and the Reset Password
window is displayed.<br />
4. Power down the controller.<br />
5. Press the One-Touch button whilst<br />
restoring the power and release button<br />
when the LED flashes at its normal rate.<br />
6. Select OK to close the window.<br />
10.2 Modem Initialization String<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 216<br />
Other Facilities<br />
If additional parameters are required in the modem initialisation string (see the manufacturer's<br />
modem documentation) the additional parameters can be specified before taking the controller<br />
to its remote location and connecting the modem.<br />
The controller should be connected on a direct line and probed. The additional parameters can<br />
then be specified. After specification the controller can be moved to its remote location,<br />
connected to its modem and probed again.<br />
To specify additional parameters for the modem initialization string:<br />
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Right click on the controller and select Set<br />
Modem Intialization String or select the<br />
controller select Hardware > Set Modem<br />
Intialization String (via the Menus) and<br />
the Modem Intialization String windows<br />
is displayed.<br />
3. Select the Additional Parameters<br />
checkbox and enter any additional<br />
parameters required for the modem.<br />
10.3 Database Backup<br />
To backup the database:<br />
1. Select Tools > Backup Database (either<br />
via the Menus or Explorer Bar) and the<br />
Backup window is displayed.<br />
2. Select a folder using the browse facility<br />
and enter a file name. A default location is<br />
set at installation.<br />
3. If the event log is not to be backed up,<br />
deselect the Backup Events Table check<br />
box.<br />
4. Select the Backup button.<br />
A backup can also be performed using the following command:<br />
“C:\Program Files\ Administration Software\Bin\Bin.NET\<strong>PAC</strong>UI.exe” /BACKUP<br />
Notes<br />
1. Administration Software is the name of the administration software.<br />
2. This command cannot be performed on a client PC.<br />
3. A scheduled Windows Task can be created to provide an automated, regular backup,<br />
click here.
To schedule a regular backup:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 217<br />
Other Facilities<br />
A Windows Scheduling Task can be created to provide an automated regular backup.<br />
Notes<br />
1. Further information on running Task Scheduler is given in the Windows helpfile.<br />
2. This command can only be used on the server PC<br />
Procedure<br />
1. Select Start > Settings >Control Panel >Scheduler Tasks and the Scheduled Tasks<br />
window is displayed.<br />
2. Select Add Schedule Tasks and the Schedule Task Wizard window is displayed.<br />
3. Select the Next button and use the Browse facility to locate the <strong>PAC</strong>UI.exe file in the<br />
Bin\Bin.Net folder of the administration software installation.<br />
4. Double click on the <strong>PAC</strong>UI.exe file and specify the task name and when the task is to be<br />
performed.<br />
5. Select Next and enter the user name of the computer (in domainname\username format),<br />
enter a password and confirmation.<br />
6. Select Next and select the Open advanced properties for this task when I click Finish<br />
checkbox.<br />
7. Select Finish and add space/BACKUP to the Run command:<br />
“c:\Program Files\Administration Software\Bin\Bin.NET\<strong>PAC</strong>UI.exe” /BACKUP<br />
8. Select OK and backup files will be created as scheduled. The backup file format name is<br />
EKA_yearmonthday_hourminute.ekb (e.g. EKA 20080927_1200.ekb) and will be located in<br />
the default folder.<br />
To restore the backup, see the Restore section.<br />
10.4 Import<br />
To import a database:<br />
1. Select File > Import (via the Menus) and<br />
the File Import window is displayed.<br />
2. Select the type of import file from the list<br />
and use the Browse facility to select the<br />
file to import.<br />
3. Select the Import button.<br />
Note<br />
After an import a database download is required on all channels.
10.5 Upgrade License<br />
The software can be upgraded to an option that provides more facilities (e.g. more keyholders<br />
and doors (see the Specification section).<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 218<br />
Other Facilities<br />
Make a note of the license key. If Administration Software is upgraded and re-installed,<br />
the license key must be re-entered.<br />
To upgrade the software license:<br />
1. Contact your license provider to obtain a<br />
new license key. They will require your<br />
system fingerprint number and your<br />
current license key. These are displayed<br />
on the License Keys window<br />
2. Select Tools > Upgrade License (via the<br />
Menus) and the License Keys window is<br />
displayed.<br />
3. Select the New Licence button and the<br />
new window is displayed.<br />
4. Enter your new license key provided by<br />
license provider.<br />
5. Select the OK button.<br />
To delete a licence key:<br />
1. Select a licence key.<br />
2. Select the Delete button.<br />
To print the software license details:<br />
• Select the Print button.<br />
To close the window:<br />
• Select the Close button.
10.6 Configure Peripherals<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 219<br />
Other Facilities<br />
An administration reader (desktop reader) can be connected to a controller via PC interface kit.<br />
This administration reader can be used to assign keys to keyholders.<br />
The Admin Reader tab configures the COM port that the administration reader is connected.<br />
The Encoder tab specifies additional information required if a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card<br />
Writer is being used as an administration reader.<br />
To configure the administration reader:<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select Tools > Configure Peripherals<br />
and the Configure Peripherals window is<br />
displayed.<br />
3. .If necessary, select the Admin Reader<br />
tab.<br />
4. Select the channel that has the<br />
administration reader connected.<br />
5. Select the Click to test checkbox, present<br />
a key to the reader, and the key's code<br />
should be displayed.<br />
If the token number does not appear, check:<br />
• The administration kit is connected to the<br />
correct port on the PC.<br />
• The administration kit is powered up.<br />
• The administration kit is correctly wired to<br />
the desktop reader, administration<br />
computer, and controller (if one is<br />
connected via the administration kit).<br />
• If a 1100/2100/2200 master controller has<br />
been configured on the administration kit<br />
channel, the administration kit cannot be<br />
configured if the master controller is not<br />
connected or communicating. If this<br />
occurs, deselect the Online checkbox on<br />
the master controller Details tab.<br />
To specify additional information for a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:<br />
1. Select the Encoder tab.<br />
2. Select the PC communications port that<br />
has the administration reader attached.<br />
Ensure that the encoder is not<br />
connected to a COM port that has been<br />
configured for something else.<br />
3. Select the coercivity (High or Low) .<br />
4. Select the density at which information is<br />
written to the card (range 75 to 210 bits<br />
per inch).<br />
Consult the reader manufacturer's<br />
documentation for correct settings.
To close a window:<br />
• Select the Close button.<br />
To encode a magnetic stripe card:<br />
• Click here.<br />
10.7 Manage Controller Firmware<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 220<br />
Other Facilities<br />
Updated firmware for the 500 series can be added to the Administration Software database and<br />
downloaded to the servers and controllers.<br />
To add the controller firmware:<br />
1. Copy the firmware file to the Firmware<br />
Images folder.<br />
2. Select Tools > Manage Controller<br />
Firmware (via the Menus) and the<br />
Manage Controller Firmware window is<br />
displayed.<br />
3. If servers and controllers have been<br />
specified, select the appropriate tab.<br />
4. If a firmware version has already been<br />
added, it can be deleted by selecting the<br />
Delete button.<br />
5. Select the Add button and the Controller<br />
Firmware Files window is displayed.<br />
6. Navigate to the Firmware Images folder.<br />
7. Select the required firmware file and Open<br />
or double click on the file.<br />
8. The Manage Controller Firmware<br />
window is then updated with the following<br />
information:<br />
Firmware Version The firmware that has been added.<br />
Firmware Type The type of firmware added. Different types may provide different<br />
features.<br />
Min Board Rev The minimum revision number of the printed circuit board required for<br />
a download to the controller.<br />
Max Board Rev The maximum revision number of the printed circuit board required for<br />
a download to the controller.<br />
Support Hardware The type of controllers supported by this firmware.<br />
9. Select the Close button.<br />
To download the added firmware to a server or controller:<br />
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 221<br />
Other Facilities<br />
1. Select the Hardware module.<br />
2. Select a server or controller in the List<br />
View.<br />
3. .Select the Tasks button and Firmware<br />
download from the drop-down menu or<br />
Hardware > Firmware download (via the<br />
Menus) and the Manage Firmware<br />
window is displayed.<br />
4. If necessary, select the firmware version.<br />
5. Select the Download button.<br />
Repeat for each controller.<br />
To reset the server password:<br />
This procedure is required if an Authorisation failed (password reset may be required) message<br />
is obtained.<br />
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.<br />
2. Select the 500 TCP/IP channel, select<br />
Hardware > Reset Password (via the<br />
Menus) and the Reset Password window<br />
is displayed.<br />
or<br />
Right click on the 500 TCP/IP channel and<br />
select the Reset Password option and the<br />
Reset Dialup Password window is<br />
displayed.<br />
3. Select OK and the Reset Password<br />
window is displayed.<br />
4. Power down the server and press the One-<br />
Touch button for app. 7 seconds while<br />
powering up. The LED goes out when the<br />
password has been reset and then<br />
resumes normal flashing.<br />
5. Select OK to close the window.<br />
10.8 Change Password<br />
To change a password:<br />
1. Select Tools > Change Password (via<br />
the Menus) and the Change Password<br />
window is displayed.<br />
2. Enter the old password.<br />
3. Enter the new password (at least 6<br />
characters) and confirm password.<br />
4. Select OK.
10.9 Search for a Keyholder<br />
When searching for a keyholder, there are three methods.<br />
Key Seek<br />
1. Select the icon, or press F3 or Tools<br />
> Key Seek (via the Menus) and the<br />
Find a Keyholder by Key window is<br />
displayed.<br />
2. Select the type of reader.<br />
3. Present the key to the administration<br />
reader or enter the key number.<br />
4. Select Find. All organisational units are<br />
searched.<br />
Search Bar (only available in Keyholder module)<br />
1. Select the icon, press Ctrl-F or Tools<br />
> Search Bar and the Search bar is<br />
displayed.<br />
2. Enter search criteria (e.g. last name).<br />
3. If searching for a key code, select the Key<br />
Code check box and card format. Then<br />
present the key to the administration<br />
reader or enter the key code.<br />
4. Select the Search button and the<br />
keyholder is displayed in the Keyholder<br />
Property Page. An icon next to the field<br />
indicates that the field is being used in the<br />
search.<br />
5. To search other organisational units,<br />
select the Search Organisations link and<br />
the Advanced Keyholder Search window<br />
is displayed.<br />
Advanced Keyholder Search<br />
1. Press Ctrl-F or select the Search<br />
Organisations link on the Keyholder<br />
modules Search bar and the Advanced<br />
Keyholder Search window is displayed.<br />
2. Enter the organisational unit to search<br />
(select ‘Any’ to search all organisational<br />
units).<br />
3. Enter search criteria (e.g. last name).<br />
4. Select the Search button and the<br />
keyholder is displayed in the Keyholder<br />
Property Page. An icon next to the field<br />
indicates that the field is being used in the<br />
search.<br />
To display the keyholder details:<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 222<br />
Note<br />
The Key Code check box must be<br />
deselected before adding keys.<br />
Other Facilities<br />
• Select the keyholder displayed in the Keyholder module or Advanced Keyholder Search<br />
window.<br />
To perform a new search on the Advanced Keyholder Search window or Search bar:<br />
1. Select the Reset button.
2. Enter new search criteria.<br />
3. Select the Search button.<br />
To close the Advanced Keyholder Search window or Search bar:<br />
• Select the Cancel button.<br />
10.10 Encode Keycode<br />
To encode a magnetic stripe card using a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:<br />
1. Select a keyholder and Keyholders ><br />
Encode Keycode in the menus, or Tasks<br />
> Encode Keycode on the Keyholder<br />
Details tab, or right click on a keyholder<br />
and select Encode Keycode and the<br />
Encode Keycode window is displayed.<br />
2. A list of keycodes available for encoding is<br />
displayed<br />
3. Select a keycode and swipe the card and<br />
the card will be encoded (the encoding<br />
can be cancelled by selecting the Cancel<br />
button).<br />
4. Another keycode can be selected and<br />
card swiped or the window can be closed.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 223<br />
Other Facilities<br />
To print and encode a magnetic stripe card using an Eltron P420 Card Printer:<br />
Printing and Encoding Magnetic Stripe Cards using an Eltron P420 Card Printer<br />
This section describes how to print and encode magnetic stripe cards using a P420 Card Printer<br />
and should be used in conjunction with the P420 manufacturer's documentation supplied by the<br />
Zebra Technologies Corporation.<br />
Procedure to set up the P420<br />
1. Connect the P420 to a parallel port of the PC.<br />
2. Insert the P420 CD and install the Windows Driver.<br />
3. Select Start > Settings > Printers and Faxes and the card printer should be listed.<br />
4. Right click on the Eltron P420 Card Printer and select the Properties option to display the<br />
Eltron P420 Card Printer Properties window.
5. Select the Device Settings tab and set the With magnetic encoder to Yes.<br />
If encoding is not required, select No.<br />
6. Select the Magnetic encoder settings and then the Properties button to display the<br />
Encoder Settings window.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 224<br />
Other Facilities<br />
7. Select the Restore Defaults button to enable macro processing, start of data to ${, and end<br />
of data to }$.<br />
8. Select the Advanced settings button to display the Advanced Settings window.
9. Specify the following settings:<br />
HiCo/LoCo High or Low (depends on card type)<br />
Encoder position Normal<br />
Encoder type ISO<br />
Track Track 2<br />
Mode ISO2<br />
Density 75bpi (or 210bpi if your reader supports it)<br />
10. Select the Apply button to redisplay the Encoder settings window.<br />
Procedure to test the P420<br />
1. Select Close on the Encoder settings window to redisplay the Device Settings tab.<br />
2. Select Tools and then the Properties button to display the Printer Tools window.<br />
3. Select the Track 2 check box and enter a dummy code in to the data entry field.<br />
4. Insert a card into the card input hopper on the P420 (the magnetic stripe must be on the<br />
underside of the card and towards the back of the P420).<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 225<br />
Other Facilities
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 226<br />
Other Facilities<br />
5. Select the Encode button and the printer should printer the card. If the test is successful,<br />
the card will be ejected into the card output hopper. If test is unsuccessful, the card will be<br />
ejected into the rejected card box.<br />
Procedure to print and encode a card<br />
1. Select Tools > Card Designer and design a magnetic stripe card for a category (e.g. Staff)<br />
using the ID Card Designer.<br />
2. Select the Keyholder module and add a keyholder with a key that has a magnetic stripe<br />
card format and the keycode you require for that card. The keyholder must have the same<br />
category (e.g. Staff) as the designed card.<br />
3. Select Tools > Options > Access Options and specify the magnetic stripe position and<br />
length.<br />
4. Select the Keyholder Details tab and print the keyholder card using the P420. The card will<br />
be printed and encoded with the specified keycode. Batch printing can be performed by<br />
selecting a number of keyholders (all must have magnetic stripe cards) and loading the<br />
appropriate number of cards in the printer.<br />
If only printing the back of cards, encoding will not be performed.<br />
When printing and encoding cards for a keyholder that has multiple keycodes<br />
assigned, only the first keycode in the list will be encoded. All others will be ignored.<br />
It not recommended to print and encode from the ID Card Designer because the<br />
orientation may be incorrect.<br />
10.11 Configure Organisations<br />
10.11.1 Introduction<br />
Multiple Organisation Units allow a customer’s database to be split into logical units for the<br />
purposes of administration. All data from any of the org units is maintained within one database.<br />
Multiple org units are activated by means of additional licensing options. The licenses procured<br />
will control the number of permitted org units.<br />
Upon the introduction of a new license, a new module is added to the system called ‘Guest’.<br />
This allows access to be granted to keyholders from other org units. These keyholders can be<br />
added to the local org unit access groups in order to gain access to the local org unit.<br />
Keyholder name, title and org unit details are shown on the property page (read only), but no<br />
other details are accessible.<br />
An operator can be assigned privilege rights to multiple org units. The system will then allow the<br />
operator to login to any of his privileged org units. The operator can have different operator<br />
templates for each org unit, from “no privilege” with no access rights to “installer” with full<br />
privileges.<br />
A keyholder in an area that is not in his own org unit may require keyholder forgive e.g. an antipassback<br />
lock-out. As a guest, his keyholder record does not appear in the keyholder list at the<br />
org unit site, therefore the forgive operation is available on the ‘Guest’ module. The operator<br />
can simply select the event and hit ‘Forgive’. This can also be done from the event log viewer.<br />
‘Keyholder Search’ is available via a search bar within the Guest option.<br />
‘Key Seek’ also searches guests to the local org unit.<br />
The operator sees all entries for all privileged org units when he uses Alarm Viewer. Maps are<br />
tied to particular org units and do not contain items from separate org units, however, multiple<br />
maps are visible simultaneously without the need to log into each org unit individually.<br />
The alarm/area status panes are partitioned to display their entries by org unit.<br />
The event log viewer shows events for the current org unit as well as any system events not<br />
associated with any particular org unit.<br />
The event log contains a new column for org unit name
10.11.2 Multiple Organisation Units Details<br />
10.11.2.1 License Upgrades<br />
Select Tools > Upgrade License and insert the new code provided. The software must be<br />
restarted for the changes to take effect:<br />
• The Login screen has a new box for “Organisation”, select the required org unit and<br />
enter the appropriate login details.<br />
• The Tools drop-down menu option now includes the new option “Configure<br />
Organisations”, to configure, add or delete org units.<br />
• A new module called ‘Guests’ appears in the Navigator explorer tree<br />
10.11.2.2 Log-in Screen<br />
At the Login screen a new box for “Organisation” appears, with a drop-down menu, allowing<br />
the operator to select which org unit to log into. The box defaults to the option selected during<br />
the operator’s last login.<br />
The Options button is used to hide or reveal the Server name and Organisation boxes.<br />
10.11.2.3 Tools Options<br />
The Tools drop-down menu includes the Configure Organisations option.<br />
• Select Tools > Configure<br />
Organisations and the<br />
Configure Organisations<br />
window is displayed.<br />
10.11.2.4 Edit, Add or Delete Org Units<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 227<br />
Other Facilities<br />
This function enables operators to configure current org units and to add new or delete existing<br />
Org units according to the limits of their license. Changes occur within the Tools menu.<br />
To add/edit an org unit:<br />
1. Select the Add New button or<br />
select the org unit to be edited<br />
and a data entry window is<br />
displayed.<br />
2. The following facilities are then<br />
available:<br />
• Specify the name.<br />
• Specify a description.<br />
• Specify a prefix that will be<br />
added to items to indicate<br />
their org unit.<br />
• Specify a location.<br />
• Select the time zone of the<br />
org unit’s location.<br />
3. Select the OK or Apply button.
To delete an org unit:<br />
1. Select the org unit to be deleted.<br />
2. Select the Delete button.<br />
Non-empty org units cannot be deleted and there must always be one org unit in the system.<br />
10.11.2.5 Guests<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 228<br />
Other Facilities<br />
This option allows keyholders from one org unit to have access to other org units. Access to the<br />
currently-selected org unit is controlled by assigning appropriate access groups to guests.<br />
To display the guest list view:<br />
1. Select the org unit the guest<br />
will be allowed access to.<br />
2. Select the Guest module.<br />
3. Enter search criteria.<br />
4. Select the guest keyholder.<br />
5. Select the Access tab.<br />
6. Select the access groups for<br />
the guest.<br />
10.11.2.6 Operators<br />
It is possible to allocate different administration privileges to operators within the different org<br />
units available.<br />
To specify operators and allocate privileges:<br />
1. Select the Operator<br />
module.<br />
2. Select an operator or<br />
create a new operator.<br />
3. Select the Privileges tab.<br />
4. Select the appropriate<br />
Privilege Template for<br />
each org unit.<br />
5. Select the Add or Update<br />
button.<br />
10.11.2.7 Reports<br />
An operator can only produce reports for the org unit into which he is currently logged.<br />
Some reports may need org unit as one of the report parameters.<br />
10.11.2.8 Alarm Viewer<br />
Alarm Viewer allows a simultaneous view of multiple org units to which an operator has<br />
privilege rights. Every org unit for which the operator has access privileges will be incorporated<br />
into the alarm viewer display.<br />
Multiple maps and multiple pages of video sources are available. It is possible to amend the<br />
view to show only one selected org unit, however, in the event of an alarm occurring, the alarm<br />
viewer automatically defaults to show the appropriate map for the org unit area concerned.<br />
10.11.2.9 Database Back-Up, Archive and Restore<br />
All operators have database back-up privileges, however, if a back-up is initiated then the entire<br />
database for all org units is backed up, not merely the org unit which the operator is currently
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 229<br />
Other Facilities<br />
logged into.<br />
If an operator carries out a database archive restore then the entire database is restored to the<br />
earlier state, not merely the database for the org unit the operator is currently logged into.<br />
10.11.3 Multiple Organisation Units Configuration<br />
10.11.3.1 <strong>User</strong> Interface<br />
Entities from foreign org units are prefixed by the org unit name or prefix.<br />
10.11.3.2 Database Download<br />
Controller downloads include keys from foreign org units with the potential for access. This<br />
means any guest who is allocated an access group will have his keys downloaded to the<br />
controllers for that org unit regardless of whether access is actually required.<br />
10.11.4 Multiple Organisation Units Configure Actions<br />
10.11.4.1 Configuring Org Units<br />
• When adding a new organisation unit, the properties are copied from the current org<br />
unit, e.g. custom labels, extra info, token formats, alarm settings.<br />
• When adding a new organisation unit the current operator and installer are given full<br />
privileges.<br />
• It is possible to delete an organisation unit which has an empty database, but not current<br />
org unit. It is not possible to delete an organisation unit with any data saved into it.<br />
• It is possible to change organisation unit details such as name, description, prefix and<br />
location.<br />
• Duplicate and blank organisation unit names are not allowed.<br />
• Operator privilege is respected, it is not possible to view or delete organisation units for<br />
which the operator has no privilege. It is not possible to add an organisation unit unless<br />
the operator has ‘add’ privileges in the current organisation unit.<br />
• Discard (Cancel) gives the appropriate warning if details have been changed and<br />
unsaved.<br />
10.11.4.2 Login<br />
• When an operator with 'no privilege' to an organisation unit tries to log into the system an<br />
appropriate error is displayed and the operator is blocked.<br />
• Guards log into guard view for each appropriate organisation unit, i.e. Event Log Viewer<br />
or Alarm Viewer, showing the appropriate data for the logged in org unit.<br />
• The <strong>User</strong> Interface remembers the last record accessed for each individual organisation<br />
unit.<br />
• When the server is unavailable, or the user types an invalid server name, the system<br />
remains responsive and displays a warning triangle next to the server name. The<br />
organisation unit list becomes unavailable. An error is displayed when the user attempts<br />
to login.<br />
• When multiple organisation units are licensed, the login and logout events include a<br />
drop-down list of the available organisation unit names.<br />
• Session timeouts do not appear in the event log, but are displayed to the user.<br />
10.11.4.3 Operator Property Page<br />
• Copy operator copies template privileges for all org units.<br />
• When the operator changes the privileges of his own account in the current organisation<br />
unit, the user interface forces the system to close so that the operator must login again.<br />
The operator may change privileges in other organisation units without the logout.
10.11.4.4 Event Log Viewer<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 230<br />
Other Facilities<br />
• Events for the current organisation unit are displayed, plus any system events which are<br />
not associated with any organisation unit.<br />
• Simple alarms are reported for the current organisation unit only.<br />
• ‘Show details’ and ‘Navigate To’ functionality works for all entity types.<br />
• The ‘Navigate To’ function will take the user to either the keyholder page for keyholders<br />
in the current organisation unit, or the guests’ page for keyholders in other organisation<br />
units.<br />
• The ‘Show Details’ function will show either the keyholder page for keyholders in the<br />
current organisation unit, or the guests’ page for keyholders in other organisation units.<br />
10.11.4.5 Guests<br />
• The operator can assign local access groups to ‘Guest’ records provided he has<br />
‘keyholder’ privilege in the local organisation unit.<br />
• Keyholders who have access to other organisation units can be deleted.<br />
• The guests’ list supports multiple select and multiple updating (like keyholders).<br />
• Search results count appears in the status bar.<br />
• Key seek will navigate to the guests’ page, if the required key is held by a guest, but only<br />
if the operator has privilege to view keyholders in the other organisation unit.<br />
• If key seek criteria matches an entry in 2 organisation units, the local organisation unit is<br />
always favoured.<br />
10.11.4.6 Hardware<br />
• Guest keys are downloaded to controller.<br />
• When probing for 500s or IP controllers, if the IP address is in use by hardware in<br />
another organisation unit the user interface makes this clear, rather than allowing<br />
multiple assignment.<br />
• When checking that a dialup channel has a unique phone number, the system checks<br />
channels in all organisation units.<br />
• Modems are available to all organisation units and can be used by channels on different<br />
organisation units.<br />
10.11.4.7 Alarm Viewer<br />
• Alarm points are qualified by organisation unit prefix or name, when there are multiple<br />
org units.<br />
• Events / Alarms list shows records for all organisation units which the operator is<br />
privileged to see. There is a column showing organisation unit name.<br />
• Video sources are shown for all organisation units which the operator is privileged to<br />
see.<br />
• Alarms in any of the displayed organisation units are handled appropriately and can be<br />
acknowledged.<br />
• Alarms not assigned to any of the displayed organisation units are not shown.<br />
10.11.4.8 Miscellaneous<br />
• Reports are organisation unit aware i.e. data from other organisation units is not<br />
exposed to unprivileged operators.<br />
• Data imports into the current organisation unit only.<br />
• Duplicate names for entities are allowed if the entities are in different organisation units.
• Restoring a database restores all data, not just the current organisation unit data.<br />
• Event To Action is limited to entities in the current organisation unit only.<br />
• Licensing limits apply to the total number of entities across all organisation units.<br />
• SWB hardware can only be added to any organisation unit which does not have weekly<br />
time profiles.<br />
• The current organisation unit name appears on the status bar of the application.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 231<br />
Other Facilities
10.12 Audit Trail<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 232<br />
Other Facilities<br />
The Audit Trail module gives the ability to track changes made to the administration system. A<br />
search can be specified to determine what changes an operator had made to items (e.g.<br />
keyholders) over a specified time period.<br />
To display an audit trail report:<br />
1. Select Tools > Audit Trail or select Audit<br />
Trail in the Explorer bar and the Audit<br />
Trail Parameters window is displayed.<br />
2. Select a Start Date and End Date for the<br />
search.<br />
3. Select all operators or an Operator from<br />
the drop-down list.<br />
4. Select all items or an Item from the dropdown<br />
list.<br />
5. Select the OK button and the Audit<br />
Report window is displayed.<br />
6. Different pages of the report can be<br />
displayed by selecting the Next and<br />
Previous buttons.<br />
7. The report can be refreshed by selecting<br />
the Refresh button<br />
8. If required the report can be printed by<br />
selecting the Print button.<br />
9. A new search can be specified by<br />
selecting the Parameters button.<br />
10. The report can be exported to Crystal<br />
Reports by selecting the Export button.
11. Error Messages<br />
If the error message does not give sufficient information to correct the error, please use our<br />
knowledge database: www.pactechinfo.co.uk.<br />
Helpfile All Ver 3.22 233<br />
Error Messages